2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Canada-6007168) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-33
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-35 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-41
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-45
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-69
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Trademarks and License Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-6007168) - Black plate (2,1)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Special Application OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Additional Maintenance OnStar Additional
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
2014 - 2nd Edition - 2/3/14
Introduction iii
specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, To quickly locate information about
substitute the name “General the vehicle, use the Index in the
Motors of Canada Limited” for back of the manual. It is an
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it alphabetical list of what is in the
appears in this manual. manual and the page number where
The names, logos, emblems, it can be found.
slogans, vehicle model names, and Keep this manual in the vehicle for
vehicle body designs appearing in quick reference. Danger, Warnings, and
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, Canadian Vehicle Owners Cautions
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
CRUZE are trademarks and/or Propriétaires Canadiens { Danger
service marks of General Motors A French language manual can be
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, obtained from your dealer, at Text marked { Danger provides
or licensors. www.helminc.com, or from: information on risk of fatal injury.
This manual describes features that On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Disregarding this information may
may or may not be on your specific ce guide en français auprès du endanger life.
vehicle either because they are concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
options that you did not purchase or savant:
due to changes subsequent to the
Helm, Incorporated
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase Attention: Customer Service
documentation relating to your 47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22895907 C Third Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
iv Introduction
A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

{ Warning safety symbol which means “Do Here are some additional symbols
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let that may be found on the vehicle
Text marked { Warning provides this happen.” and what they mean. For more
information on risk of accident or
information on the symbol, refer to
injury. Disregarding this Symbols the Index.
information may lead to injury.
The vehicle has components and 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with # : Air Conditioning
{ Caution the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
component, control, message,
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
Text marked { Caution provides or OnStar
information that may indicate a gauge, or indicator.
hazard that could result in injury M: This symbol is shown when
$ : Brake System Warning Light
or death. It could also result in you need to see your owner manual " : Charging System
possible damage to the vehicle. for additional instructions or I : Cruise Control
information.
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual O : Exterior Lamps
for additional instructions or # : Fog Lamps
information.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Vehicle Features

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Instrument Panel Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17
Initial Drive Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Driver Information
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Performance and Maintenance
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Traction Control/Electronic
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Passenger Sensing
Driving for Better Fuel
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . 1-21
Steering Wheel
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Roadside Assistance
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Exterior Lamp Controls on 9. Infotainment Display Screen. 19. Power Door Locks on
page 6-1. 10. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-12.
Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4 (If page 4-1 (If Equipped). 20. Hazard Warning Flashers on
Equipped). page 6-3.
Instrument Panel Illumination 11. Light Sensor. See Automatic
Control on page 6-4. Headlamp System on 21. Power Outlets on page 5-6.
page 6-3. 22. Parking Brake on page 9-40.
2. Air Vents on page 8-6.
12. Hood Release. See Hood on 23. Shift Lever. See Automatic
3. Headlamp High/Low-Beam page 10-4.
Changer on page 6-2. Transmission on page 9-33 or
13. Data Link Connector (DLC) Manual Transmission on
Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and (Out of View). See Malfunction page 9-37.
Lane-Change Signals on Indicator Lamp on page 5-14.
page 6-3. 24. Traction Control/Electronic
Driver Information Center (DIC) 14. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Stability Control on page 9-41.
Buttons. See Driver Information on page 10-42. 25. Climate Control Systems on
Center (DIC) on page 5-23. 15. Cruise Control on page 9-43. page 8-1 (If Equipped).
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-8. 16. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Automatic Climate Control
5. Driver Information Center (DIC) page 5-2. System on page 8-3 (If
on page 5-23. 17. Horn on page 5-3. Equipped).
6. Steering Wheel Controls on 18. Ignition Switch or Keyless Heated Front Seats on
page 5-2. Ignition Button (If Equipped). page 3-5 (If Equipped).
7. Windshield Wiper/Washer on See Ignition Positions (Keyless 26. Passenger Airbag Status
page 5-3. Access) on page 9-14 or Indicator on page 5-13.
Ignition Positions (Key Access)
8. Infotainment on page 7-1. on page 9-16.
Satellite Radio on page 7-9 (If
Equipped).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Press the key release button to

extend the key blade. The key can
Information be used for the ignition and all
locks.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Press K to unlock the driver door or
important features that may or may all doors.
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
Press Q to lock all doors.
to each of the features which can be Lock and unlock feedback can be
found later in this owner manual. personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-35.
Remote Keyless Entry Press and hold V or Y to open
(RKE) System the trunk.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press and hold 7 briefly to initiate
transmitter may work up to 60 m
vehicle locator.
(195 ft) away from the vehicle.
The vehicle will have one of these Press and hold 7 for at least
transmitters. three seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-3.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Keyless Access

If equipped with this feature, the To cancel a remote start, do one of
engine can be started from outside the following:
the vehicle. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Starting the Vehicle vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Press and release Q. . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
3. Immediately after completing
See Remote Vehicle Start on
Step 2, press and hold / for at page 2-10.
least four seconds or until the
turn signal lamps flash. Door Locks If equipped, use the keyless access
When the engine starts, the parking system to lock and unlock the door.
To lock or unlock the vehicle from
lamps will turn on and remain on as When the doors are locked and the
outside, use the key in the door or
long as the engine is running. The Remote Keyless Entry
use the Remote Keyless Entry
doors will be locked and the climate (RKE) transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)
(RKE) transmitter. From inside the
control system may come on. of the driver door handle, press the
vehicle, use the power door lock
The engine will continue to run for lock/unlock button. When unlocking
switch.
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a from the driver door, the first press
See Door Locks on page 2-11. unlocks that door; press again
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once. within five seconds to unlock all
passenger doors. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-6 In Brief
This feature may be configured. See Safety Locks To return the door to normal
Vehicle Personalization on operation, open the door and turn
The vehicle has rear door safety
page 5-35. the slot to the vertical position.
locks to prevent passengers from
Power Door Locks opening the rear doors from the Power Safety Locks
inside.
Manual Safety Locks
If equipped, press o { to activate

K: Press to unlock the doors.
the safety locks. The indicator light
Q: Press to lock the doors. If equipped, open the rear doors to comes on when activated.
See Power Door Locks on access the safety locks on the The rear door power windows are
page 2-12. inside edge of each door. also disabled. See Power Windows
To activate, insert a key into the slot on page 2-20.
and turn it to the horizontal position. Press o { again to deactivate the
The door can only be opened from
safety locks and power windows.
the outside.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-7
If a rear door handle is pulled the Seat Adjustment

same time the safety lock is
deactivated, that door will remain Manual Front Seats
locked and the indicator light may
flash. Release the handle, then
press the safety lock twice to
deactivate the safety locks.
See Safety Locks on page 2-13.
Windows
{ Warning Press the switch down to open the

Children could be seriously window. Pull the front of the switch
injured or killed if caught in the up to close it. See Power Windows
path of a closing window. Never on page 2-20.
leave keys in a vehicle with The switches work when the ignition To adjust a manual seat:
children. When there are children is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, 1. Pull the handle at the front of
in the rear seat, use the window or in Retained Accessory Power the seat.
lockout button to prevent (RAP). See Retained Accessory 2. Slide the seat to the desired
operation of the windows. See Power (RAP) on page 9-23. position and release the handle.
Keys on page 2-1.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-8 In Brief
Seat Height Adjuster Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
returns to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-4.
Power Driver Seat
If available, move the lever up or To recline the seatback:

down to manually raise or lower 1. Lift the lever.
the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
make sure it is locked.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-9
To adjust a power driver seat, Heated Seats and then the off setting. Three lights
if equipped: indicate the highest setting and one
. Move the seat forward or light the lowest.
rearward by sliding the control See Heated Front Seats on
forward or rearward. page 3-5.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the Head Restraint
front of the control up or down. Adjustment
. Raise or lower the entire seat by Do not drive until the head restraints
moving the rear of the control up for all occupants are installed and
or down. adjusted properly.
See Power Seat Adjustment on To achieve a comfortable seating
page 3-4. position, change the seatback
If available, the controls are on the recline angle as little as necessary
Rear Seats while keeping the seat and the head
center stack. The engine must be
The rear seatbacks can be folded. running to operate the heated seats. restraint height in the proper
For detailed instructions, see Rear position.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
Seats on page 3-6. passenger seat cushion and See Head Restraints on page 3-2
seatback. and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.
Press the control once for the

highest setting. With each press of
the control, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-10 In Brief
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

indicator will be visible on the
System instrument panel when the vehicle is
started. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5-13.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior
United States
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly: Canada
. Safety Belts on page 3-8. The passenger sensing system
. How to Wear Safety Belts turns off the front outboard
Properly on page 3-9. passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-10. other airbag is affected by the Controls for the outside power
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for passenger sensing system. See mirrors are on the driver door.
Children (LATCH System) on Passenger Sensing System on 1. Turn the selector switch to L
page 3-37. page 3-23 for important information. (Left) or R (Right) to choose the
driver or passenger mirror.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-11
2. Move the control to adjust the Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

mirror.
Adjustment Adjustment
3. Turn the selector switch to the O
position to deselect the mirror. Adjust the rearview mirror to view
the area behind the vehicle.
See Power Mirrors on page 2-19.
Manual Rearview Mirror
If the vehicle has heated mirrors,
see Heated Mirrors on page 2-19. If equipped with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-19.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
To adjust the steering wheel:
If equipped with an automatic
dimming rearview mirror, the mirror 1. Pull the lever down.
will automatically reduce the glare of 2. Move the steering wheel up
headlamps from behind. The or down.
dimming feature comes on each
Vehicles with a manual mirror 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
time the vehicle is started. See
adjustment have controls next to closer or away from you.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
each mirror. on page 2-20. 4. Push the lever up to lock the
See Manual Mirrors on page 2-18. steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-12 In Brief
Interior Lighting Reading Lamps This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
Dome Lamps infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is located to the left of
the steering column on the
instrument panel.
D: Turn the thumbwheel up or
down and hold, to brighten or dim
the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen.
The reading lamps are in the Exterior Lighting
overhead console.
The dome lamp controls are in the
headliner. m or n : Press the button near
each lamp to turn it on or off.
* : Press to turn the lamps off,
even when a door is open. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control
I : Press to turn the lamps on
automatically when a door is
opened.
+: Press to turn on the dome
lamps.
The exterior lamp control is to the
left of the steering column on the
instrument panel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-13
. Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4
O: Briefly turn to this position to INT: Move the lever up to INT for
turn the automatic lamp control off intermittent wipes, then turn the
or on again. Windshield Wiper/Washer 3 INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on wipes.
automatically at normal brightness,
together with the parking lamps, OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
taillamps, license plate lamps, 8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
instrument panel lights, and the wiper lever down. For several
sidemarker lamps. wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
; : Turns on the parking lamps The windshield wiper/washer lever nL: Pull the windshield wiper
including all lamps, except the lever toward you to spray windshield
headlamps. is on the right side of the steering
column. With the ignition in ACC/ washer fluid and activate the wipers.
5 : Turns on the headlamps ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
together with the parking lamps and the windshield wiper lever to select page 5-3.
instrument panel lights. A warning the wiper speed.
chime sounds if the driver door is Climate Controls
HI: Use for fast wipes.
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on. LO: Use for slow wipes. The heating, cooling, defrosting, and
ventilation for the vehicle can be
# : If equipped with fog lamps, controlled with these systems.
press to turn the lamps on or off.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6-2
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-14 In Brief
Vehicles without Air Conditioning Vehicles with Air Conditioning 10. Air Conditioning
11. Defrost
Automatic Climate Control System
1. Temperature Control 1. Temperature Control

2. Bi-level Air Mode 2. Bi-level Air Mode
3. Floor Air Mode 3. Floor Air Mode 1. Temperature Control
4. Vent Air Mode 4. Vent Air Mode 2. Rear Window Defogger
5. Fan Control 5. Fan Control 3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Driver and Passenger Heated 6. Driver and Passenger Heated 4. Defrost
Seats (If Equipped) Seats (If Equipped)
5. Fan Control
7. Rear Window Defogger 7. Rear Window Defogger
6. Driver and Passenger Heated
8. Defog 8. Recirculation Seats (If Equipped)
9. Defrost 9. Defog 7. Power
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-15
8. Recirculation Up‐Shift Light Vehicle Features

9. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)
10. AQS (Air Quality Sensor) Radio(s)
11. Air Conditioning O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
See Climate Control Systems on decrease the volume.
page 8-1 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8-3 (If BAND: Press to choose between
Equipped). If the vehicle has a manual FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.
transmission, it will have an up-shift
MENU/SEL: Turn to select radio
Transmission light that indicates when to shift to
stations. Press to select a menu.
the next higher gear for the best fuel
Manual Mode economy. g : Press to seek the previous
station or track.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows See Manual Transmission on
the automatic transmission to be page 9-37. l : Press to seek the next station
shifted similar to a manual or track.
transmission. Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save and
Electronic Range Select (ERS) select favorite stations.
allows for the selection of a range of INFO: Press to show available
gears. information about the current station
See Manual Mode on page 9-35. or track.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-16 In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station 5. To save the settings, press SiriusXM Satellite Radio
BACK on the radio faceplate. Service
Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any Setting the 12/24 Hour Format SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
order. Up to six stations can be based in the 48 contiguous United
To set the 12/24 hour format for the
stored in each favorite page and the States and 10 Canadian provinces.
radio with navigation:
number of available favorite pages SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
can be set. 1. Press CLOCK. variety of programming and
To store the station to a position in 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. commercial-free music, coast to
the list, press the corresponding coast, and in digital-quality sound.
3. Press the MENU/SEL knob to A fee is required to receive the
numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep is select the 12 hour or 24 hour
heard. SiriusXM service.
display format.
For more information, see “Storing a Refer to:
4. To save the settings, press
Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM BACK on the radio faceplate. . www.siriusxm.com or call
Radio on page 7-7. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
For detailed instructions on setting
Setting the Clock the clock for the vehicle's specific . www.xmradio.ca or call
audio system. See Clock on 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Adjusting the Time or Date
page 5-4. See Satellite Radio on page 7-9.
To set the time and date for the
radio with navigation: Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices
1. Press CLOCK. If equipped, vehicles with a Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm
2. Select Set Time or Set Date. SiriusXM® satellite radio tuner and a (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB
valid SiriusXM satellite radio port in the center console. External
3. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to subscription can receive SiriusXM
adjust the highlighted number. devices such as iPods®, laptop
programming. computers, MP3 players, CD
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the next number.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-17
changers, and USB drives may be Steering Wheel Controls $ / i : Press to silence the
connected, depending on the audio vehicle speakers only. Press again
system. to turn the sound on. For vehicles
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-16. with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
press to reject an incoming call,
Bluetooth® or to end a current call.
The Bluetooth® system allows users _ SRC ^ : Press to select a source

with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile or turn to change favorite stations.
phone to make and receive Press _ or ^ to select AM, FM, CD,
hands-free calls using the vehicle or MP3 track.
audio system and controls.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone must be paired with the previous saved favorite radio
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it For vehicles with audio steering stations.
can be used in the vehicle. Not all wheel controls, some audio controls + x −: Press + to increase the
phones will support all functions. can be adjusted at the steering
volume. Press − to decrease the
wheel.
See Bluetooth (Overview) on volume.
page 7-18 or Bluetooth b / g : For vehicles with a For more information, see Steering
(Infotainment Controls) on Bluetooth, OnStar, or navigation
Wheel Controls on page 5-2.
page 7-20 or Bluetooth (Voice system, press to interact with those
Recognition) on page 7-23. systems. See Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 7-18 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7-20 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7-23, OnStar
Overview on page 14-1, or the
infotainment manual.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-18 In Brief
Cruise Control SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down Driver Information

briefly to set the speed and activate
cruise control. If cruise control is
Center (DIC)
already active, use to decrease The DIC display is in the center of
speed. the instrument cluster. It shows the
*: Press to disengage cruise status of many vehicle systems. The
control without erasing the set controls for the DIC are on the turn
speed from memory. signal lever.
See Cruise Control on page 9-43.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
If the vehicle is equipped with cruise infotainment manual that includes
information on the radio, audio 1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or press
control:
players, and navigation system. and hold to clear, the menu item
1 : Press to turn the cruise control The navigation system provides
displayed.
system on and off.
detailed maps of most major 2. w / x : Use the band to scroll
RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up freeways and roads. After a through the items in each menu.
briefly to make the vehicle resume destination has been set, the
to a previously set speed or hold system provides turn-by-turn 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
upwards to accelerate. If cruise instructions for reaching the menus. This button is also used
control is already active, use to destination. In addition, the system to return to or exit the last
increase vehicle speed. can help locate a variety of points of screen displayed on the DIC.
interest (POIs), such as banks, See Driver Information Center (DIC)
airports, restaurants, and more. on page 5-23.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-19
Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets Performance and

If equipped, this system uses The accessory power outlets can be Maintenance
sensors on the rear bumper to used to plug in electrical equipment,
assist with parking and avoiding such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
objects while in R (Reverse).
Traction Control/
There is one accessory power outlet Electronic Stability
It operates at speeds less than located on the center floor console
8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic Rear and one on the rear of the center Control
Parking Assist (URPA) uses audible floor console. These outlets are
beeps to provide distance and The Traction Control System (TCS)
powered when the key is in ON/ limits wheel spin. The system turns
system information. RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until on automatically every time the
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's the driver door is opened within vehicle is started.
rear bumper clean to ensure proper 10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
operation. See Retained Accessory Power The StabiliTrak system assists with
(RAP) on page 9-23. directional control of the vehicle in
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on difficult driving conditions. The
page 9-45. See Power Outlets on page 5-6. system also turns on automatically
every time the vehicle is started.
. To turn off traction control, press
and release the g button on the
center console. The traction off
light i illuminates.
. To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the g button, until the traction off
light i and the StabiliTrak OFF
light g illuminate.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-20 In Brief
. Press and release the g button The low tire pressure warning light It cannot be reset accurately until
again to turn on both systems. may come on in cool weather when the next oil change. To reset the
the vehicle is first started, and then engine oil life system press the
See Traction Control/Electronic
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This SET/CLR button while the Oil Life
Stability Control on page 9-41.
may be an early indicator that the display is active.
tire pressures are getting low and
Tire Pressure Monitor the tires need to be inflated to the Resetting the Oil Life System
This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure. 1. Using the DIC MENU button and
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal thumbwheel, scroll until you
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on
the correct tire pressures. the DIC (: % for Canada).
See Tire Pressure Monitor System 2. Press the SET/CLR button to
on page 10-52. reset the oil life at 100%. When
prompted, use the thumbwheel
Engine Oil Life System to highlight YES or NO. Press
the SET/CLR button to confirm.
The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates
alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use Be careful not to reset the oil life
pressure of one of the vehicle's and displays the CHANGE ENGINE display accidentally at any time
tires. If the warning light comes on, OIL SOON DIC message when it is other than after the oil is changed.
stop as soon as possible and inflate necessary to change the engine oil It cannot be reset accurately.
the tires to the recommended and filter. See Engine Oil Life System on
pressure shown on the Tire and Remember, the Oil Life display must page 10-15.
Loading Information label. See be reset after each oil change. It will
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9. not reset itself. Also, be careful not
The warning light will remain on until to reset the Oil Life display
the tire pressure is corrected. accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-21
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
Cleaning the DPF (Exhaust
Economy Filter)
molded into the tire's sidewall
Driving habits can affect fuel near the size. While the DPF cleaning is
mileage. Here are some driving tips automatically controlled by the
. Follow recommended scheduled engine computer, the vehicle will
to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
possible. need to operate continuously for
approximately 25 minutes and at
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate Diesel Particulate Filter speeds greater than 48 km/h
smoothly. The engine is equipped with a (30 mph) to clean the DPF
. Brake gradually and avoid Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) that, effectively.
abrupt stops. by design, will filter or trap Special DPF Driver Messages
particulates. The DPF is located
. Avoid idling the engine for long If the vehicle is used for numerous
under the vehicle in the exhaust
periods of time. short trips or extended slow-speed
system.
. When road and weather operation, the engine computer may
Depending on a number of factors
conditions are appropriate, use not be able to adequately heat up
monitored by the engine computer,
cruise control. the exhaust system to clean the
the DPF will need to be cleaned of
DPF effectively. The engine
. Always follow posted speed accumulated solids. When a
computer has been designed to
limits or drive more slowly when cleaning is needed, the engine
continuously monitor the condition
conditions require. computer will initiate a cleaning
of the DPF. When the engine
. Keep vehicle tires properly action by warming the exhaust gas
computer detects that the DPF is
inflated. temperature. This feature has been
nearly full of particulates and that
designed to operate automatically,
. Combine several trips into a the vehicle is not being operated in
with limited operator involvement or
single trip. a manner that would allow effective
awareness.
automatic DPF cleaning, the Driver
Information Center will display the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-22 In Brief
message CLEANING EXHAUST Do Not Use Low Sulfur Diesel Diesel Exhaust Fluid
FILTER KEEP DRIVING UNTIL Fuel (LSD)
MESSAGE IS CLEARED. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is used
Do not use fuel that is dispensed with diesel engines to reduce the
If the vehicle continues to be driven from pumps bearing the LSD label. amount of regulated emissions
in a manner that prevents effective produced. The DEF system must be
DPF cleaning, the DPF will become Do Not Use Non-Highway Fuel
maintained for the vehicle to run
plugged with particulates. If this Fuel labeled as off road or properly. It is normal to hear the
occurs, the engine computer will non-highway is typically very high in DEF system purge fluid back into
turn on the service engine soon light sulfur content and will damage the the tank after the vehicle is shutoff.
in the instrument cluster and the emission control system.
DIC will display the message Non-highway fuel is not intended for Locating Diesel Exhaust Fluid
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED. use in on-highway vehicles. DEF can be purchased at a
See Diesel Particulate Filter on In addition: Chevrolet dealer. It can also be
page 9-26 and Engine Power purchased at authorized vehicle
Messages on page 5-29. . Use the correct engine oil.
dealerships. Additionally, some
Fuel
. Do not add gasoline to diesel fueling stations or retailers
diesel fuel. may have DEF for purchase. For
Use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel . Do not modify the induction or vehicles with an active OnStar®
Fuel (ULSD) subscription, OnStar can help to
exhaust systems.
Use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel locate a DEF retailer. See
See Fuel for Diesel Engines on “Customer Assistance Offices” in
(ULSD) only. The emission control
page 9-54 and Engine Oil on the owner manual for phone
hardware used on the vehicle may
page 10-11. numbers to assist you in contacting
be damaged by using fuel with high
sulfur levels. Use only fuel that is a GM dealer. See Recommended
dispensed from pumps bearing the Fluids and Lubricants on
ULSD label. page 11-12.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Brief 1-23
As the DEF tank becomes low on OnStar®

fluid, warnings begin with
approximately 1600 km If equipped, this vehicle has a
(1,000 miles) of remaining range. comprehensive, in-vehicle system
These warnings will increase in that can connect to a live Advisor
intensity as the tank becomes for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
empty. Once the tank is empty, the Connection, and Diagnostic
vehicle speed will be limited. If there Services. See OnStar Overview on
is an issue with the quality of the page 14-1.
fluid or the exhaust fluid system,
warnings will be displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Diesel Exhaust Fluid on
page 9-27.
Roadside Assistance
Program
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13-5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1-24 In Brief
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2-19 Keys
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Keys and Locks Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Interior Mirrors
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-19 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Automatic Dimming Rearview seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-10 could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Windows or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 vehicle move. The windows will
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 function with the keys in the
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 ignition, and children or others
could be caught in the path of a
Doors Roof closing window. Do not leave
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 children in a vehicle with the
Vehicle Security ignition key.
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-17
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
{ Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous and
children or others could be
seriously injured or killed. They
could operate the power windows
or other controls or make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the RKE transmitter
in the vehicle, and children or
The key that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE
others could be caught in the path
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can transmitter to extend the key. Press
of a closing window. Do not leave be used for the ignition and all locks the button and the key blade to
children in a vehicle with an RKE if the vehicle is a key access retract the key.
transmitter. vehicle. If the vehicle has the If it becomes difficult to turn the key,
keyless ignition, the key can be inspect the key blade for debris.
used for the locks. Periodically clean with a brush
or pick.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
If locked out of the vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13-5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
With an active OnStar subscription, Remote Keyless Entry

an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar® on
(RKE) System Operation
page 1-23. The Keyless Access system allows
for vehicle entry when the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter is within range. See
(RKE) System “Keyless Access Operation” later in
this section.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
The transmitter functions may work
page 13-15.
up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the
If there is a decrease in the RKE vehicle.
operating range:
Keep in mind that other conditions,
. Check the distance. The such as those previously stated, can
transmitter may be too far from impact the performance of the
the vehicle. transmitter.
. Check the location. Other The vehicle will have one of these
vehicles or objects may be transmitters.
blocking the signal.
. Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service. Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The turn signal indicators may flash Pressing K will disarm the The buttons on the keys are
and/or the horn may sound to theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle disabled when there is a key in the
indicate locking. See “Remote Lock Alarm System on page 2-16. ignition, if equipped with a keyed
Feedback” under Vehicle ignition.
Personalization on page 5-35. V (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to release the trunk. Keyless Access Operation
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic The Keyless Access system allows
Alarm): Press and hold briefly to for the doors and trunk to be locked
driver door, if Unlocked Door Anti initiate vehicle locator. The exterior and unlocked without pressing the
Lock Out is enabled through the lamps flash and the horn chirps RKE transmitter button. The RKE
vehicle personalization. three times. transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)
If the passenger door is open when of the door being opened. If the
Q is pressed, all doors lock. Press and hold 7 for at least vehicle has this feature, there will be
three seconds to sound the panic a button on the outside door
Pressing Q may also arm the alarm. The horn sounds and the handles.
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle turn signals flash for 30 seconds,
Alarm System on page 2-16. Keyless Access can be
or until 7 is pressed again or the programmed to unlock all doors on
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the vehicle is started. the first lock/unlock press from the
driver door or all doors. See “Door / (Remote Vehicle Start): driver door. See Vehicle
Unlock or Remote Door Unlock” Personalization on page 5-35.
If equipped, press and release Q
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-35. and then immediately press and Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
hold / for at least four seconds to the Driver Door
The turn signal indicators may flash
start the engine from outside the When the doors are locked and the
and/or the horn may sound to
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. RKE transmitter is within range of
indicate unlocking. See “Remote
See Remote Vehicle Start on the door handle, pressing the lock/
Unlock Light Feedback” under
page 2-10. unlock button on the driver door
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-35. handle will unlock the driver door.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If the lock/unlock button is pressed

. Any vehicle door has been Temporary Disable Passive
again within five seconds, all opened and all doors are now Locking Feature
passenger doors will unlock. closed.
Temporarily disable the passive
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from locking by pressing and holding K
the Passenger Doors on the interior door switch with a
When the doors are locked and the door open for at least four seconds,
RKE transmitter is within range of or until three chimes are heard.
the door handle, pressing the lock/ Passive locking will then remain
unlock button on a passenger door disabled until Q on the interior door
handle will unlock all doors. is pressed, or until the vehicle is
Pressing the lock/unlock button will turned on.
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur: To customize the doors to
automatically lock when exiting the
. The lock/unlock button was used vehicle, see “Remote Locking,
to unlock all doors. Unlocking, Starting” under Vehicle
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Similar . Any vehicle door has been Personalization on page 5-35.
opened and all doors are now Keyless Trunk Opening
Pressing the lock/unlock button will closed.
cause all doors to lock if any of the Press the touch pad on the rear of
following occur: Passive Locking the trunk above the license plate to
. It has been more than If equipped with Keyless Access, open the trunk when the RKE
five seconds since the first lock/ this feature will lock the vehicle transmitter is in range.
unlock button press. several seconds after all doors are Keyed Access
closed, if the vehicle is off and at
. Two lock/unlock button presses To access a vehicle with a dead
least one RKE transmitter has been
were used to unlock all doors. transmitter battery, see Door Locks
removed from the interior or none
remain in the interior. on page 2-11.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the new key to be This procedure will take
the Vehicle programmed and turn it to the approximately 30 minutes to
ON/RUN position within complete for the first key. The
Only RKE transmitters programmed five seconds. vehicle must be off and all of the
to the vehicle will work. If a keys you wish to program must be
transmitter is lost or stolen, a The security light will turn off
once the key has been with you.
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer. programmed. 1. Insert the new vehicle key into
The vehicle can be reprogrammed 4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional the ignition.
so that lost or stolen transmitters no keys are to be programmed. 2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security
longer work. Any remaining light will come on.
transmitters will need to be If a key is lost or damaged, see your
reprogrammed. Each vehicle can dealer to have a new key made. 3. Wait 10 minutes until the
have up to eight transmitters security light turns off.
Programming without a
matched to it. Recognized Transmitter (Key 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Programming with a Recognized Vehicles Only) 5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more
Transmitter (Key Vehicles Only) Program a new key to the vehicle times. After the third time, turn to
when a recognized key is not ON/RUN; the key is learned and
To program a new key:
available. Canadian regulations all previously known keys will no
1. Insert the original, already require that owners see their dealer. longer work with the vehicle.
programmed key in the ignition
If there are no currently recognized Remaining keys can be learned by
and turn the key to the ON/RUN
keys available, follow this procedure following the procedure in
position.
to program the first key. “Programming with a Recognized
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and Transmitter (Key Vehicles Only).”
remove the key.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Programming with a Recognized Press the button on the 5. Remove the transmitter from the
Transmitter (Keyless Access recognized transmitter to extend transmitter pocket and press K.
Vehicles Only) the key blade. Insert the key
blade into the transmitter slot. To program additional
A new transmitter can be transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5.
programmed to the vehicle when 2. Insert the vehicle key of the new
there is one recognized transmitter. transmitter into the key lock When all additional transmitters
To program, the vehicle must be off cylinder on the outside of the are programmed, press and hold
and all of the transmitters, both driver door and turn the key to the ENGINE START/STOP
currently recognized and new, must the unlock position five times button for 12 seconds to exit
be with you. within 10 seconds. programming mode. Replace the
plastic trim piece from the small
The Driver Information Center storage area.
(DIC) displays READY FOR
REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5. Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless
3. Remove the recognized key and Access Vehicles Only)
place the new transmitter into
the transmitter slot. If there are no currently recognized
transmitters available, follow this
4. Press the ENGINE START/ procedure to program up to five
STOP button. When the transmitters. This feature is not
transmitter is learned, the DIC available in Canada. This procedure
will show that it is ready to will take approximately 30 minutes
program the next transmitter. to complete. The vehicle must be off
and all of the transmitters you wish
1. Remove the plastic trim piece to program must be with you.
from the small storage area next
to the accessory power outlet
toward the front of the console,
to access the transmitter slot.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1. Insert the vehicle key of the The DIC display should now 5. Press the ENGINE START/
transmitter into the key lock show READY FOR REMOTE STOP button. When the
cylinder on the outside of the # 1. transmitter is learned the DIC
driver door and turn the key to will show that it is ready to
the unlock position five times program the next transmitter.
within 10 seconds. 6. Remove the transmitter from the
The Driver Information Center transmitter slot and press K.
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
displays PRESS ENGINE When all additional transmitters
START BUTTON TO LEARN are programmed, press and hold
and then press the ENGINE the ENGINE START/STOP
START/STOP button. button for 12 seconds to exit
programming mode. Replace the
The DIC displays will again plastic trim piece from the small
show REMOTE LEARN 4. Remove the plastic trim piece storage area.
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. from the small storage area next
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional to the accessory power outlet Starting the Vehicle with a Low
times. After the third time all toward the front of the console, Transmitter Battery
previously known transmitters to access the transmitter slot. If the transmitter battery is weak or if
will no longer work with the Press the button on the there is interference with the signal,
vehicle. Remaining transmitters recognized transmitter to extend the DIC may display NO REMOTE
can be relearned during the next the key blade. Insert the key DETECTED when tying to start the
steps. blade into the transmitter slot. vehicle. The REPLACE BATTERY
IN REMOTE KEY message may
also be displayed at this time.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or The battery is not rechargeable. To

N (Neutral), press the brake replace the battery:
pedal and the ENGINE START/ 1. Press the button on the
STOP button. See Starting the transmitter to extend the key
Engine on page 9-18 for blade.
additional information about the
vehicle's keyless ignition with
pushbutton start.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
Battery Replacement
To start the vehicle: Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
1. Remove the plastic trim piece
message displays in the DIC. See
from the small storage area next
Key and Lock Messages on
to the accessory power outlet
page 5-30.
toward the front of the console,
to access the transmitter slot.
2. Press the button on the
{ Caution 2. Remove the battery cover by
recognized transmitter to extend prying it with a finger.
When replacing the battery, do
the key blade. Insert the key not touch any of the circuitry on 3. Remove the battery by pushing
blade into the transmitter slot. the transmitter. Static from your on the battery and sliding it
body could damage the toward the key blade.
transmitter.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
4. Insert the new battery, positive Laws in some local communities When the engine starts, the parking
side facing up. Push the battery may restrict the use of remote lamps will turn on and remain on as
down until it is held in place. starters. For example, some laws long as the engine is running. The
Replace with a CR2032 or require a person using remote start doors will be locked and the climate
equivalent battery. to have the vehicle in view. Check control system may come on.
5. Snap the battery cover back on local regulations for any The engine will continue to run for
to the transmitter. requirements. 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
Other conditions can affect the 10-minute time extension. Remote
Remote Vehicle Start performance of the transmitter. See start can be extended only once.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Place the ignition to ON/RUN/
If equipped, this feature allows the System on page 2-3.
engine to be started from outside START.
the vehicle. Starting the Vehicle Extending Engine Run Time
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This To start the engine using the remote For a 10-minute extension, repeat
button will be on the RKE start feature: Steps 1–3 while the engine is still
transmitter if the vehicle has remote 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the running. The remote start can be
start. vehicle. extended once.
The climate control system will use
the previous settings during a 2. Press and release Q. When the remote start is extended,
the second 10 minutes will start
remote start. The rear defog may 3. Immediately after completing immediately.
come on during remote start based Step 2, press and hold / for at
on cold ambient conditions. The For example, if the engine has been
least four seconds or until the running for five minutes, and
rear fog indicator light does not turn signal lamps flash. The turn
come on during remote start. If the 10 minutes are added, the engine
signal lamps flashing confirms will run for a total of 15 minutes.
vehicle has heated seats, they may the request to remote start the
come on during a remote start. See vehicle has been received.
Heated Front Seats on page 3-5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
A maximum of two remote starts,

. The hazard warning flashers
or a single start with an extension, are on. Warning (Continued)
is allowed between ignition cycles. . The malfunction indicator lamp crash is increased if the
The vehicle's ignition must be is on. doors are not locked. So, all
turned on and then back off to use . The engine coolant temperature passengers should wear
remote start again. is too high. safety belts properly and the
Canceling a Remote Start doors should be locked
. The oil pressure is low.
whenever the vehicle is
To cancel a remote start, do one of . Two remote vehicle starts, or a driven.
the following: single remote start with an . Young children who get into
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the extension, have already
unlocked vehicles may be
been used.
vehicle and press and hold / unable to get out. A child can
until the parking lamps turn off.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Door Locks injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
{ Warning .
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Conditions in Which Remote Start Outsiders can easily enter
Will Not Work Unlocked doors can be through an unlocked door
dangerous. when slowing or stopping the
The remote vehicle start feature will
. Passengers, especially vehicle. Lock the doors to
not operate if:
children, can easily open the help prevent this from
. The key is in the ignition (Key doors and fall out of a moving happening.
Access) or if the key is in the vehicle. The chance of being
vehicle (Keyless Access). thrown out of the vehicle in a To lock or unlock a door from
. The hood is not closed. (Continued) outside the vehicle, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
From inside the vehicle, use the transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
power door lock switch or the driver door handle, press the lock/ doors.
manual lock knob. Pushing down unlock button. When unlocking from
the manual lock knob on the driver the driver door, the first press Automatic Door Locks
door will lock all doors. unlocks that door; press again
within five seconds to unlock all When the doors are closed, the
The doors can also be unlocked ignition is on, and the shift lever is
from the inside by pulling the door passenger doors. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System moved out of P (Park) for an
handle. Pulling the door handle automatic transmission, or the
again unlatches the door. Operation on page 2-3.
vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
Keyless Access Power Door Locks (8 mph) for a manual transmission,
the doors will lock.
To unlock the doors:
. Press K.
. For automatic transmissions,
shift the vehicle into P (Park).
. For manual transmissions,
remove the key from the ignition.
The automatic door lock feature
cannot be disabled.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-35.
If equipped, use the keyless access The power door lock switch is on
system to lock and unlock the door. the instrument panel.
When the doors are locked and the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Safety Locks Press o { again to deactivate the If equipped, the safety lock is
safety locks and power windows. located on the inside edge of the
The rear door safety locks prevent rear doors. To use the safety lock:
passengers from opening the rear If a rear door handle is pulled the
doors from inside the vehicle. same time the safety lock is 1. Insert the key into the safety lock
deactivated, that door will remain slot and turn it so the slot is in
Power Safety Locks locked and the indicator light may the horizontal position.
flash. Release the handle, then 2. Close the door.
press the safety lock twice to
deactivate the safety locks. 3. Do the same for the other
rear door.
Manual Safety Locks To open a rear door when the safety
lock is on:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the
rear door lock, using the power
door lock switch, or with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If equipped, press o { to activate
the safety locks. The indicator light
comes on when activated.
The rear door power windows are
also disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-20.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
To cancel the safety lock: Doors Warning (Continued)

1. Unlock the door and open it from
the outside. Trunk . Adjust the climate control
2. Insert the key into the safety lock system to a setting that
slot and turn it so the slot is in
the vertical position.
{ Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
3. Do the same for the other Control Systems” in the
rear door. vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle has a power
seal between the body and the liftgate, disable the power
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon For more information about
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 9-26.
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
. Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Remote Trunk Release Emergency Trunk Release following exposure to light. Pull the
Handle release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
{ Caution
Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or
anchor point when securing items
in the trunk as it could damage
the handle.
To open the trunk from outside the

vehicle, press Y on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
or press the touch pad above the
license plate when the doors are
unlocked.
If the engine is running, the doors
must be unlocked. Vehicles with an
automatic transmission must be in
P (Park); vehicles with a manual
transmission must have the parking There is a glow-in-the-dark
brake applied. emergency trunk release handle on
the trunk lid. The handle will glow
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Security Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.

A door, the hood, or the trunk
The vehicle alarm system will not
arm if the doors are locked with
This vehicle has theft-deterrent is open. the key.
features; however, they do not make
Slow Flash: Alarm system is If the driver door is opened without
the vehicle impossible to steal.
armed. first unlocking with the RKE
transmitter, the horn will chirp and
Vehicle Alarm System Arming the Alarm System the lights will flash to indicate
This vehicle has a anti-theft alarm 1. Close the trunk and the hood. pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not
system. Turn off the vehicle. started, or the door is not unlocked
2. Lock the vehicle in one of by pressing K on the RKE
three ways: transmitter during the 10-second
pre-alarm, the alarm will be
. Use the RKE transmitter. activated.
. Use the Keyless Access If a door, the hood, or the trunk is
system, if equipped. opened without first disarming the
. With a door open, press Q system, the turn signals will flash
on the interior of the door. and the horn will sound for about
30 seconds. The alarm system will
3. After 30 seconds the alarm then re-arm to monitor for the next
The indicator light, on the system will arm, and the unauthorized event.
instrument panel near the indicator light will begin to slowly
windshield, indicates the status of flash indicating the alarm system Disarming the Alarm System
the system: is operating. Pressing Q on the Do one of the following to disarm
Off: Alarm system is disarmed. RKE transmitter a second time the alarm system or turn off the
On Solid: Vehicle is secured will bypass the 30-second delay alarm if it has been activated:
during the delay to arm the system. and immediately arm the alarm
system.
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Unlock the vehicle using the If the alarm has been activated, a
Keyless Access system, message will appear on the DIC.
if equipped. See Security Messages on
. Start the vehicle. page 5-32.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on The security light in the instrument
. Lock the vehicle after all cluster comes on if there is a
occupants have left the vehicle page 13-15.
problem with arming or disarming
and all doors are closed. the theft-deterrent system.
Immobilizer Operation
. Always unlock a door with the When trying to start the vehicle, the
RKE transmitter or use the This vehicle has a passive
security light comes on briefly when
Keyless Access system, theft-deterrent system.
the ignition is turned on.
if equipped. The system does not have to be
If the engine does not start and the
Unlocking the driver door with the manually armed or disarmed.
security light stays on, there is a
key will not disarm the system or The vehicle is automatically problem with the system. Turn the
turn off the alarm. immobilized when the key is ignition off and try again.
How to Detect a Tamper removed from the ignition.
If the engine still does not start, and
Condition The system is automatically the key appears to be undamaged
disarmed when the vehicle is or the light continues to stay on, try
If K is pressed on the RKE started with the correct key. The key another ignition key. If the engine
transmitter and the horn chirps three uses a transponder that matches an does not start with the other key, the
times, an alarm occurred previously immobilizer control unit in the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
while the alarm system was armed. vehicle and automatically disarms does start, the first key may be
the system. Only an authorized key damaged. See your dealer who can
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may service the theft-deterrent system
not start if the key is damaged. and have a new key made.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Do not leave the key or device that Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Convex Mirrors
{ Warning
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
If equipped, there are adjustment
controls next to each mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
inward to prevent damage when view of the area behind your
going through an automatic car vehicle.
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward may have three control buttons at
to return it to the original position. the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
Heated Mirrors OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.
The vehicle may have heated
mirrors. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
To adjust the mirror: on the mirror. Use a soft towel
= (Rear Window Defogger): dampened with water.
1. Turn the selector switch to L Press to heat the outside rearview
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the mirrors. See “Rear Window
driver or passenger mirror. Defogger” under Automatic Climate Manual Rearview Mirror
2. Move the control to adjust the Control System on page 8-3. If equipped with a manual rearview
mirror. mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
3. Turn the selector switch to the O use to avoid glare from the
position to deselect the mirror. headlamps from behind.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Automatic Dimming Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
Rearview Mirror performance. This may result in a
If equipped, automatic dimming { Warning pulsing sound when either rear
reduces the glare of headlamps window is down and the front
from behind. The dimming feature Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
comes on when the vehicle is adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
started. especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the Power Windows
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. { Warning
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2-1.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
windows only have express-down. fully pulled up position will activate

Pull a window switch up or push it the express-up and related obstacle
down all the way, release it, and the detection features.
window goes down or up
automatically. Stop the window by Programming the Power
pushing or pulling the switch. Windows
Obstacle Detection Feature If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged or disconnected,
If equipped with express-up, and an or is not working, the windows will
object is in the path of the window need to be reprogrammed for the
when closing, the window will stop express-up feature to work. Before
at the obstruction and auto-reverse reprogramming, replace or recharge
to a preset factory position. Weather the vehicle's battery.
Press the switch down to open the
conditions such as severe cold and/
window. Pull the front of the switch To program each front window:
or ice may also cause the window to
up to close it.
auto-reverse. The window will return 1. With the ignition in ACC/
The switches work when the ignition to normal operation once the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, obstruction or condition is removed. or when RAP is active, close all
or in Retained Accessory Power doors.
If conditions prevent the window
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
from closing and the window 2. Press and hold the power
Power (RAP) on page 9-23.
continues to auto-reverse, it is window switch until the window
Express Window Operation possible to close the window with is fully open.
the ignition in ON/RUN by holding 3. Pull the power window switch up
This vehicle may have windows with the window switch in the partially or
an express-up or down feature. This until the window is fully closed.
fully pulled up position. Release of
feature allows the window to be the switch from the partially pulled
lowered or raised without holding up position will cause the window to
the switch. Passenger side and rear stop. Release of the switch from the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
4. Continue holding the switch up Press o { to activate the rear Sun Visors
for approximately two seconds window lockout. The indicator light
after the window is completely comes on when activated.
closed.
The rear door locks are also
The window is now reprogrammed. disabled. See Safety Locks on
Repeat the process for the other page 2-13.
windows.
Press o { again to deactivate the
Window Lockout lockout and enable the rear door
locks.
If the indicator light flashes, the
feature may not be working properly. Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. If equipped, detach the sun
Overload Feature visor from the center mount to pivot
to the side window or to extend
If the windows are operated
along the rod.
repeatedly in short intervals, the
window operation is disabled for a
short time.
This feature prevents the rear

passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Roof To express open or close the

sunroof with the safety function
Safety Function
If the sunroof has any resistance
enabled, press the open or close
Sunroof sunroof switch (1) to the second
during automatic closing, it will
immediately stop and reverse.
detent position and release. To stop
the movement, press the switch To override the safety function,
again. press and hold the close sunroof
switch. The sunroof closes without
To automatically tilt or close the the safety function. To stop the
sunroof, press the tilt open or close movement, release the switch.
sunroof switch (2).
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
The sunroof only operates when the an electrical failure.
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
Sunshade
ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. The sunshade is manually operated. Dirt and debris may collect on the
See Retained Accessory Power Close or open the sunshade by sunroof seal or in the track. This
(RAP) on page 9-23. sliding. When the sunroof is could cause an issue with sunroof
opened, the sunshade is operation or noise. It could also plug
To open or close the sunroof, press the water drainage system.
always open.
the open or close sunroof switch (1)
to the first detent position.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Periodically open the sunroof and

remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-15 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Safety Belt System Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Airbag System Child Restraints
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-18 Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 When Should an Airbag Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Lower Anchors and Tethers
How Does an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
What Will You See after an Replacing LATCH System
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Securing Child Restraints
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The front seat outboard head Front Seats To adjust a manual seat:
restraints are not designed to be 1. Pull the handle at the front of
removed.
Seat Adjustment the seat.
If you are installing a child restraint 2. Slide the seat to the desired
in the rear seat, see “Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the { Warning position and release the handle.
LATCH System” under Lower 3. Try to move the seat back and
You can lose control of the
Anchors and Tethers for Children forth to be sure it is locked in
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver place.
(LATCH System) on page 3-37.
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when Seat Height Adjuster
the vehicle is not moving.
If available, move the lever up or

down to manually raise or lower
the seat.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback, see

Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-4.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are To recline the seatback:
locked. 1. Lift the lever.
To adjust the power driver seat,
If necessary, move the safety
if equipped:
belt out of the way to access the
. Move the seat forward or lever.
rearward by sliding the control
2. Move the seatback to the
forward or rearward.
desired position, then release
. Raise or lower the front part of the lever to lock the seatback in
the seat cushion by moving the place.
front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by make sure it is locked.
moving the rear of the control up
or down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
To return the seatback to an upright Do not have a seatback reclined if

position: Warning (Continued) the vehicle is moving.
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt could go up over
applying pressure to the your abdomen. The belt forces
Heated Front Seats
seatback, and the seatback would be there, not at your pelvic
returns to the upright position. bones. This could cause serious { Warning
2. Push and pull on the seatback to internal injuries.
If you cannot feel temperature
make sure it is locked. For proper protection when the change or pain to the skin, the
vehicle is in motion, have the seat heater may cause burns. To
{ Warning seatback upright. Then sit well reduce the risk of burns, people
back in the seat and wear the with such a condition should use
Sitting in a reclined position when
safety belt properly. care when using the seat heater,
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled especially for long periods of
up, the safety belts cannot do time. Do not place anything on
their job. the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
The shoulder belt will not be cover, or similar item. This may
against your body. Instead, it will cause the seat heater to
be in front of you. In a crash, you overheat. An overheated seat
could go into it, receiving neck or heater may cause a burn or may
other injuries. damage the seat.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The passenger seat may take Rear Seats

longer to heat up.
Either side of the rear seatback can
Remote Start Heated Seats be folded.
When it is cold outside, the heated To fold the rear seatbacks:
seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote 1. Place the front seatbacks in the
vehicle start. The heated seats will upright position. See Reclining
be canceled when the ignition is Seatbacks on page 3-4.
turned on. Press the control to use
the heated seats after the vehicle is { Caution
started.
Folding a rear seat with the safety
If available, the controls are on the The heated seat indicator lights on
belts still fastened may cause
center stack. The engine must be the control do not turn on during a
remote start. damage to the seat or the safety
running to operate the heated seats. belts. Always unbuckle the safety
Press L or M to heat the driver or The temperature performance of an belts and return them to their
unoccupied seat may be reduced. normal stowed position before
passenger seat cushion and
This is normal. folding a rear seat.
seatback.
The heated seats will not turn on
Press the control once for the
during a remote start unless the 2. Unbuckle the rear safety belts
highest setting. With each press of
heated seat feature is enabled in and make sure the safety belt
the control, the heated seat will
the vehicle personalization menu. buckles are stowed in the
change to the next lower setting,
See Remote Vehicle Start on pockets in the seat cushion.
and then the off setting. Three lights
page 2-10 and Vehicle
indicate the highest setting and one
Personalization on page 5-35.
light the lowest.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Warning (Continued)
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
1. Make sure the safety belt is in

3. Make sure the safety belt is in A tab near the seatback lever the guide on the top of the
the guide on top of the seatback. raises when the seatback is seatback.
4. Reach under the safety belt and unlocked. 2. Lift the seatback up and push it
pull the lever to unlock the 5. Fold the seatback forward. rearward until it clicks into place.
seatback. Keep the safety belts clear of the
Repeat Steps 1–4 for the other seatback and untwisted.
seatback, if desired.
A tab near the seatback lever
To raise the seatback: retracts when the seatback is
locked in place.
{ Warning The center rear safety belt may
A safety belt that is improperly lock when you raise the
routed, not properly attached, seatback. If this happens, let the
or twisted will not provide the belt go back all the way and
start again.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
{ Warning Safety Belts Warning (Continued)

This section of the manual
If the seatback is not locked, it describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
could move forward in a sudden properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
stop or crash. That could cause things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
injury to the person sitting there. the vehicle that is not equipped
Always pull forward on the top of
the seatback at the area of the
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
latch to be sure it is locked. Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to properly. In a crash, if you or your
make sure it is locked into passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
position.
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other See Safety Belt Reminders on
safety belts. You can be seriously
seatback, if necessary. page 5-11.
injured or killed by hitting things
Keep the seat in the upright locked inside the vehicle harder or by
position when not in use. being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-30 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3-32.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know
when worn properly, your strongest most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly.
bones take the forces from the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if The following instructions explain
there is a sudden stop or crash. how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
{ Warning 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
You can be seriously injured, adjustable, so you can sit up
or even killed, by not wearing straight. To see how, see “Seats”
your safety belt properly. in the Index.
. Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
of you. loose or twisted.
. Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
for your seating position. under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
this applies force to the strong armrest.
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull If equipped with a shoulder belt
the belt across you. Do not let it height adjuster, move it to the
get twisted. height that is right for you. See
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
you pull the belt across you very later in this section for
quickly. If this happens, let the instructions on use and
belt go back slightly to unlock it. important safety information.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3-15.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt 4. To make the lap part tight, pull
could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt.
necessary.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Adjust the guide so the shoulder After the adjuster is set to the
portion of the belt is on the shoulder desired position, try to move it down
and not falling off of it. The belt without pushing the release button
should be close to, but not to make sure it has locked into
contacting, the neck. Improper position.
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of Safety Belt Pretensioners
the safety belt in a crash. See How This vehicle has safety belt
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on pretensioners for front outboard
page 3-9. occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
To unlatch the belt, push the button
belts during the early stages of a
on the buckle. The belt should
moderate to severe frontal, near
return to its stowed position.
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
Before a door is closed, be sure the conditions for pretensioner
safety belt is out of the way. If a activation are met.
door is slammed against a safety
And, on vehicles with side impact
belt, damage can occur to both the
airbags, safety belt pretensioners
safety belt and the vehicle.
can help tighten the safety belts in a
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster side crash or a rollover event.
The vehicle has a shoulder belt Pretensioners work only once. If the
Press the release button and move pretensioners activate in a crash,
height adjuster for the driver and
the height adjuster to the desired the pretensioners and probably
right front passenger seating
position. The adjuster can be moved other parts of the vehicle's safety
positions.
up by pushing the slide/trim up.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
belt system will need to replaced. There is one guide, if equipped, for
See Replacing Safety Belt System each outboard passenger position in
Parts after a Crash on page 3-15. the rear seat. To install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear safety
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through the dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and 2. Place the guide over the belt,
properly adjusted, the comfort guide and insert the two edges of the
positions the belt away from the belt into the slots of the guide.
neck and head.
1. Remove the guide from its

storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
5. To remove and store the comfort

Warning (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
and across the chest. These parts can be removed from the guide.
of the body are best able to take Store the guide in its storage
belt restraining forces. pocket on the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
3. Be sure that the belt is not be seriously injured if they do not
twisted and it lies flat. The wear safety belts.
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
A pregnant woman should wear a use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap wear it, attach it to the regular safety
portion should be worn as low as belt. See the instruction sheet that Keep belts clean and dry.
possible, below the rounding, comes with the extender.
throughout the pregnancy. { Warning
The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
to protect the mother. When a safety Now and then, check that the safety It may severely weaken them. In
belt is worn properly, it is more likely belt reminder light, safety belts, a crash, they might not be able to
that the fetus will not be hurt in a buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
crash. For pregnant women, as for provide adequate protection.
anchorages are all working properly. Clean safety belts only with mild
anyone, the key to making safety Look for any other loose or
belts effective is wearing them soap and lukewarm water.
damaged safety belt system parts
properly. that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer Replacing Safety Belt
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
System Parts after a
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under Crash
around you, you should use it.
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
frayed, get a new one right away. { Warning
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt A crash can damage the safety
order it, take the heaviest coat you belt system in the vehicle.
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5-11.
A damaged safety belt system
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry. may not properly protect the
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3-15. person using it, resulting in
else use it, and use it only for the serious injury or even death in a
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
New parts and repairs may be Airbag System

Warning (Continued) necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the The vehicle has the following
crash. To help make sure the time of the crash. airbags:
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them Have the safety belt pretensioners . A frontal airbag for the driver.
inspected and any necessary checked if the vehicle has been in a . A frontal airbag for the front
replacements made as soon as crash, or if the airbag readiness light outboard passenger.
possible. stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag . A knee airbag for the driver.
Readiness Light on page 5-12. . A knee airbag for the front
After a minor crash, replacement of outboard passenger.
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
. A seat-mounted side impact
were used during any crash may airbag for the driver.
have been stressed or damaged. . A seat-mounted side impact
See your dealer to have the safety airbag for the front outboard
belt assemblies inspected or passenger.
replaced. . Seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the second row
outboard passengers.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. A roof-rail airbag for the front the risk of injury from the force of an
outboard passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate Warning (Continued)
passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
behind the front outboard vehicle should wear a safety belt
passenger. Here are the most important things properly, whether or not there is
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person.
All vehicle airbags have the word
AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
near the deployment opening. { Warning
For frontal airbags, the word You can be severely injured or { Warning
AIRBAG is on the center of the killed in a crash if you are not
steering wheel for the driver and on wearing your safety belt, even Because airbags inflate with great
the instrument panel for the front with airbags. Airbags are force and faster than the blink of
outboard passenger. designed to work with safety an eye, anyone who is up
belts, not replace them. Also, against, or very close to any
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
airbags are not designed to inflate airbag when it inflates can be
is on the lower part of the
in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not
instrument panel.
safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any
For seat-mounted side impact airbag, as you would be if sitting
See When Should an Airbag
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the on the edge of the seat or leaning
side of the seatback closest to Inflate? on page 3-20.
forward. Safety belts help keep
the door. Wearing your safety belt during a you in position before and during
For roof-rail airbags, the word crash helps reduce the chance of a crash. Always wear a safety
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver
being ejected from it. Airbags are should sit as far back as possible
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety while still maintaining control of
safety belts. Everyone in the the vehicle.
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce (Continued) (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Warning (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
There is an airbag readiness light
and/or roof-rail airbags.
on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
{ Warning system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
Children who are up against, problem. See Airbag Readiness
or very close to, any airbag when Light on page 5-12 for more
it inflates can be seriously injured information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
or killed. Always secure children center of the steering wheel.
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on The front outboard passenger
page 3-30 or Infants and Young frontal airbag is in the passenger
Children on page 3-32. side instrument panel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar Passenger Side Similar
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box. The seat-mounted side impact On vehicles with second row seat‐
airbags for the driver and front mounted side impact airbags, they
outboard passenger are in the side are in the sides of the rear seatback
of the seatbacks closest to the door. closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second { Warning
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down.
or even death. The path of an This vehicle is equipped with
inflating airbag must be kept Frontal airbags may inflate at
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on
clear. Do not put anything page 3-16. Airbags are designed to
between an occupant and an whether the vehicle hits an object
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and
airbag, and do not attach or put specific airbag system's deployment
anything on the steering wheel whether the object is fixed or
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
hub or on or near any other are used to predict how severe a or wide.
airbag covering. crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
Do not use seat accessories that inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
block the inflation path of a the occupants. The vehicle has
electronic sensors that help the rear impacts, or in many side
seat-mounted side impact airbag. impacts.
airbag system determine the
Never secure anything to the roof severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, the vehicle has
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags thresholds can vary with specific advanced technology frontal
by routing a rope or tie‐down vehicle design. airbags. Advanced technology
through any door or window Frontal airbags are designed to frontal airbags adjust the restraint
opening. If you do, the path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal according to either crash severity or
inflating roof-rail airbag will be or near frontal crashes to help occupant interaction.
blocked. reduce the potential for severe Knee airbags are designed to inflate
injuries, mainly to the driver's or in moderate to severe frontal or
front outboard passenger's head near frontal impacts. Knee airbags
and chest. are not designed to inflate during
Whether the frontal airbags will or vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts,
should inflate is not based primarily or in many side impacts.
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Seat-mounted side impact airbags In any particular crash, no one can moderate to severe side collisions,
are designed to inflate in moderate say whether an airbag should have even belted occupants can contact
to severe side crashes depending inflated simply because of the the inside of the vehicle.
on the location of the impact. vehicle damage or repair costs. Airbags supplement the protection
Seat-mounted side impact airbags provided by safety belts by
are not designed to inflate in frontal What Makes an Airbag distributing the force of the impact
impacts, near frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts.
Inflate? more evenly over the
occupant's body.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag In a deployment event, the sensing
is designed to inflate on the side of system sends an electrical signal Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
the vehicle that is struck. triggering a release of gas from the are designed to help contain the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the head and chest of occupants in the
Roof-rail airbags are designed to outboard seating positions in the
airbag causing the bag to break out
inflate in moderate to severe side first and second rows. The rollover
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
crashes depending on the location capable roof-rail airbags are
and related hardware are all part of
of the impact. In addition, these designed to help reduce the risk of
the airbag module.
roof-rail airbags are designed to full or partial ejection in rollover
inflate during a rollover or in a For airbag locations, see Where Are
events, although no system can
severe frontal impact. Roof-rail the Airbags? on page 3-18.
prevent all such ejections.
airbags are not designed to inflate in
rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many
will inflate when either side of the types of collisions, primarily
vehicle is struck, if the sensing
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is
system predicts that the vehicle is In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When
about to roll over on its side, or in a near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on
severe frontal impact. occupants can contact the steering page 3-20.
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
What Will You See after the hazard warning flashers by

an Airbag Inflates?
{ Warning using the controls for those
features.
After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems { Warning
quickly that some people may not for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel
they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering
the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a
airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be
Airbags? on page 3-18. by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could
The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate
into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag the vehicle.
but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt
from the vents in the deflated to restart the engine after a crash
airbags. Airbag inflation does not has occurred.
The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn
the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps, turn on the In many crashes severe enough to
the vehicle, nor does it prevent hazard warning flashers, and shut inflate the airbag, windshields are
people from leaving the vehicle. off the fuel system after the airbags broken by vehicle deformation.
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work

also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
passenger airbag. service.
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag Passenger Sensing
inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system. Canada
The vehicle has a passenger
If you do not get them, the The words ON and OFF, or the
sensing system for the front
airbag system will not be there symbol for on and off, will be visible
outboard passenger position. The
to help protect you in another during the system check. When the
passenger airbag status indicator
crash. A new system will include system check is complete, either the
will light on the instrument panel
airbag modules and possibly word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
when the vehicle is started.
other parts. The service manual on or off, will be visible. See
for the vehicle covers the need Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
to replace other parts. on page 5-13.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing The passenger sensing system
and diagnostic module which turns off the front outboard
records information after a passenger frontal airbag and knee
crash. See Vehicle Data airbag under certain conditions. No
Recording and Privacy on United States
other airbag is affected by the
page 13-13 and Event Data passenger sensing system.
Recorders on page 13-14.
The passenger sensing system
. Let only qualified technicians works with sensors that are part of
work on the airbag systems. the front outboard passenger seat.
Improper service can mean that The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the front
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
outboard passenger frontal airbag The passenger sensing system is

and knee airbag should be allowed Warning (Continued) designed to turn off the front
to inflate or not. outboard passenger frontal airbag
forward-facing child restraint can and knee airbag if:
According to accident statistics, be seriously injured or killed if the
children are safer when properly . The front outboard passenger
passenger frontal airbag inflates
secured in a rear seat in the correct and the passenger seat is in a seat is unoccupied.
child restraint for their weight forward position. . The system determines that an
and size. infant is present in a child
Even if the passenger sensing
Whenever possible, children restraint.
system has turned off the front
aged 12 and under should be . A front outboard passenger
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
secured in a rear seating position. takes his/her weight off of the
system is fail-safe. No one can
Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not seat for a period of time.
the front. This is because the risk to inflate under some unusual . There is a critical problem with
the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though the the airbag system or the
if the airbag inflates. airbag(s) are off. passenger sensing system.
{ Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints

in a rear seat, even if the
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
A child in a rear-facing child airbag(s) are off. If you secure a outboard passenger frontal airbag
restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in and knee airbag, the off indicator
or killed if the passenger frontal the front outboard passenger will light and stay lit as a reminder
airbag inflates. This is because seat, always move the seat as far that the airbag(s) are off. See
the back of the rear-facing child back as it will go. It is better to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
secure the child restraint in a on page 5-13.
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a rear seat. The passenger sensing system is
(Continued) designed to turn on the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
and knee airbag anytime the system 3. Remove any additional items
senses that a person of adult size is { Warning from the seat such as blankets,
sitting properly in the front outboard cushions, seat covers, seat
passenger seat. When the If the airbag readiness light ever heaters, or seat massagers.
passenger sensing system has comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong 4. Reinstall the child restraint
allowed the airbag(s) to be enabled, following the directions provided
the on indicator will light and stay lit with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, by the child restraint
as a reminder that the airbag(s) are manufacturer and refer to
active. have the vehicle serviced right
Securing Child Restraints (Front
away. See Airbag Readiness
For some children, including Passenger Seat) on page 3-44
Light on page 5-12 for more
children in child restraints, and for or Securing Child Restraints
very small adults, the passenger information, including important (Rear Seat) on page 3-47.
sensing system may or may not turn safety information.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
off the front outboard passenger restraint and restarting the
frontal airbag and knee airbag, If the On Indicator Is Lit for a vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
depending upon the person's Child Restraint turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
seating posture and body build. recline the vehicle seatback and
Everyone in the vehicle who The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the front adjust the seat cushion,
has outgrown child restraints if adjustable, to make sure that
should wear a safety belt outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag if the system the vehicle seatback is not
properly — whether or not there is pushing the child restraint into
an airbag for that person. determines that an infant is present
in a child restraint. If a child restraint the seat cushion. Also make
has been installed and the on sure the child restraint is not
indicator is lit: trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust
1. Turn the vehicle off. the head restraint. See Head
2. Remove the child restraint from Restraints on page 3-2.
the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6. Restart the vehicle. following steps to allow the system

The passenger sensing system may to detect that person and enable the { Warning
or may not turn off the airbag(s) for front outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag: If the front outboard passenger
a child in a child restraint depending airbag is turned off for an
upon the child's size. It is better to 1. Turn the vehicle off. adult-sized occupant, the airbag
secure the child restraint in a 2. Remove any additional material will not be able to inflate and help
rear seat. from the seat, such as blankets, protect that person in a crash,
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an cushions, seat covers, seat resulting in an increased risk of
Adult-Sized Occupant heaters, seat massagers, a serious injury or even death. An
laptop, or other electronic adult-sized occupant should not
devices. ride in the front outboard
3. Place the seatback in the fully passenger seat, if the passenger
upright position. airbag off indicator is lit.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat Additional Factors Affecting
cushion, with legs comfortably System Operation
extended.
Safety belts help keep the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger in position on the seat
person remain in this position for during vehicle maneuvers and
one minute after the on indicator braking, which helps the passenger
is lit. sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
If a person of adult size is sitting in “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
the front outboard passenger seat, in the Index for additional
but the off indicator is lit, it could be information about the importance of
because that person is not sitting proper restraint use.
properly in the seat. Use the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
A thick layer of additional material,

. Liquid pooled on the seat that
such as a blanket or cushion, has not soaked in may make it { Warning
or aftermarket equipment such as more likely that the passenger
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat sensing system will turn on the Stowing of articles under the
massagers can affect how well the passenger airbag while a child passenger seat or between the
passenger sensing system restraint or child occupant is on passenger seat cushion and
operates. We recommend that you the seat. If the passenger airbag seatback may interfere with the
not use seat covers or other is turned on, the on indicator will proper operation of the passenger
aftermarket equipment except when be lit. sensing system.
approved by GM for your specific If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the seat immediately. If the airbag
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on readiness light is lit, do not install a
Servicing the
page 3-28 for more information child restraint or allow anyone to Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
about modifications that can affect occupy the seat. See Airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
how the system operates. Readiness Light on page 5-12 for should be serviced. There are parts
A wet seat can affect the important safety information. of the airbag system in several
performance of the passenger The on indicator may be lit if an places around the vehicle. Your
sensing system. Here is how: object, such as a briefcase, dealer and the service manual have
. The passenger sensing system handbag, grocery bag, laptop, information about servicing the
may turn off the passenger or other electronic device, is put on vehicle and the airbag system. To
airbag when liquid is soaked into an unoccupied seat. If this is not purchase a service manual, see
the seat. If this happens, the off desired, remove the object from Service Publications Ordering
indicator will be lit, and the the seat. Information on page 13-11.
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
diagnostic module, steering wheel, deployment of the passenger

{ Warning instrument panel, any of the airbag airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
modules, ceiling or pillar garnish sensing system from properly
For up to 10 seconds after the trim, front sensors, side impact turning off the passenger airbag(s).
vehicle is turned off and the sensors, or airbag wiring. See Passenger Sensing System on
battery is disconnected, an airbag page 3-23.
can still inflate during improper Your dealer and the service manual
service. You can be injured if you have information about the location If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
are close to an airbag when it of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbags, see Different Size Tires
diagnostic module, and airbag and Wheels on page 10-60 for
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
wiring. additional important information.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow In addition, the vehicle has a If you have to modify your vehicle
proper service procedures, and passenger sensing system for the because you have a disability and
make sure the person performing front outboard passenger position, you have questions about whether
work for you is qualified to do so. which includes sensors that are part the modifications will affect the
of the passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you
passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the
Adding Equipment to the operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with reason, call Customer Assistance.
Adding accessories that change the GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
vehicle's frame, bumper system, designed for a different vehicle. Any on page 13-3.
height, front end, or side sheet object, such as an aftermarket seat
metal, may keep the airbag system heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
from working properly. The or device, installed under or on top
operation of the airbag system can of the seat fabric, could also
also be affected by changing or interfere with the operation of the
moving any parts of the front seats, passenger sensing system. This
safety belts, the airbag sensing and could either prevent proper
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ Warning after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5-12. systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
{ Caution not work properly and may not
page 5-12.
protect you and your
If an airbag covering is damaged, passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
opened, or broken, the airbag in serious injury or even death. To
may not work properly. Do not help make sure the airbag
open or break the airbag systems are working properly
coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
opened or broken airbag inspected and any necessary
coverings, have the airbag replacements made as soon as
covering and/or airbag module possible.
replaced. For the location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3-18. See your
dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
page 3-10. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3-10.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, According to accident statistics,
return to the booster seat. children are safer when properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people Warning (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older belt. The belt force would then be
children need to use safety belts applied right on the abdomen.
properly. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
{ Warning the chest.
Never allow more than one child
to wear the same safety belt. The
safety belt cannot properly spread
the impact forces. In a crash, they
can be crushed together and { Warning
seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person Never allow a child to wear the
at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Infants and Young Every time infants and young

children ride in vehicles, they should
Children have the protection provided by
Everyone in a vehicle needs appropriate child restraints. Neither
protection! This includes infants and the vehicle's safety belt system nor
all other children. Neither the its airbag system is designed
distance traveled nor the age and for them.
size of the traveler changes the Children who are not restrained
need, for everyone, to use safety properly can strike other people,
restraints. In fact, the law in every or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be { Warning
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never hold an infant or a child { Warning
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
{ Warning crash forces, an infant or a child
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
will become so heavy it is not it inflates can be seriously injured
Children can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash. or killed. Never put a rear-facing
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
For example, in a crash at only child restraint in the right front
wrapped around their neck and
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) seat. Secure a rear-facing child
the safety belt continues to
infant will suddenly become a restraint in a rear seat. It is also
tighten. Never leave children
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's better to secure a forward-facing
unattended in a vehicle and never
arms. An infant should be child restraint in a rear seat. If you
allow children to play with the
secured in an appropriate must secure a forward-facing
safety belts.
restraint. child restraint in the right front
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will { Warning
be compatible with the motor
seat, always move the front vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and
passenger seat as far back as it head injury during a crash, infants
will go. For most basic types of child need complete support. In a
restraints, there are many
crash, if an infant is in a
different models available. When
rear-facing child restraint, the
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in crash forces can be distributed
a motor vehicle. If it is, the across the strongest part of an
restraint will have a label saying infant's body, the back and
that it meets federal motor shoulders. Infants should always
vehicle safety standards. be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
The restraint manufacturer
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
{ Warning
are many kinds of restraints A young child's hip bones are still
available for children with so small that the vehicle's regular
Q: What are the different types of
special needs. safety belt may not remain low on
add-on child restraints?
the hip bones, as it should.
A: Add-on child restraints, which Instead, it may settle up around
are purchased by the vehicle the child's abdomen. In a crash,
owner, are available in four basic
the belt would apply force on a
types. Selection of a particular
body area that is unprotected by
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Warning (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Forward-Facing Child Seat

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ Warning When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 3-37. use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children

locate the nearest child safety seat aged 12 and under should be Warning (Continued)
inspection station. For CPST secured in a rear seating position.
availability in Canada, check with system is fail-safe. No one can
Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not
Transport Canada or the Provincial the front. This is because the risk to
Ministry of Transportation office. deploy under some unusual
the rear-facing child is so great if the circumstance, even though it is
Securing the Child Within the airbag deploys. turned off.
Child Restraint
{ Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
{ Warning A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a
A child can be seriously injured or restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in
killed in a crash if the child is not or killed if the front passenger the front seat, always move the
properly secured in the child airbag inflates. This is because front passenger seat as far back
restraint. Secure the child the back of the rear-facing child as it will go. It is better to secure
properly following the instructions restraint would be very close to the child restraint in a rear seat.
that came with that child restraint. the inflating airbag. A child in a See Passenger Sensing System
forward-facing child restraint can on page 3-23 for additional
be seriously injured or killed if the information.
Where to Put the front passenger airbag inflates
Restraint and the passenger seat is in a
When securing a child restraint in a
forward position.
According to accident statistics, rear seating position, study the
children and infants are safer when Even if the passenger sensing instructions that came with the child
properly restrained in a child system has turned off the front restraint to make sure it is
restraint system or infant restraint passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle.
system secured in a rear seating (Continued)
position.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Child restraints and booster seats Lower Anchors and recommends that the booster seat
vary considerably in size, and some be secured with the LATCH system,
may fit in certain seating positions
Tethers for Children this can be done as long as the
better than others. Always make (LATCH System) booster seat can be positioned
sure the child restraint is properly The LATCH system secures a child properly and there is no interference
secured. restraint during driving or in a crash. with the proper positioning of the
Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child lap-shoulder belt on the child.
child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child Make sure to follow the instructions
child restraint, you may not be able restraint to the anchors in the that came with the child restraint,
to access adjacent safety belt vehicle. The LATCH system is and also the instructions in this
assemblies or LATCH anchors for designed to make installation of a manual.
additional passengers or child child restraint easier.
When installing a child restraint with
restraints. Adjacent seating In order to use the LATCH system in a top tether, you must also use
positions should not be used if the your vehicle, you need a child either the lower anchors or the
child restraint prevents access to or restraint that has LATCH safety belts to properly secure the
interferes with the routing of the attachments. LATCH-compatible child restraint. A child restraint must
safety belt. rear-facing and forward-facing child never be installed using only the top
Wherever a child restraint is seats can be properly installed tether and anchor.
installed, be sure to secure the child using either the LATCH anchors or
The LATCH anchorage system can
restraint properly. the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
be used until the combined weight
use both the safety belts and the
Keep in mind that an unsecured of the child plus the child restraint is
LATCH anchorage system to secure
child restraint can move around in a 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
a rear-facing or forward-facing
collision or sudden stop and injure alone instead of the LATCH
child seat.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to anchorage system once the
properly secure any child restraint in Booster seats use the vehicle’s combined weight is more than
the vehicle — even when no child is safety belts to secure the child in 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
in it. the booster seat. If the manufacturer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The following explains how to attach Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
a child restraint with these single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
attachments in the vehicle. Either will have a single
Not all vehicle seating positions or attachment (2) to secure the top
child restraints have lower anchors tether to the anchor.
and attachments or top tether Some child restraints that have a
anchors and attachments. top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
Lower Anchors attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for the child
the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars the child restraint during driving or in
built into the vehicle. There are two a crash.
lower anchors for each LATCH
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Lower Anchor and Top Tether To assist in locating the lower The top tether anchors are under
Anchor Locations anchors, each rear anchor position the covers, behind the rear seat, on
has a label, near the crease the filler panel. Be sure to use an
between the seatback and the seat anchor on the same side of the
cushion. vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
To assist in locating the top tether child restraint say that the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor must be attached.
symbol is on the cover.
Rear Seat According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
properly restrained in a child
positions with top tether anchors.
restraint system or infant restraint
H (Lower Anchor): Seating system secured in a rear seating
positions with two lower anchors. position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3-36 for
additional information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH Warning (Continued) { Caution
System restraint to a single anchor could Do not let the LATCH
cause the anchor or attachment attachments rub against the
{ Warning to come loose or even break vehicle’s safety belts. This may
during a crash. A child or others damage these parts. If necessary,
If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the move buckled safety belts to
not attached to anchors, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash, attach only one attachments.
the child correctly. In a crash, the child restraint per anchor.
child could be seriously injured or Do not fold the empty rear seat
killed. Install a LATCH-type child with a safety belt buckled. This
restraint properly using the could damage the safety belt or
anchors, or use the vehicle safety { Warning the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that Children can be seriously injured before folding the seat.
came with the child restraint and or strangled if a shoulder belt is
the instructions in this manual. wrapped around their neck and
If you need to secure more than one
the safety belt continues to child restraint in the rear seat, see
tighten. Buckle any unused safety Where to Put the Restraint on
belts behind the child restraint so page 3-36 for additional information.
{ Warning children cannot reach them. Pull
This system is designed to make
the shoulder belt all the way out
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock, installation of child restraints easier.
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the When using lower anchors, do not
Attaching more than one child use the vehicle's safety belts.
child restraint has been installed.
(Continued) Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
secure the restraints. Some See “Head Restraint 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
restraints also use another vehicle Removal and the top tether according to
anchor to secure a top tether. Reinstallation” at the end of the child restraint
1. Attach and tighten the lower this section. instructions and the
attachments to the lower 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower following instructions:
anchors. If the child restraint attachments on the child
does not have lower restraint to the lower
attachments or the desired anchors.
seating position does not have 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
lower anchors, secure the child recommends that the top tether
restraint with the top tether and be attached, attach and tighten
the safety belts. Refer to the the top tether to the top tether
child restraint manufacturer anchor. Refer to the child
instructions and the instructions restraint instructions and the
in this manual. following steps: If you are using a single
1.1. Find the lower anchors for 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. tether in a rear outboard
the desired rear outboard seating position with an
seating position. Open the cover to expose
adjustable head restraint,
the anchor.
1.2. Put the child restraint on raise the head restraint and
the seat. route the tether under the
head restraint and in
For outboard rear seating
between the head restraint
positions, if the head
posts.
restraint interferes with the
proper installation of the
child restraint, the head
restraint may be removed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If you are using a single 3. Before placing a child in the

tether in the center seating child restraint, make sure it is
position, or the rear securely held in place. To check,
outboard head restraint has grasp the child restraint at the
been removed, route the LATCH path and attempt to
single tether over the move it side to side and back
seatback. and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
If you are using a dual installation.
tether in a rear outboard
Head Restraint Removal and
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint, Reinstallation
raise the head restraint and The rear outboard head restraints
route the tether under the can be removed if they interfere with
head restraint and around the proper installation of the child
the head restraint posts. restraint.
If you are using a dual To remove the head restraint:
tether in the center seating
position, or the rear 1. Partially fold the seatback
outboard head restraint has forward. See Rear Seats on
been removed, route the page 3-6 for additional
dual tether over the information.
seatback.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1. Insert the head restraint posts

{ Warning into the holes in the top of the
seatback. The notches on the
With head restraints that are not posts must face the driver side
installed and adjusted properly, of the vehicle.
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ 2. Push the head restraint down.
spinal injury in a crash. Do not If necessary, press the height
drive until the head restraints for adjustment release button to
all occupants are installed and further lower the head restraint.
adjusted properly. See Head Restraints on
page 3-2.
2. Press both buttons on the head To reinstall the head restraint: 3. Try to move the head restraint to
restraint posts at the same time, make sure that it is locked in
and pull up on the head place.
restraint.
Replacing LATCH System
3. Store the head restraint in the
trunk of the vehicle. Parts After a Crash
4. When the child restraint is
removed, reinstall the head { Warning
restraint before the seating
A crash can damage the LATCH
position is used.
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In addition, the vehicle has a

Warning (Continued) passenger sensing system which is Warning (Continued)
designed to turn off the right front
death in a crash. To help make passenger frontal airbag and child restraint can be seriously
sure the LATCH system is passenger knee airbag under injured or killed if the right front
working properly after a crash, certain conditions. See Passenger passenger airbag inflates and the
see your dealer to have the Sensing System on page 3-23 and passenger seat is in a forward
system inspected and any Passenger Airbag Status Indicator position.
necessary replacements made as on page 5-13 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing
soon as possible. including important safety system has turned off the right
information. front passenger frontal airbag, no
If the vehicle has the LATCH system Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can
and it was being used during a the front. This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not
crash, new LATCH system parts the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
may be needed. if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though it is
New parts and repairs may be turned off.
necessary even if the LATCH { Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints
system was not being used at the in a rear seat, even if the airbag
time of the crash. A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a
or killed if the right front forward-facing child restraint in
Securing Child Restraints the right front seat, always move
passenger airbag inflates. This is
(Front Passenger Seat) because the back of the the front passenger seat as far
This vehicle has airbags. A rear rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to
seat is a safer place to secure a be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a
forward-facing child restraint. See airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint on (Continued) (Continued)
page 3-36.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
In Canada, the law requires that or around the restraint. The child
Warning (Continued) forward-facing child restraints have restraint instructions will show
a top tether, and that the tether be you how.
See Passenger Sensing System attached.
on page 3-23 for additional
information. You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
If the child restraint has the LATCH that came with the child restraint.
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH 1. Move the seat as far back as it
System) on page 3-37 for how and will go before securing the
where to install the child restraint forward-facing child restraint.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is When the passenger sensing
secured using a safety belt and it system has turned off the right
uses a top tether, see Lower front passenger frontal airbag
Anchors and Tethers for Children and passenger knee airbag, the
(LATCH System) on page 3-37 for off indicator on the passenger 4. Push the latch plate into the
top tether anchor locations. airbag status indicator should buckle until it clicks.
Do not secure a child seat in a light and stay lit when you start
the vehicle. See Passenger Position the release button on
position without a top tether anchor the buckle, so that the safety
if a national or local law requires Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5-13. belt could be quickly unbuckled
that the top tether be anchored, or if if necessary.
the instructions that come with the 2. Put the child restraint on
child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side-to-side and
back-and-forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-23 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions of
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be the vehicle's safety belt through
When securing a child restraint in a attached. or around the restraint. The child
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have restraint instructions will show
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be you how.
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3-37 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3-36.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
page 3-37 for top tether anchor the seat.
locations. If the head restraint interferes 3. Push the latch plate into the
Do not secure a child seat in a with the proper installation of the buckle until it clicks. If the latch
position without a top tether anchor child restraint, the head restraint plate will not go fully into the
if a national or local law requires may be removed. See “Head buckle, check if the correct
that the top tether be anchored, or if Restraint Removal and buckle is being used.
the instructions that come with the Reinstallation” under Lower Position the release button on
child restraint say that the top strap Anchors and Tethers for the buckle so that the safety belt
must be anchored. Children (LATCH System) on could be quickly unbuckled if
page 3-37. necessary.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-37.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down move it side to side and back
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the and forth. When the child
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to restraint is properly installed,
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, there should be no more than
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
into the retractor. When installing To remove the child restraint,
a forward-facing child restraint, it unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
may be helpful to use your knee let it return to the stowed position.
to push down on the child If the top tether is attached to a top
restraint as you tighten the belt. tether anchor, disconnect it. If the
Try to pull the belt out of the head restraint was removed,
retractor to make sure the reinstall it before the seating
retractor is locked. If the position is used. See “Head
retractor is not locked, repeat Restraint Removal and
Steps 4 and 5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors

and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-37.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage There may be a storage

compartment on the instrument
Compartments panel. Pull the handle to open.
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning Glove Box
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Do not store heavy or sharp
the lever.
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 objects in storage compartments.
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may
cause the cover to open and
Cupholders
Additional Storage Features could result in injury. Cupholders are in the center
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 console.
Instrument Panel Storage
Cupholders may be located in the

second row seat armrest. To
access, pull the armrest down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage There may be an auxiliary jack Additional Storage

outlet and a USB port located in the
The center console storage has a center console. Features
storage area under the armrest. Pull
up on the latch on the front of the See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-16.
armrest to access.
Cargo Tie-Downs
On the driver side in the rear

Pull up on the latch and slide the
compartment is a retainer to hang
center console armrest to adjust the
light items on.
position. Return the armrest to the
rear position to access the
storage area.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Airbag Status
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Malfunction Information Displays

Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Driver Information
Controls Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Battery Voltage and Charging
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Power Steering Warning Brake System Messages . . . . 5-27
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-28
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Traction Control System Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Indicators Wait-to-Start Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-29
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-29
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20 Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Diesel Particulate Filter
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Reduced Engine Power Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-30
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Engine Coolant Temperature High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Object Detection System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Ride Control System Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 while driving.
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-32
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-32 Adjustment
Starting the Vehicle
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-34
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-35
For vehicles with audio steering

To adjust the steering wheel: wheel controls, some audio controls
1. Pull the lever down. can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down. b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with a Bluetooth, OnStar,
3. Pull or push the steering wheel or navigation system, press to
closer or away from you. interact with those systems. See
4. Push the lever up to lock the Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-18
steering wheel in place. or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
on page 7-20 or Bluetooth (Voice Horn

Recognition) on page 7-23, OnStar
Overview on page 14-1, or the Press a on the steering wheel pad
infotainment manual. to sound the horn.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only. Windshield Wiper/Washer
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move
Bluetooth systems, press to reject the lever up to INT for intermittent
an incoming call, or end a wipes, then turn the 3 INT band
current call. up for more frequent wipes or down
_ SRC ^ (Source/Favorite): Press for less frequent wipes.
to select a source or turn to change OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
favorite stations. The windshield wiper/washer lever
is on the right side of the steering 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly
Press _ or ^ to select AM, FM, CD, column. With the ignition in ACC/ move the wiper lever down. For
or MP3 track. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move several wipes, hold the wiper
the windshield wiper lever to select lever down.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or
previous saved favorite radio the wiper speed. n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
stations. HI: Use for fast wipes. the windshield wiper lever toward
you to spray windshield washer fluid
+ x − (Volume): Press + to LO: Use for slow wipes. and activate the wipers. The wipers
increase the volume. Press − to will continue until the lever is
decrease the volume. released or the maximum wash time
is reached. When the windshield
wiper lever is released, additional
wipes may occur depending on how
long the windshield washer had
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
been activated. See Washer Fluid If the windshield wiper lever is then needing a signal from the GPS
on page 10-25 for information on moved to off before the driver door satellites. When the compass
filling the windshield washer fluid is opened or within 10 minutes, the display shows CAL, drive the
reservoir. wipers will restart and move to the vehicle for a short distance in an
base of the windshield. open area where it can receive a
{ Warning If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
OFF while the wipers are performing
In freezing weather, do not use wipes due to windshield washing, the GPS signal is restored and
the washer until the windshield is the wipers continue to run until they provide a heading again. See
warmed. Otherwise the washer reach the base of the windshield. Compass Messages on page 5-27
fluid can form ice on the for more information on the
windshield, blocking your vision. messages that may be displayed for
Compass the compass.
The vehicle may have a compass
Clear snow and ice from the wiper display in the Driver Information Clock
blades and windshield before using Center (DIC). The compass receives
them. If frozen to the windshield, its heading and other information The infotainment system controls
carefully loosen or thaw them. from the Global Positioning are used to access the time and
Damaged blades should be System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, date settings through the menu
replaced. See Wiper Blade and vehicle speed information. system. See Operation on page 7-4
Replacement on page 10-30. for information about how to use the
Avoid covering the GPS antenna, menu system. For vehicles with a
Heavy snow or ice can overload the located on the roof, for long periods connective radio or navigation
wiper motor. of time with objects that may system, see the infotainment
Wipe Parking interfere with the antenna's ability to manual.
receive a satellite signal. The
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ compass system is designed to
OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI, operate for a certain number of
or INT, they will immediately stop. miles or degrees of turn before
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Setting the Time and Date To set the time and date for the 4. To save the settings, press the
radio with navigation: MENU/SEL knob.
radio with CD: 1. Press CLOCK. To set the 12/24 hour format for the
2. Select Set Time or Set Date. radio without navigation:
1. Press CLOCK.
3. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Press CLOCK.
2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
adjust the highlighted number. 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
3. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
adjust the highlighted number. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to 3. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the next number. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
5. To save the settings, press display format.
BACK on the radio faceplate. 4. To save the settings, press OK
5. To save the settings, press the
If auto timing is set, the time screen button.
MENU/SEL knob.
displayed on the clock may not To set the 12/24 hour format for the
update immediately when driving radio with navigation:
radio without navigation:
into a new time zone. 1. Press CLOCK.
1. Press CLOCK.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format 2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
2. Select Set Time or Set Date.
To set the 12/24 hour format for the 3. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
3. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to radio with CD: select the 12 hour or 24 hour
adjust the highlighted number.
1. Press CLOCK. display format.
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. 4. To save the settings, press the
BACK on the radio faceplate.
5. To save the settings, press OK 3. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
screen button. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Power Outlets Certain electrical accessories may Cigarette Lighter

not be compatible with the
The accessory power outlets can be accessory power outlet and could If equipped with a cigarette lighter, it
used to plug in electrical equipment, overload vehicle or adapter fuses. is on the center floor console near
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. If a problem is experienced, see the shift lever.
There is one accessory power outlet your dealer. To activate the cigarette lighter,
located on the center floor console When adding electrical equipment, push it into the heating element and
and one on the rear of the center be sure to follow the installation let go. When the lighter is ready it
floor console. These outlets are instructions included with the will pop back out.
powered when the key is in ON/ equipment. See Add-On Electrical
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until
the driver door is opened within
Equipment on page 9-69. { Caution
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
See Retained Accessory Power { Caution Holding a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating does not let the
(RAP) on page 9-23. Hanging heavy equipment from lighter back away from the
Open the cover to access. the power outlet can cause heating element when it is hot.
damage not covered by the Damage from overheating can
{ Caution vehicle warranty. The power occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
outlets are designed for
Leaving electrical equipment accessory power plugs only, such blown. Do not hold a cigarette
plugged in for an extended period as cell phone charge cords. lighter in while it is heating.
of time while the vehicle is off will
drain the battery. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in
use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum
20 amp rating.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Ashtrays Warning Lights, When one of the warning lights

comes on and stays on while
If equipped with a removable Gauges, and driving, or when one of the gauges
ashtray, the ashtray can be placed shows there may be a problem,
into the front console cupholders. Indicators check the section that explains what
To open the ashtray, lift the lid of the Warning lights and gauges can to do. Follow this manual's advice.
ashtray. After using, close the lid. signal that something is wrong Waiting to do repairs can be costly
before it becomes serious enough and even dangerous.
To empty the ashtray for cleaning, to cause an expensive repair or
slightly turn the upper part of the replacement. Paying attention to the
ashtray counterclockwise and warning lights and gauges could
remove it. prevent injury.
{ Caution Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Holding a cigarette lighter in while function. Some warning lights come
it is heating does not let the on briefly when the engine is started
lighter back away from the to indicate they are working.
heating element when it is hot. Gauges can indicate when there
Damage from overheating can could be a problem with a vehicle
occur to the lighter or heating function. Often gauges and warning
element, or a fuse could be lights work together to indicate a
blown. Do not hold a cigarette problem with the vehicle.
lighter in while it is heating.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Instrument Cluster
English Gas Cluster with Automatic Transmission Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
English Diesel Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Speedometer The trip odometer is accessed and Fuel Gauge

reset through the Driver Information
The speedometer shows the Center (DIC). See Driver
vehicle's speed in either kilometers Information Center (DIC) on
per hour (km/h) or miles per page 5-23.
hour (mph).
Tachometer
Odometer
The tachometer displays the engine
The odometer shows how far the speed in revolutions per
vehicle has been driven, in either minute (rpm).
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant { Caution
odometer. The digital odometer will
read 999,999 if it is turned back. If the engine is operated with the Gas Shown
If the vehicle needs a new odometer tachometer in the shaded warning
area, the vehicle could be When the ignition is on, the fuel
installed, it must be set to the gauge indicates about how much
mileage total of the old odometer. damaged, and the damages
fuel is left in the tank.
If that is not possible, then it must would not be covered by the
be set at zero and a label must be vehicle warranty. Do not operate An arrow on the fuel gauge
put on the driver door to show the the engine with the tachometer in indicates the side of the vehicle the
old mileage reading when the new the shaded warning area. fuel door is on.
odometer was installed. A FUEL LEVEL LOW message may
appear in the Driver Information
Trip Odometer Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
The trip odometer can show how far Messages on page 5-29 for more
the vehicle has been driven since information.
the trip odometer was last reset.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Here are four things that some Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Temperature Gauge Driver Safety Belt Reminder
. At the service station, the fuel Light
pump shuts off before the gauge There is a driver safety belt
reads full. reminder light on the instrument
. It takes a little more or less fuel cluster.
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while When the vehicle is started, this
turning a corner or speeding up. This gauge shows the engine light flashes and a chime may come
coolant temperature. on to remind the driver to fasten
. The gauge takes a few seconds their safety belt. Then the light stays
to stabilize after the ignition is If the indicator needle moves to the on solid until the belt is buckled.
turned on, and will go back to hot side of the gauge toward the H This cycle may continue several
empty when the ignition is or shaded area, the engine is times if the driver remains or
turned off. too hot. becomes unbuckled while the
If the vehicle has been operated vehicle is moving.
under normal driving conditions, pull If the driver safety belt is buckled,
off the road, stop the vehicle, and neither the light nor the chime
turn off the engine as soon as comes on.
possible.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt The airbag readiness light comes on
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on for several seconds when the
if an object is put on the seat such vehicle is started. If the light does
There is a passenger safety belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery not come on then, have it fixed
reminder light near the passenger bag, laptop, or other electronic immediately.
airbag status indicator. See device. To turn off the warning light
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-23.
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
{ Warning
safety belt. If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
Airbag Readiness Light comes on while driving, it means
This light shows if there is an the airbag system might not be
electrical problem with the airbag working properly. The airbags in
system. The system check includes the vehicle might not inflate in a
the airbag sensor(s), passenger crash, or they could even inflate
When the vehicle is started, this
sensing system, the pretensioners, without a crash. To help avoid
light flashes and a chime may come
the airbag modules, the wiring, and injury, have the vehicle serviced
on to remind passengers to fasten
their safety belt. Then the light stays the crash sensing and diagnostic right away.
on solid until the belt is buckled. module. For more information on the
This cycle continues several times if airbag system, see Airbag System If there is a problem with the airbag
the passenger remains or becomes on page 3-16. system, a Driver Information Center
unbuckled while the vehicle is (DIC) message may also come on.
moving. See Airbag System Messages on
If the passenger safety belt is page 5-32.
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Passenger Airbag Status as a system check. Then, after

Indicator several seconds, the status { Warning
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
The vehicle has a passenger or the on or off symbol to let you If the airbag readiness light ever
sensing system. See Passenger know the status of the front comes on and stays on, it means
Sensing System on page 3-23 for outboard passenger frontal airbag that something may be wrong
important safety information. The and knee airbag. with the airbag system. To help
instrument panel has a passenger avoid injury to yourself or others,
If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right
airbag status indicator. lit on the passenger airbag status
away. See Airbag Readiness
indicator, it means that the front
Light on page 5-12 for more
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag are allowed to information, including important
inflate. safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status Charging System Light
United States indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
Canada are no lights at all, there may be a The charging system light comes on
problem with the lights or the briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the passenger sensing system. See on, but the engine is not running, as
passenger airbag status indicator your dealer for service. a check to show the light is working.
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The light turns off when the engine does not, have the vehicle serviced can prevent more serious damage
is started. If it does not, have the by your dealer. See Ignition to the vehicle. This system also
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Positions (Keyless Access) on assists the dealer technician in
If the light stays on, or comes on page 9-14 or Ignition Positions (Key correctly diagnosing any
while driving, there could be a Access) on page 9-16. malfunction.
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your { Caution
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery. If the vehicle is continually driven
with this light on, the emission
If a short distance must be driven controls might not work as well,
with the light on, be sure to turn off the vehicle fuel economy might
all accessories, such as the radio not be as good, and the engine
If the malfunction indicator lamp
and air conditioner.
comes on while the engine is might not run as smoothly. This
running, this indicates that the OBD could lead to costly repairs that
Malfunction II system has detected a problem might not be covered by the
Indicator Lamp and diagnosis and service might be vehicle warranty.
required.
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second With a diesel engine, this light may
also come on when the OBD II
Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions system has detected a problem with
{ Caution
are at acceptable levels, helping to the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Modifications made to the engine,
maintain a clean environment. The management system. See Diesel transmission, exhaust, intake,
malfunction indicator lamp comes Exhaust Fluid on page 9-27. or fuel system of the vehicle or
on when the vehicle is placed in Malfunctions often are indicated by the replacement of the original
ON/RUN for key access or Service the system before any problem is tires with other than those of the
Only Mode for Keyless Access, as a apparent. Being aware of the light
check to show it is working. If it (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
To prevent more serious damage to been left off or improperly

Caution (Continued) the vehicle: installed. A loose or missing gas
. Reduce vehicle speed. cap allows gasoline to evaporate
same Tire Performance Criteria into the atmosphere. A few
(TPC) can affect the vehicle's . Avoid hard accelerations. driving trips with the cap
emission controls and can cause . properly installed should turn the
Avoid steep uphill grades.
this light to come on. light off.
Modifications to these systems If the light continues to flash, find a
could lead to costly repairs not safe place to stop and park the
. For all engines, check that good
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at quality fuel is used. Poor fuel
covered by the vehicle warranty.
least 10 seconds, and restart the quality causes the engine not to
This could also result in a failure
engine. If the light is still flashing, run as efficiently as designed
to pass a required Emission and may cause stalling after
Inspection/Maintenance test. See follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as start-up, stalling when the
Accessories and Modifications on vehicle is changed into gear,
page 10-3. possible.
misfiring, hesitation on
Light On Steady (All Engines): An acceleration, or stumbling on
emission control system malfunction acceleration. These conditions
This light can come on during a
has been detected on the vehicle. might go away once the engine
malfunction in one of two ways:
Diagnosis and service might be is warmed up.
Light Flashing (Gasoline Engine required.
Only): A misfire condition has been If one or more of these conditions
The following may correct an occurs, change the fuel brand used.
detected and is present. A misfire
emission control system It may require at least one full tank
increases vehicle emissions and
malfunction: of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis . For gasoline engines, check that See Recommended Fuel (Gasoline)
and service might be required. the gas cap is fully installed. See on page 9-52.
Filling the Tank on page 9-61.
The diagnostic system can
determine if the gas cap has
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument The diagnostic system is
light turn off, your dealer can check panel next to the steering wheel. designed to evaluate critical
the vehicle. The dealer has the See your dealer if assistance is emission control systems during
proper test equipment and needed. normal driving. This can take
diagnostic tools to fix any The vehicle may not pass several days of driving. If this
mechanical or electrical problems inspection if: has been done and the vehicle
that might have developed. still does not pass the inspection
. The malfunction indicator lamp is for lack of OBD II system
Emissions Inspection and on when the engine is running, readiness, your dealer can
Maintenance Programs or while the vehicle is in ON/ prepare the vehicle for
Depending on where you live, your RUN or in Service Only Mode inspection.
vehicle may be required to and the malfunction indicator
participate in an emission control lamp does not come on. See Brake System Warning
system inspection and maintenance your dealer for assistance in
verifying proper operation of the Light
program. For the inspection, the
emission system test equipment will malfunction indicator lamp. The vehicle brake system consists
likely connect to the vehicle's Data . The OBD II (On-Board of two hydraulic circuits. If one
Link Connector (DLC). Diagnostics) system determines circuit is not working, the remaining
that critical emission control circuit can still work to stop the
systems have not been vehicle. For normal braking
completely diagnosed by the performance, both circuits need to
system. If this were to occur, the be working.
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away.
recently been replaced or
run down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If the light comes on while driving, a Start the engine again to reset the
chime sounds. Pull off the road and system. If the light stays on after
stop. The pedal might be harder to driving at a speed above 20 km/h
push or go closer to the floor. (13 mph), see your dealer for
It might also take longer to stop. service. A chime may also sound
If the light is still on, have the when the light comes on steady.
Metric English vehicle towed for service. See If the regular brake system warning
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-85. light is not on, the vehicle still has
The brake indicator light should
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
come on briefly as the engine is Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning
started. If it does not come on have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
(ABS) Warning Light light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
{ Warning See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5-16.
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake See Brake System Messages on
system warning light is on. page 5-27 for all brake‐related DIC
Driving with the brake system messages.
warning light on can lead to a The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
crash. If the light is still on after light comes on briefly when the Up-Shift Light
engine is started.
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped, If the light does not come on, have it
have the vehicle towed for fixed so it will be ready to warn if
service. there is a problem.
If the ABS light comes on and stays
on while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
For manual transmission vehicles, Traction Off Light StabiliTrak® OFF Light
there is an up-shift light that comes
on in the lower DIC area. It shows
when to shift to the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
See Manual Transmission on
page 9-37.
Power Steering Warning This light comes on briefly while This light comes on briefly while
Light starting the engine. If it does not, starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working dealer.
normally, the indicator light then This light comes on when the
turns off. StabiliTrak system is turned off.
The traction off light comes on when If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
the Traction Control System (TCS) Control System (TCS) is also off.
has been turned off by pressing and If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,
This light comes on briefly when the releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak the system does not assist in
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a button. controlling the vehicle. Turn on the
check to show it is working. This light and the StabiliTrak OFF TCS and the StabiliTrak systems
If it does not come on have the light come on when StabiliTrak is and the warning light turns off.
vehicle serviced by your dealer. turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic
If this light stays on, or comes on If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not Stability Control on page 9-41.
while driving, the system may not be limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
working. If this happens, see your See Traction Control/Electronic
dealer for service. Stability Control on page 9-41.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Traction Control System If the indicator/warning light is on Tire Pressure Light

and flashing, the TCS and/or the
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Wait-to-Start Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This light comes on briefly when the Monitor System (TPMS), this light
engine is started. comes on briefly when the engine is
started. It provides information
If the light does not come on, have about tire pressures and the TPMS.
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally, When the Light Is On Steady
the indicator light turns off. This indicates that one or more of
For diesel engines, the wait-to-start
If the light is on and not flashing, the light shows that the engine is the tires are significantly
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak functioning properly and indicates underinflated.
system have been disabled. A DIC when the engine can be started. A Driver Information Center (DIC)
message may display. Check the tire pressure message may also
DIC messages to determine which The fast warm-up glow plug system
makes the wait-to-start light stay on display. See Tire Messages on
feature(s) is no longer functioning page 5-33. Stop as soon as
and whether the vehicle requires for a shorter amount of time than
most diesel engines. possible, and inflate the tires to the
service. pressure value shown on the Tire
For more information, see Starting and Loading Information label. See
the Engine on page 9-18. Tire Pressure on page 10-51.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
When the Light Flashes First and Low Fuel Warning Light
Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. This light should come on briefly as
See Tire Pressure Monitor the engine is started. If it does not
Operation on page 10-53. come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
{ Caution the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have Gas Shown
Lack of proper engine oil some other system problem. See
maintenance can damage the your dealer. This light comes on for a few
engine. Driving with the engine seconds when the ignition is turned
oil low can also damage the on as a check to indicate it is
working. If it does not come on,
engine. The repairs would not be
have it fixed.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as The low fuel warning light comes on
possible. Add oil if required, but if and a chime sounds when the
the oil level is within the operating vehicle is low on fuel. The light turns
range and the oil pressure is still off when fuel is added to the
low, have the vehicle serviced. fuel tank.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
For vehicles with a Driver Also see Diesel Exhaust Fluid on Reduced Engine Power
Information Center (DIC), see Driver page 9-27.
Information Center (DIC) on
Light
page 5-23 for more information. Security Light
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Warning Light
The reduced engine power light

should come on briefly as the
The security light should come on engine is started. If it does not come
briefly as the engine is started. If it on, have the vehicle serviced by
does not come on, have the vehicle your dealer.
This light, a Driver Information serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the This light, along with the malfunction
Center (DIC) Message, and a chime
indicator light turns off. indicator lamp, displays when a
come on when there is an issue with
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
the Diesel Exhaust Fluid. If the light stays on and the engine performance occurs.
See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Messages does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent The vehicle can be driven at a
on page 5-29 for information on the
system. See Immobilizer Operation reduced speed when the reduced
specific message displaying with the
on page 2-17. engine power light is on but
light.
acceleration and speed might be
If the DEF fluid issue has not been reduced. If this light stays on, see
corrected, the light will continue to your dealer as soon as possible for
flash. The vehicle's speed may also diagnosis and repair.
be limited.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
High-Beam On Light The light goes out when the front For vehicles with cruise control, the
fog lamps are turned off. See Front cruise control light is white when the
Fog Lamps on page 6-4 for more cruise control is on and ready, and
information. turns green when the cruise control
is set and active.
Lamps On Reminder The light turns off when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9-43.
The high‐beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are Door Ajar Light
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6-2 for more
This light comes on when the
information.
exterior lamps are in use. See
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Front Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light If equipped, this light comes on
when a door is open or not securely
latched. Before driving, check that
all doors are properly closed. See
Door Ajar Messages on page 5-28.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,

this light comes on when the front
fog lamps are in use.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Information Displays DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu (TRIP) Items

Press MENU on the turn signal
Driver Information lever until the TRIP menu displays.
Center (DIC) Use w x to scroll through the
menu items. Not all items are
The DIC displays information about available on every vehicle. The
your vehicle. It also displays following is a list of all possible
warning messages if a system menu items:
problem is detected. See Vehicle 1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or press
Messages on page 5-27. All and hold to clear, the menu item Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel
messages appear in the DIC display displayed. Economy, Average Vehicle
in the center of the instrument Speed: Displays the current
cluster.
2. w x : Use the band to scroll distance traveled, in either
through the items in each menu. kilometers (km) or miles (mi), from
DIC Operation and Displays 3. MENU: Press to display the Trip/ the last reset for the trip odometer.
The DIC has different displays Fuel Menu and the Vehicle The trip odometer can be reset to
which can be accessed by using the Information Menu. On some zero by pressing and holding the
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever. vehicles, there is also an ECO SET/CLR button while the trip
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and Menu. This button is also used odometer display is showing.
warning messages if a system to return to or exit the last Also displays the approximate
problem is detected. screen displayed on the DIC. average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number is based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
since the last time this menu item
was reset. This display is shown as
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
. c L/100 km (mpg). Reset the Timer: To start the timer, press The center of the page shows the
average consumption by pressing SET/CLR while Timer is displayed. approximate distance the vehicle
SET/CLR when it is displayed. The display will show the amount of can be driven without refueling. The
time that has passed since the timer fuel range estimate is based on an
This screen also displays the was last reset, not including time the average of the vehicle's fuel
average vehicle speed of the ignition is off. Time will continue to economy over recent driving history
vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) be counted as long as the ignition is and the amount of fuel remaining in
or miles per hour (mph). This on, even if another display is being the fuel tank. This display is shown
average is based on the various shown on the DIC. The timer will
vehicle speeds recorded since the as l . km (mi). Fuel range cannot
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, be reset.
last reset. This display is shown as and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
c km/h (mph). Reset the average which the display will return to zero. Also displays the current fuel
speed by pressing SET/CLR when it To stop the timer, press SET/CLR economy in liters per 100 kilometers
is displayed. briefly while Timer is displayed. To (L/100 km) or miles per
Blank Display: Displays no reset the timer to zero, press and gallon (mpg). This number reflects
information. hold SET/CLR. only the fuel economy that the
vehicle has right now and changes
Digital Speed: Displays how fast Navigation: Used for the OnStar or frequently as driving conditions
the vehicle is moving in either navigation system Turn-by-Turn
change. This display is shown as .
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles guidance. See OnStar Overview on
page 14-1 or the navigation manual, L/100 km (mpg). This display cannot
per hour (mph). The speedometer
if the vehicle has navigation, for be reset.
cannot be reset.
more information.
Fuel Used: Displays the
approximate liters (L) or gallons (gal) Speed, Fuel Range,
of fuel that have been used since Instantaneous Fuel Economy:
last reset. The fuel used can be Displays how fast the vehicle is
reset by pressing the SET/CLR moving in either kilometers per
button while the Fuel Used display hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
is showing. The speedometer cannot be reset.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Information Menu this display only allows for matching The Oil Life display must be reset
(OPTION) Items of the TPMS sensors. In this case, after each oil change. Do not reset
the display will show TIRE LEARN. the Oil Life display accidentally at
Press MENU on the turn signal See Tire Pressure Monitor System any time other than when the oil has
lever until the OPTION menu is on page 10-52 and Tire Pressure just been changed. It cannot be
displayed. Use w x to scroll Monitor Operation on page 10-53. reset accurately until the next oil
through the menu items. Not all change. To reset the engine oil life
Remaining Oil Life: Displays an
items are available on every vehicle. system, see Engine Oil Life System
estimate of the oil's remaining useful
The following is a list of all possible on page 10-15.
life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
menu items:
displayed, that means 99% of the Battery Voltage: Displays the
Units: Move w x to change current oil life remains. This display current battery voltage, if equipped.
between Metric or US when the Unit may be shown as : %. Battery voltage changes are normal
display is active. Press SET/CLR to while driving. See Charging System
When the remaining oil life is low, Light on page 5-13. If there is a
confirm the setting. On some
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON problem with the battery charging
models, you will have to select 1, 2,
message will appear on the display. system, the DIC will display a
or 3 for the Unit display. 1 is
See Engine Oil Messages on message. See Battery Voltage and
Imperial units, 2 is US units, and 3
page 5-29. The oil should be Charging Messages on page 5-27.
is metric units. This will change the
changed as soon as possible. See
displays on the cluster and DIC to Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level (Diesel
Engine Oil on page 10-11. In
the type of measurements you Engine Only): Displays the current
addition to the engine oil life system
select. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level.
monitoring the oil life, additional
Tire Pressure: May display a maintenance is recommended in the Remaining Fuel Filter (Diesel
vehicle with the approximate Maintenance Schedule in this Engine Only): Displays an
pressures of all four tires. Tire manual. See Maintenance Schedule estimate of the remaining fuel filter
pressure is displayed in either on page 11-2. life. If REMAINING FUEL FILTER
kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per 50% is displayed, that means 50%
square inch (psi). On some models, of the current fuel filter life remains.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
ECO Drive Assist Menu (ECO) When viewing best AFE, a several Economy Trend: Displays history
Items second press and hold of SET/CLR of the Average Fuel Economy from
will reset the best value. The best the last 50 km (30 miles). Each bar
This menu is only available on some value will show “- - -“ until the represents about 5 km (3 miles) of
vehicles. Press MENU on the turn selected distance has been driving. The fuel economy will range
signal lever until the ECO menu is traveled. from 0 – 15 L/100 km (0 – 50 mpg).
displayed. Use w x to scroll During driving the bars will shift to
The display provides feedback on
through the menu items. Not all always reflect the most recent
how current driving behavior in the
items are available on every vehicle. distance on the right side. This
bar graph affects the running
The following is a list of all possible display cannot be reset.
average in the left display and how
menu items:
well recent driving compares to the
Best Average Fuel Economy: The best that has been achieved.
right hand side displays the best
ECO Index: The bar graph on the
average fuel economy (AFE) that is
left hand side provides feedback on
achieved for a selected distance.
the efficiency of current driving
The left hand side displays a
behavior. The graph shows
running average of fuel economy for
a percentage value that is based on
the most recently traveled selected
current fuel consumption compared
distance. The center bar graph
to what is expected from the vehicle
displays the instantaneous fuel
with good and bad driving habits.
economy. Quickly press the SET/
Each box represents 10%, with all
CLR button to display a page for
boxes filled being 100%. More
selecting one of the distance
economical driving will result in
options. Move the up/down arrow to
being in the ECO box.
choose the selection, and SET/CLR
Instantaneous Fuel Economy is also
to change the setting.
shown on right hand side. This
display cannot be reset.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and Brake System Messages

Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages BRAKE FLUID LOW
indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message is displayed when the
some action that may be needed to
This message displays when the brake fluid level is low. See Brake
correct a condition. Multiple
vehicle has detected that the battery Fluid on page 10-27.
messages may display one after the
other. voltage is dropping beyond a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
reasonable point. The battery saver
The messages that do not require system starts reducing features of This message is displayed as a
immediate action can be the vehicle that may be noticed. At reminder that the parking brake is
acknowledged and cleared by the point that features are disabled, on. Release it before you attempt to
pressing SET/CLR. The messages this message displays. Turn off drive.
that require immediate action cannot unnecessary accessories to allow
be cleared until that action is the battery to recharge. Compass Messages
performed. All messages should be
taken seriously and clearing the LOW BATTERY CAL
messages does not correct the This message is displayed when the
This message is displayed when the
problem. compass needs to be calibrated.
battery voltage is low. See Battery
The following are some of the on page 10-28. See Compass on page 5-4.
vehicle messages that may be
displayed depending on your SERVICE BATTERY ––
vehicle content. CHARGING SYSTEM Two dashes will be displayed if the
This message is displayed when compass needs service. See your
there is a fault in the battery dealer for service.
charging system. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Cruise Control Messages TRUNK OPEN ENGINE OVERHEATED —

This message will display when the IDLE ENGINE
APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
trunk is open. Close the trunk This message displays when the
CRUISE completely. engine coolant temperature is too
If this message displays when hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
attempting to activate cruise control, Engine Cooling System idle until it cools down.
apply the brake pedal and try again.
Messages ENGINE OVERHEATED —
CRUISE SET TO XXX STOP ENGINE
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
This message displays when the ENGINE TEMP This message displays and a
cruise control is set and shows the continuous chime sounds if the
speed it was set to. See Cruise This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than engine cooling system reaches
Control on page 9-43. unsafe temperatures for operation.
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot Stop and turn off the vehicle as
Door Ajar Messages engine, the air conditioning soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
compressor automatically turns off. severe damage. This message
DOOR(S) OPEN clears when the engine has cooled
When the coolant temperature
A vehicle symbol will be displayed returns to normal, the air to a safe operating temperature.
on the DIC showing which door is conditioning compressor turns back
open along with this message. HIGH COOLANT
on. You can continue to drive the TEMPERATURE
Close the door completely. vehicle.
This message displays if the coolant
HOOD OPEN If this message continues to appear, temperature is hot. See Engine
This message will display when the have the system repaired by your Overheating on page 10-23.
hood is open. Close the hood dealer as soon as possible to avoid
completely. damage to the engine.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Engine Oil Messages Engine Power Messages TIGHTEN GAS CAP (Gas
Engine Only)
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the
This message displays when the This message displays when the fuel cap is not on tight on vehicles
engine oil needs to be changed. vehicle's engine power is reduced. with gasoline engines. Tighten the
When you change the engine oil, be Reduced engine power can affect fuel cap.
sure to reset the Oil Life System. the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
See Engine Oil Life System on If this message is on, but there is no WATER IN FUEL CONTACT
page 10-15 and Driver Information reduction in performance, proceed SERVICE
Center (DIC) on page 5-23 for to your destination. The This message displays when water
information on how to reset the performance may be reduced the level in the diesel fuel filter exceeds
system. See Engine Oil on next time the vehicle is driven. The a specified level. Residual water in
page 10-11 and Maintenance vehicle may be driven at a reduced the diesel fuel filter must be drained.
Schedule on page 11-2 for more speed while this message is on, but Water in Fuel (Diesel) on page 9-61.
information. maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP message stays on, the vehicle Diesel Exhaust Fluid
ENGINE should be taken to your dealer for Messages
This message displays if low oil service as soon as possible. For more information on these
pressure levels occur. Stop the messages, see “Exhaust Fluid Low”
vehicle as soon as safely possible Fuel System Messages or “Exhaust Fluid Quality Poor” in
and do not operate it until the cause Diesel Exhaust Fluid on page 9-27.
of the low oil pressure has been FUEL LEVEL LOW
corrected. Check the oil as soon as This message displays when the EXHAUST FLUID RANGE:
possible and have the vehicle vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as XXXX KM (MI)
serviced by your dealer. soon as possible. When the exhaust fluid is getting
low, the range will be displayed in
either kilometers or miles. It is
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
normal for the EXHAUST FLUID EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY DIESEL PARTIC (Particulate)
RANGE to vary based on vehicle POOR SEE OWNERS FILTER IS FULL CONTINUED
and environmental driving MANUAL NOW DRIVING MANDATORY
conditions. When this message first
displays at approximately 1 600 km This message displays when the This message may display when the
(1,000 mi) of fluid range remaining, exhaust fluid is of poor quality or the soot particles in the diesel
the fluid is approximately 11 L wrong fluid was added. This particulate filter reach a certain
(3 gal) low. message may be accompanied by amount. Continued driving is
other messages that provide more mandatory to prevent the filter from
EXHAUST FLUID LOW SPEED information. clogging. See Diesel Particulate
LIMITED SOON Filter on page 9-26 for more
When the exhaust fluid range is less Diesel Particulate Filter information.
than 120 km (75 mi) this message Messages
will be displayed. Key and Lock Messages
DIESEL PARTIC (Particulate)
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY FILTER IS FULL CONTINUE NO REMOTE DETECTED
REFILL NOW DRIVING This message displays when the
This message will be displayed transmitter battery is weak on
This message may display when the
when the exhaust fluid is empty. vehicles with Keyless Access. See
soot particles in the diesel
This message may be accompanied “Starting the Vehicle with a Low
particulate filter reach a certain
by other messages that provide Transmitter Battery” under Remote
amount. Continue driving to prevent
more information. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
the filter from clogging. See Diesel
Particulate Filter on page 9-26 for
more information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
PLACE TRANSMITTER IN Lamp Messages TURN SIGNAL ON

POCKET This message is displayed if the
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
This message displays when trying turn signal has been left on. Turn off
CONTROL ON the turn signal.
to start the vehicle if an RKE
transmitter is not detected. The This message is displayed when the
transmitter battery may be weak. automatic light control has been Object Detection System
See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 6-3.
Messages
Transmitter Battery” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System PARK ASSIST OFF
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF This message displays when the
REPLACE BATTERY IN park assist system has been turned
This message is displayed when the
REMOTE KEY off or when there is a temporary
automatic light control has been
condition causing the system to be
This message displays when the turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry System on page 6-3.
Assist on page 9-45.
(RKE) transmitter needs to be
replaced. See “Battery
XXX TURN INDICATOR SERVICE PARK ASSIST
Replacement” under Remote FAILURE
This message displays if there is a
Keyless Entry (RKE) System When one of the turn signals is out, problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
Operation on page 2-3. this message displays to show Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
which bulb needs to be replaced. not use this system to help you
See Bulb Replacement on park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
page 10-32 and Replacement Bulbs on page 9-45.
on page 10-37 for more information
on turn signal bulb replacement.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION Ride Control System Security Messages

SYSTEM Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED
If this message appears, the system
needs service. Take the vehicle to SERVICE TRACTION This message displays if the vehicle
your dealer. CONTROL detects a tamper condition.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction Service Vehicle Messages
This message indicates that the Control System (TCS). See Traction
driver has turned the system off.
CHANGE TIMING BELT
Control/Electronic Stability Control
on page 9-41. This message displays when
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM scheduled maintenance on the
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE STABILITRAK timing belt is required. See your
This message indicates that the This message displays if there is a dealer for service.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) problem with the StabiliTrak system. SERVICE POWER STEERING
system is disabled because the See Traction Control/Electronic
sensor is blocked and cannot detect Stability Control on page 9-41. This message displays if there is a
vehicles in the blind zone. The problem with the power steering
sensor may be blocked by mud, dirt, Airbag System Messages system. Take the vehicle to your
snow, ice, or slush. This message dealer for service.
may also activate during heavy rain SERVICE AIRBAG
or due to road spray. The vehicle
SERVICE STEERING
This message displays if there is a COLUMN LOCK
does not need service. For cleaning, problem with the airbag system.
see Exterior Care on page 10-88. Take the vehicle to your dealer for This message displays if there is a
service. problem with the steering column
lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Tire Messages The low tire pressure warning light
will also come on. See Tire
This message displays if there is a SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Pressure Light on page 5-19.
problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
SYSTEM If a tire pressure message displays,
This message displays if there is a inflate the tires until the tire pressure
Starting the Vehicle problem with the Tire Pressure is equal to the values shown on the
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire Tire and Loading Information label.
Messages Pressure Monitor Operation on See Tires on page 10-43, Vehicle
TURN STEERING WHEEL page 10-53 for more information. Load Limits on page 9-9, and Tire
START VEHICLE AGAIN Pressure on page 10-51.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when you try More than one tire pressure
This message displays when the message can be received at a time.
to start the vehicle, but the column system is learning new tires. See
remains locked. Try turning the To read the other messages that
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on may have been sent at the same
steering wheel while starting the page 10-53 for more information.
vehicle to unlock the steering time, press the SET/CLR button.
column. If the vehicle still does not TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD The DIC also shows the tire
start, turn the steering wheel the pressure values. See Driver
AIR TO TIRE
other way, and try starting the Information Center (DIC) on
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure page 5-23.
vehicle again.
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the Transmission Messages
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low. SERVICE TRANSMISSION
There is also an icon with the This message displays if there is a
warning that will indicate the problem with the transmission. See
location of the low tire. your dealer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE Vehicle Speed Messages vehicle speed will be limited to
ENGINE 88 km/h (55 mph) when the
For more information on these countdown is over.
This message displays and a chime messages, see Diesel Exhaust Fluid
sounds if the transmission fluid in on page 9-27. XXX KM (MI) UNTIL 7 KM/H
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the (4 MPH) MAX SPEED
transmission fluid temperature high XXX KM (MI) UNTIL 105 KM/H
can cause damage to the vehicle. (65 MPH) MAX SPEED This message will be displayed
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to along with other messages. These
This message will be displayed messages include EXHAUST FLUID
allow the transmission to cool. This along with other messages. These
message clears when the fluid EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST
messages include EXHAUST FLUID FLUID QUALITY POOR,
temperature reaches a safe level. EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST or SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID
FLUID QUALITY POOR, SERVICE SYSTEM. The vehicle speed will be
Vehicle Reminder EMISSION SYSTEM, or SERVICE limited to 7 km/h (4 mph) when the
Messages EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM. The countdown is over.
vehicle speed will be limited to
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE 105 km/h (65 mph) when the SPEED LIMITED TO 105 KM/H
WITH CARE countdown is over. (65 MPH)
This message displays when ice XXX KM (MI) UNTIL 88 KM/H This message will be displayed
conditions are possible. (55 MPH) MAX SPEED along with other messages. These
messages include EXHAUST FLUID
STEERING COLUMN IS This message will be displayed EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST
LOCKED along with other messages. These FLUID QUALITY POOR, SERVICE
This message displays when the messages include EXHAUST FLUID EMISSION SYSTEM, or SERVICE
steering column is locked. EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM. When
FLUID QUALITY POOR, SERVICE this message is displayed, the
EMISSION SYSTEM, or SERVICE vehicle speed is being limited to
EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM. The 105 km/h (65 mph).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
SPEED LIMITED TO 88 KM/H TRANSITIONING TO XX KM/H Vehicle

(55 MPH) (XX MPH) MAX SPEED
Personalization
This message will be displayed This message will be displayed
along with other messages. These along with other messages. These The audio system controls are used
messages include EXHAUST FLUID messages include EXHAUST FLUID to access the personalization
EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST menus for customizing vehicle
FLUID QUALITY POOR, SERVICE FLUID QUALITY POOR, SERVICE features.
EMISSION SYSTEM, or SERVICE EMISSION SYSTEM, or SERVICE CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM. When EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM. When access the Configuration
this message is displayed, the this message is displayed, the end Settings menu.
vehicle speed is being limited to of the countdown has been reached
88 km/h (55 mph). and the vehicle speed is being MENU/SEL: Press the center of
limited. this knob to enter the menus and
SPEED LIMITED TO 7 KM/H select menu items. Turn the knob to
(4 MPH) scroll through the menus.
This message will be displayed BACK: Press to exit or move
along with other messages. These backward in a menu.
messages include EXHAUST FLUID
Entering the Personalization
EMPTY REFILL NOW, EXHAUST
Menus
FLUID QUALITY POOR,
or SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID 1. Press CONFIG to access the
SYSTEM. When this message is Configuration Settings menu.
displayed, the vehicle speed is 2. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
being limited to 7 km/h (4 mph). highlight Vehicle Settings. Press
the CONFIG button until Vehicle
is highlighted on vehicles with a
navigation system only.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3. Press the center of the MENU/ Climate and Air Quality Air Quality Sensor
SEL knob to select the Vehicle Allows the selecting low or high
If equipped, select the Climate and
Settings menu. The ignition must sensitivity of the air quality sensor.
Air Quality menu and the following
be in ON/RUN. Only vehicles with the automatic
will be displayed:
The following list of menu items may climate control will have this option.
. Auto Fan Speed
be available: Press the MENU/SEL knob when
. Air Quality Sensor
. Climate and Air Quality Air Quality Sensor is highlighted to
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats open the menu. Turn the knob to
. Comfort and Convenience
. Auto Defog highlight High Sensitivity or Low
. Collision/Detection Systems Sensitivity. Press the BACK button
. Auto Rear Defog to confirm the selection and move
. Languages
Auto Fan Speed back to the last menu.
. Lighting
This feature sets the climate control Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
. Power Door Locks
fan speed to maintain the interior On vehicles with remote start and
. Remote Locking, Unlocking, temperature. heated seats, the heated seats can
Starting be set to on or off.
Press the MENU/SEL knob when
. Return to Factory Settings Auto Fan Speed is highlighted to Press the MENU/SEL knob when
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to open the menu. Turn the knob to Remote Start Auto Heat Seats is
highlight the menu. Press the knob highlight High, Medium, or Low. highlighted to open the menu. Turn
to select it. Each of the menus is Press the BACK button to confirm the knob to highlight On or Off.
detailed in the following information. the selection and move back to the Press the BACK button to confirm
last menu. the selection and move back to the
Vehicles with a navigation system
will display a check mark to indicate last menu.
this feature is on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Auto Defog See “Rear Window Defogger” under Collision/Detection Systems

When turned on and high humidity Climate Control Systems on
If equipped, select the Collision/
is detected, the climate control page 8-1.
Detection Systems menu and the
system may adjust to outside air Press the MENU/SEL knob when following may be displayed.
supply and turn on the air Auto Rear Defog is highlighted to . Park Assist
conditioner or the heater. The fan open the menu. Turn the knob to
speed may slightly increase to help highlight On or Off. Press the knob . Side Blind Zone Alert
prevent fogging. When high to confirm the selection and move
Park Assist
humidity is no longer detected, the back to the last menu.
system will return to its prior This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
operation. Comfort and Convenience Assist feature, to be turned on
Select the Comfort and or off.
Auto Defog is highlighted to open Convenience menu and Chime Press the MENU/SEL knob when
the menu. Turn the knob to highlight Volume will be displayed. Park Assist is highlighted. Turn the
On or Off. Press the BACK button to Chime Volume knob to select On or Off. Press the
confirm the selection and move knob to confirm and go back to the
back to the last menu. This allows the selection of the last menu.
chime volume level.
Auto Rear Defog Side Blind Zone Alert
When on, this feature turns on the Chime Volume is highlighted. Turn This allows the Side Blind Zone
rear defogger at vehicle start when the knob to select Normal or High. Alert feature to be turned on or off.
the interior temperature is cold and Press the BACK button to confirm Press the MENU/SEL knob when
fog is likely. The auto rear defog and go back to the last menu. Side Blind Zone Alert is highlighted.
function can be disabled by Turn the knob to select On or Off.
pressing 1. When off, the feature Press the knob to confirm and go
can be turned on by pressing 1. back to the last menu.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Languages 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. Press the Auto Door Unlock

BACK button to confirm and go This allows selection of which of the
Select the Language menu and the
back to the last menu. doors will automatically unlock when
following will be displayed:
Vehicle Locator Lights the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)
. English
with a automatic transmission or
. Francais This allows the vehicle locator lights when the key is removed from the
to be turned on or off. When on, the ignition with a manual transmission.
. Espanol headlamps, parking lamps,
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select taillamps, back-up lamps, and most Press the MENU/SEL knob when
the language. Press BACK to return of the interior lamps will flash when Auto Door Unlock is highlighted.
to the last menu. K is pressed. Turn the knob to select All Doors,
Driver Door, or Off. Press the knob
Lighting to confirm and go back to the
Vehicle Locator Lights is highlighted last menu.
Select the Lighting menu and the to open the menu. Turn the MENU/
following will be displayed: SEL knob to highlight On or Off. Delayed Door Lock
. Exit Lighting Press MENU/SEL to select On or When on, this feature will delay the
Off. Press the BACK button to locking of the doors until
. Vehicle Locator Lights confirm the selection and move five seconds after the last door is
Exit Lighting back to the last menu. closed. Three chimes signal
This allows the selection of how Power Door Locks delayed locking is in use. Press
long the exterior lamps stay on Select Power Door Locks and the either the power lock button or Q on
when leaving the vehicle when it is following will be displayed: the RKE transmitter twice to
dark outside. override the delayed locking feature
. Auto Door Unlock and immediately lock all of the
. Delayed Door Lock doors.
Exit Lighting is highlighted. Turn the
knob to select Off, 30 Seconds, . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Press the MENU/SEL knob when Remote Locking, Unlocking, Door Unlock or Remote Door
Delayed Door Lock is highlighted to Starting Unlock
select On or Off. Press BACK to This allows selection of which doors
return to the last menu. Select Remote Locking, Unlocking,
Starting and the following will be will unlock when pressing K on the
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out displayed (depending on the RKE transmitter.
When on, all doors will lock. The system):
driver door will then unlock if door . Remote Lock Feedback Door Unlock is highlighted. Turn the
locking is requested while the driver knob to select All Doors or Driver
. Door Unlock or Remote Door
door is open, and disable the Door Only. When set to Driver Door
Unlock
Delayed Door Lock feature. Only, the driver door will unlock the
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Even when this feature is off, the first time K is pressed and all doors
driver is protected from accidental . Passive Door Unlock will unlock when K is pressed a
lockouts when the key is in the . Passive Door Lock second time. When set to All Doors,
ignition. all of the doors will unlock at the first
Remote Lock Feedback
If Off is selected, the Unlocked Door press of K. Press the knob to
Anti Lock Out feature may be This allows selection of what type of confirm and go back to the
enabled through an additional menu feedback is given when locking the last menu.
selection. vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Press the MENU/SEL knob when Press the MENU/SEL knob when
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out is Remote Lock Feedback is If equipped, this allows selection of
highlighted to select On or Off. highlighted. Turn the knob to select what type of feedback is given when
Press BACK to return to the Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
last menu. Only, or Off. Press the knob to transmitter.
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Press the MENU/SEL knob when Return to Factory Settings

Remote Unlock Light Feedback is
Select Return to Factory Settings to
highlighted. Turn the knob to select
return all vehicle personalization to
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
the default settings. Turn the knob
and go back to the last menu.
to select Yes or No. Press the knob
Passive Door Unlock to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
This allows selection of which doors
are unlocked by pressing the button
on the outside door handle.
Passive Door Unlock is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select All Doors or
Driver Door. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Passive Door Lock
This allows passive locking to be
turned on or off and select what
type of feedback.
Passive Door Lock is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Off, On,
or On with Active Horn Chirp. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the

parking lamps including all lamps,
Exterior Lamp Controls except the headlamps.
Exterior Lighting 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 headlamps together with the parking
Headlamp High/Low-Beam lamps and instrument panel lights.
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 A warning chime sounds if the driver
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 door is opened when the ignition
Daytime Running switch is off and the headlamps
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 are on.
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 # (Front Fog Lamps):
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 If equipped, press to turn the lamps
Turn and Lane-Change on or off.
The exterior lamp control is to the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 See Front Fog Lamps on page 6-4.
left of the steering column on the
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel. When the lights are on, ; will be
Interior Lighting There are four positions: lit. See Lamps On Reminder on
Instrument Panel Illumination page 5-22.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to turn the automatic lamp control
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 off or on again.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
Lighting Features headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
parking lamps, taillamps, license
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6 plate lamps, instrument panel lights,
and sidemarker lamps.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6-2 Lighting
Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass When the DRL are on, only the
low-beam headlamps, at a reduced
Low-Beam Changer To flash the high beams, pull the level of brightness, will be on. The
turn signal lever all the way toward taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
you. Then release it. panel, and other lamps will not
be on.
Daytime Running The headlamps automatically
Lamps (DRL) change from DRL to the regular
DRL can make it easier for others to headlamps depending on the
see the front of your vehicle during darkness of the surroundings. The
the day. Fully functional DRL are other lamps that come on with the
3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam headlamps will also come on.
Changer): Push the turn signal required on all vehicles first sold in
lever away from you and release to Canada. When it is bright enough outside,
turn the high beams on. A light sensor on top of the the headlamps go off and the DRL
instrument panel makes the DRL come on.
To return to low beams, push the
lever again or pull it toward you and work, so be sure it is not covered. To turn the DRL off or on again, turn
release. The DRL system makes the the exterior lamp control to the off
low-beam headlamps come on at a position and then release. For
reduced brightness when the vehicles first sold in Canada, the
following conditions are met: DRL cannot be turned off.
. The ignition is in the ON/
RUN mode.
. The exterior lamp control is
This indicator light turns on in the in AUTO.
instrument cluster when the . The engine is running.
high-beam headlamps are on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Lighting 6-3
Automatic Headlamp Lights On with Wipers | (Hazard Warning Flasher):

System If the windshield wipers are Press and momentarily hold this
activated in daylight with the engine button on the center stack, to make
When it is dark enough outside and the front and rear turn signal lamps
on, and the exterior lamp control is
the exterior lamp control is in the flash on and off. This warns others
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
automatic position, the headlamps that you are having trouble. Press
lamps, and other exterior lamps
come on automatically. See Exterior and momentarily hold again to turn
come on. The transition time for the
Lamp Controls on page 6-1. the flashers off.
lamps coming on varies based on
wiper speed. When the wipers are
not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
Move the exterior lamp control to P Signals
or ; to disable this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The vehicle has a light sensor on

top of the instrument panel. Make
sure it is not covered, or the
headlamps will be on when they are
not needed. Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a An arrow on the instrument cluster
parking garage or tunnel. will flash in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6-4 Lighting
Raise or lower the lever until the For vehicles with front fog lamps, Interior Lighting
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane the button is on the outboard side of
change. The turn signal flashes the instrument panel.
three times. Instrument Panel
The ignition must be on to turn on
The lever returns to its starting the fog lamps.
Illumination Control
position when it is released. # (Front Fog Lamps): Press to
If after signaling a turn or lane turn the fog lamps on or off. An
change the arrow flashes rapidly or indicator light on the instrument
does not come on, a signal bulb cluster comes on when the fog
may be burned out. Replace any lamps are on.
burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not The fog lamps come on together
burned out, check the fuse. See with the parking lamps.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10-38. If the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
This feature controls the brightness
Front Fog Lamps If the high-beam headlamps are
of the instrument panel controls and
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
infotainment display screen. The
back on again.
thumbwheel is to the left of the
Some localities have laws that steering column on the instrument
require the headlamps to be on panel.
along with the fog lamps.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Move the
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to
brighten or dim the instrument panel
controls and infotainment display
screen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Lighting 6-5
Courtesy Lamps + (On): Press to turn on the dome Lighting Features

lamps.
The courtesy lamps come on
automatically when any door is Entry Lighting
opened and the dome lamp is in the Reading Lamps
The headlamps, parking lamps,
door position. taillamps, back-up lamps, and most
of the interior lamps turn on briefly
Dome Lamps at night or in areas of limited lighting
when K is pressed on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
After about 30 seconds the exterior
lamps turn off, and then the dome
and remaining interior lamps will dim
to off. Entry lighting can be disabled
The reading lamps are in the manually by changing the ignition
overhead console. out of the OFF position, or by
m or n (Reading Lamps): Press pressing the RKE transmitter Q
The dome lamp controls are in the the button near each lamp to turn it button.
headliner. on or off. This feature can be changed. See
* (Dome Lamp Override): Press “Vehicle Locator Lights” under
to turn the lamps off, even when a Vehicle Personalization on
door is open. page 5-35.
I (Door): Press to turn the lamps

on automatically when a door is
opened.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6-6 Lighting
Exit Lighting Battery Power Protection

The headlamps, taillamps, parking The battery saver feature is
lamps, back-up lamps, and license designed to protect the vehicle's
plate lamps come on at night, or in battery.
areas with limited lighting, when the If some interior lamps are left on
key is removed from the ignition. and the ignition is turned off, the
The dome lamps also come on battery rundown protection system
when the key is removed from the automatically turns the lamp off after
ignition. The exterior lamps and some time.
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
If equipped with Keyless Access,
the exterior lamps and dome lamps
automatically turn on when the
driver door is opened after the
ignition is turned off. See Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9-14 or Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9-16.
The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-35.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Introduction
System Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Infotainment
Phone Read the following pages to
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-18 become familiar with the audio
Introduction Bluetooth (Infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 system's features.
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Bluetooth (Voice
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 { Warning
Trademarks and License Taking your eyes off the road for
Radio extended periods could cause a
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Agreements
Trademarks and License crash resulting in injury or death
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 to you or others. Do not give
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13 extended attention to infotainment
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 tasks while driving.
This system provides access to

many audio and non-audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker The vehicle may have a base radio,
adjustments, and preset radio which is included in this manual.
stations. See the infotainment manual for
For more information, see Defensive information on the connective radio
Driving on page 9-3. and the navigation system, audio
players, phone, and voice
{ Caution recognition. There is also
information on settings and
Contact your dealer before adding downloadable applications (if
any equipment. equipped).
Adding audio or communication Theft-Deterrent Feature

equipment could interfere with the
operation of the engine, radio, The theft-deterrent feature works by
or other systems, and could learning a portion of the Vehicle
damage them. Follow federal Identification Number (VIN) to the
rules covering mobile radio and infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
telephone equipment.
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
different vehicle.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-23.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Overview 1. O (Power/Volume)
. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
2. Buttons 1–6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
3. g (Previous/Reverse)
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
4. k (Play/Pause)
. CD: Pauses playback, and
stops playback.
5. l (Next/Fast Forward)
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
6. CLOCK 12. CD Slot

. Press to select menu
items.
. Opens the clock menu. . Insert a CD.
. Radio: Manually selects
7. INFO (Information) 13. CONFIG (Configure) radio stations.
. Radio: Shows available . Opens the settings menu. . CD: Selects tracks.
information about the
current station. 14. 5 \ > (Phone/Mute) 18. Y (Eject)
. CD: Shows available
. Opens the phone . Removes a disc from the
information about the main menu. CD slot.
current track. . Mutes the audio system.
8. TONE 15. FAV (Favorite Pages) Operation
. Opens the tone menu. . Radio: Opens the Controls
9. AS (Autostore) favorites list. The infotainment system is operated
. Radio: Opens the autostore 16. BACK by using the pushbuttons,
stations list. multifunction knobs, menus shown
. Menu: Moves one
on the display, and steering wheel
10. BAND level back.
controls, if equipped.
. . Character Input: Deletes
Changes the band while
the last character. Turning the System On or Off
listening to the radio.
. Selects the radio when 17. MENU/SEL O (Volume/Power): Press to turn
the system on and off.
listening to a different . Turn to open menus,
audio source. highlight menu items,
11. CD/AUX or set numeric values
while in a menu.
. Selects the CD player or
an external audio source.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Automatic Switch-Off
. Confirm a set value. Submenus
If the infotainment system has been
. Turn a system setting on or off. An arrow on the right-hand edge of
turned on after the ignition is turned Turn to: the menu indicates that it has a
off, the system will turn off submenu with other options.
automatically after 10 minutes.
. Highlight a menu option.
Activating a Setting
. Select a value.
Volume Control
BACK: Press to:
O (Volume/Power): Turn to adjust
the volume. . Exit a menu.
5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press to . Return from a submenu screen
mute the infotainment system. Press to the previous menu screen.
5 / > again, or turn the O knob to . Delete the last character in a
cancel mute. sequence. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Menu System Selecting a Menu Option highlight the setting.
The menu system appears on the 2. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
display screen. activate the setting.
Controls Setting a Value

The MENU/SEL knob and the BACK
button are used to navigate the
menu system.
MENU/SEL Knob: Press to: 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
move the highlighted bar.
. Enter the menu system.
. Select or activate the highlighted select the highlighted option.
menu option.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
change the current value of the highlight the character. and Bass
setting. 2. Press the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Press the TONE button.
2. Press the MENU/SEL knob to select the character. 2. Select Treble, Midrange,
confirm the setting. Press the BACK button to delete the or Bass.
Turning a Function On or Off last character in the sequence or 3. Select the value.
press and hold to delete the entire
character sequence. Press the BACK button to go back
to the Tone Settings menu.
Audio Settings
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio 1. Press the TONE button.
player source. 2. Select Fader or Balance.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to To quickly reset an audio setting 3. Select the value.
highlight the function. value to 0:
Press the BACK button to go back
2. Press the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Press the TONE button. to the Tone Settings menu.
turn the function on or off.
2. Select the audio setting. Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
Entering a Character Sequence 3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL If equipped with an equalizer:
knob until the value changes
to 0. 1. Press the TONE button.
Press the BACK button to go back 2. Select EQ presets.
to the Tone Settings menu. 3. Select the setting.
Press the BACK button to go back
to the Tone Settings menu.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
System Settings 2. Select Radio Settings. Radio

Configuring the Number of 3. Select Auto Volume.
Favorite Pages 4. Select the setting. AM-FM Radio
To configure the number of available 5. Press the BACK button to go Control Buttons
favorite pages: back to the System
The buttons used to control the
1. Press the CONFIG button. Configuration menu.
radio are:
2. Select Radio Settings. Maximum Startup Volume BAND: Press to turn the radio on
3. Select Radio Favorites. The maximum volume played when and choose between AM, FM, and
the radio is first turned on can SiriusXM®, if equipped.
4. Select the number of available
be set. MENU/SEL: Turn to navigate the
favorite pages.
1. Press the CONFIG button. available menus and to search for
5. Press the BACK button to go
2. Select Radio Settings. stations.
back to the System
Configuration menu. 3. Select Maximum Startup INFO: Press to display additional
Volume. information that may be available for
Auto Volume the current song.
The auto volume feature 4. Select the setting.
g or l : Press to search for
automatically adjusts the radio 5. Press the BACK button to go stations.
volume to compensate for road and back to the System
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up Configuration menu. FAV: Press to open the favorites
or slows down, so that the volume list and select the favorites page.
level is consistent. 1 to 6: Press to select preset
The level of volume compensation stations.
can be selected, or the auto volume AS (Autostore): Press to open the
feature can be turned off. autostore list.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
RDS (Radio Data System) Selecting a Station Station Lists

The radio may have RDS. The RDS Seek Tuning 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
feature is available for use only on 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
FM stations that broadcast RDS If the radio station is not known:
receivable stations in the current
information. This feature only works Briefly press g or l to reception area are displayed. If a
when the information from the radio automatically search for the next station list has not been created,
station is available. In rare cases, a available station. If a station is not an automatic station search
radio station could broadcast found, the radio switches to a more is done.
incorrect information that causes the sensitive search level. If a station
radio features to work improperly. 3. Select the station.
still is not found, the frequency that
If this happens, contact the radio was last active begins to play. Category Lists
station.
If the radio station is known: Most stations that broadcast an
While the radio is tuned to an RDS program type code specify the
FM-RDS station, the station name Press and hold g or l until the type of programming transmitted.
or call letters display. station on the display is reached, Some stations change the program
then release the button. type code depending on the
Radio Menus
Manual Tuning content. The system stores the RDS
Radio menus are available for AM stations sorted by program type in
and FM. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select the FM category list.
the frequency on the display.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to open To search for a programming type
the main radio menu for that band. Favorites List determined by station:
Selecting a Band 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
Press the BAND button to choose 2. Select Favorites List. 2. Select FM category list. A list of
AM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped. 3. Select the station. all programming types available
The last station that was playing displays.
starts playing again.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3. Select the programming type. Up to six stations can be stored in 2. Press and hold AS until a beep
A list of stations that transmit each favorite page and the number sounds. SEARCH displays on
programming of the selected of available favorite pages can the radio, followed by the
type displays. be set. number of stations found.
4. Select the station. Storing Stations 3. The radio will automatically store
The category lists are updated when the 12 strongest stations found
To store the station to a position in as autostore presets.
the station lists are updated. the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. 4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to
Updating Station & Category Lists autostore stations on the other
If stations stored in the station list Retrieving Stations radio band.
can no longer be received: Press the FAV button to open a Press the AS button to alternate
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. favorite page or to switch to another between the autostore pages 1 and
favorite page. Briefly press one of 2 of the selected radio band.
2. Select Update AM or FM Station the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
List, if the stations stored in the station. AS displays on the radio when using
station list are no longer autostore presets.
received. A station search will be Autostore Stations
Autostore does not delete
completed and the first station in AS (Autostore): Autostore previously stored favorite stations.
the updated list will play. searches and stores 12 FM and
Autostore does not function with
To cancel the station search, press 12 AM stations with the strongest
SiriusXM radio stations.
the MENU/SEL knob. signal on two pages with six
stations stored on each page. To
Storing a Station as a Favorite use autostore: Satellite Radio
Stations from all bands can be 1. Press BAND to select FM or AM. Vehicles with a SiriusXM® Satellite
stored in any order in the favorite Radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
pages. Satellite Radio subscription can
receive SiriusXM programming.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
SiriusXM Satellite Radio g or l : Press to go to the Removing or Adding Categories

Service previous or next channel. Channels in a category that have
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service FAV: Press to open the been removed can still be accessed
based in the 48 contiguous United favorites list. by using g or l , or the MENU/
States and 10 Canadian provinces. 1 to 6: Press to select a favorite. SEL knob.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide
MENU/SEL: Turn to select a To add or remove categories:
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to channel. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
coast, and in digital-quality sound. INFO: Press to display additional 2. Select Radio Settings.
A service fee is required to receive information that may be available
the SiriusXM service. If SiriusXM 3. Select XM Categories.
about the current song.
service needs to be reactivated, the 4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
radio will display "No Subscription k (Play/Pause): Press to pause
highlight the category.
Please Renew" on channel XM1. time shifted content, if equipped.
For more information, contact 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
Selecting the XM Band remove or add the category.
SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or
1-866-635-2349 in the U.S., Press the BAND button to choose
Selecting a SiriusXM Channel
or www.xmradio.ca or between the AM, FM, and XM
1-877-209-0079 in Canada. bands. The last channel played in SiriusXM channels can be selected
that band begins to play when that by using g, l , the MENU/SEL
Control Buttons band is selected. knob, or the Menu system.
The buttons used to control the SiriusXM Categories
SiriusXM radio are: Selecting a Channel Using g
BAND: Press to turn the radio on
SiriusXM channels are organized in or l
categories.
and choose between AM, FM, . Press and release g or l to
and XM. go to the previous or next
channel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
. Press and hold g or l to Storing a SiriusXM Channel as XM Messages

scroll through the previous or a Favorite XL (Explicit Language
next channel until the channel is
Channels from all bands can be Channels): These channels, or any
reached.
stored in any order in the favorite others, can be blocked by request,
Selecting a Channel Using the pages. by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.),
MENU/SEL Knob and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Up to six channels can be stored in
To select a SiriusXM channel using each favorite page and the number XM Updating: The encryption code
the MENU/SEL knob: of available favorite pages can in the receiver is being updated. No
be set. action is required. This process
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
should take no longer than
highlight a SiriusXM channel. The Storing a Channel as a Favorite 30 seconds.
channel is selected after a short
delay. To store the channel to a position in Loading XM: The audio system is
the list, press and hold the acquiring and processing audio and
To select a channel using the corresponding 1 to 6 button until the text data. No action is needed. This
MENU/SEL knob: channel can be heard again. message should disappear shortly.
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob and Retrieving Channels Channel Off Air: This channel is
select Channel List.
Press the FAV button to open a not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Select the desired channel. favorite page or to change to another channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the another favorite page. Briefly press Channel Unauth: This channel is
Menu System one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve blocked or cannot be received with
the channel. your SiriusXM Subscription
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
package.
2. Select XM Category List.
Channel Unavailable: This
3. Select the category. previously assigned channel is no
4. Select the channel. longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
No Artist Info: The system is No XM Signal: The system is XM Not Available: If this message
working properly. No artist working properly. The vehicle may does not clear within a short period
information is available at this time be in a location where the SiriusXM of time, the receiver could have a
on this channel. signal is being blocked. When the fault. See your dealer.
No Title Info: The system is vehicle is moved into an open area,
working properly. No song title the signal should return. Radio Reception
information is available at this time CAT Not Found: The system is Frequency interference and static
on this channel. working properly. There are no can occur during normal radio
No CAT Info: The system is channels available for the selected reception if items such as phone
working properly. No category category. chargers, vehicle convenience
information is available at this time XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, accessories, and external electronic
on this channel. this message alternates with the devices are plugged into the
SiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio ID accessory power outlet. If there is
No Information: The system is interference or static, unplug the
working properly. No text or label. This label is needed to
activate the service. item from the accessory power
informational messages are outlet.
available at this time on this Unknown: If this message is
channel. received when tuned to channel 0, FM
No Subscription Please Renew: there could be a receiver fault. See
FM signals only reach about 16 to
SiriusXM subscription needs to be your dealer.
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at Check Antenna: If this message radio has a built-in electronic circuit
www.siriusxm.com or call does not clear within a short period that automatically works to reduce
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) and of time, the receiver could have a interference, some static can occur,
www.xmradio.ca or call fault. See your dealer. especially around tall buildings or
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
AM Cell Phone Usage Multi-Band Antenna

The range for most AM stations is Cell phone usage, such as making The multi-band antenna is on the
greater than for FM, especially at or receiving phone calls, charging, roof of the vehicle. The antenna is
night. The longer range can cause or just having the phone on may used for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,
station frequencies to interfere with cause static interference in the the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
each other. Static can also occur radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off System, and GPS (Global
when things like storms and power if this happens. Positioning System), if the vehicle
lines interfere with radio reception. has these features. Keep the
When this happens, try reducing the Satellite Radio Antenna antenna clear of obstructions for
treble on the radio. clear reception.
The SiriusXM Satellite Radio
SiriusXM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
Service vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of performance of the features listed
obstructions for clear radio above may be affected if the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service reception. sunroof is open.
provides digital radio reception. Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
satellite radio signals, causing the performance of the XM system may
sound to fade in and out. In be affected if the sunroof is open.
addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the
SiriusXM signal for a period of time.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe Caution (Continued)
the disc from the center to the
CD Player outer edge. load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
The CD player can play audio CDs Care of the CD Player
and MP3 CDs. free of foreign materials, liquids,
Do not add a label to a disc, as it and debris.
The CD player will not play could get caught in the CD player.
8 cm (3 in) CDs. If a label is needed, label the top of Control Buttons
Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
marking pen. The buttons used to control the CD
Sound quality can be reduced due player are:
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the CD/AUX: Press to use the CD
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage player.
Handle discs carefully and store the CD player. l or g : Press to select tracks or
them in their original cases or other to fast forward or rewind within a
protective cases away from direct { Caution track.
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
If a label is added to a CD, more INFO: Press to display additional
surface of a disc is damaged, the
information about the current track
disc may not play properly or at all. than one CD is inserted into the
that may be available.
Do not touch the bottom surface of slot at a time, or an attempt is
a disc while handling it; this could made to play scratched or MENU/SEL: Turn to enter
damage the surface. Pick up discs damaged CDs, the CD player the menu.
by grasping the outer edges or the could be damaged. While using Y: Press to eject the disc.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the CD player, use only CDs in
If the bottom surface of a disc is good condition without any label,
dirty, take a soft lint-free cloth, (Continued)
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Inserting a CD Using the CD Menu: Searching for MP3 Tracks

With the printed side facing up, 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. The search feature may take some
insert a disc into the CD slot until it 2. Select Tracks list. time to display the information after
is drawn in. reading the disc due to the amount
3. Select the track. of information stored on the disc.
Removing a CD FM automatically plays while the
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press Y. disc is being read.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob and then
set Shuffle Songs to On. Tracks can be searched by:
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot. . Playlists
Fast Forward and Rewind
If the disc is not removed after it is . Artists
ejected, it is pulled back in after a Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind within the current
. Albums
few seconds.
track. . Song Titles
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Selecting an MP3 Track . Genres
Press the CD/AUX button if there is
Using the control buttons: . Folder View
a disc in the player; it begins
playing. . Press g or l to select the To search for tracks:
Information about the disc and previous or next track. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
current track is shown on the Using the CD Menu: 2. Select Search.
display depending on the data
stored. 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
2. Select Playlists/Folders. Song Titles, Genres,
Selecting a CD Track or Folder View.
Using the control buttons: 3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
4. Select the track.
. Press g or l to select the
previous or next track.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Auxiliary Devices USB Port Searching for a Track

If equipped, the AUX inputs are in For vehicles with a USB port, the Tracks that are found can be
the center console and allow following devices may be connected searched for by:
portable devices to connect to the and controlled by the infotainment . Playlists
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) system.
. Artists
auxiliary jack or USB port. . iPods
. Albums
Portable devices are controlled by . PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs)
using the menu system described in . Song Titles
. USB Drives
. Podcasts
. Zunes®
3.5 mm Jack . Genres
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to and Zunes are compatible with the
. Audio Books
the auxiliary input jack to use a infotainment system. Devices are
portable audio player.
. Composers
also charged while plugged into the
Playback of an audio device that is USB port. To search for tracks:
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
only be controlled using the controls Connecting and Controlling
an iPod 2. Select Search.
on the device.
Not all iPods can be controlled by 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Adjusting the Volume Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
the infotainment system.
Turn the O knob to adjust the Audio Books, or Composers.
Connecting an iPod
volume of the infotainment system 4. Select the track.
after the volume level has been set Connect the iPod to the USB port.
on the portable audio device.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Shuffle Searching for a Track Off: Plays current tracks in

Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set Tracks can be searched for by: sequential order.
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or . Playlists Repeat Functionality
Off, then press the BACK button to
return to the main screen. . Artists Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set
Repeat to On or Off.
On: Plays tracks in the current . Albums
folder in random order. Repeat On: Repeats the current
. Song Titles track.
Off: Plays tracks in the current . Podcasts
folder in sequential order. Repeat Off: Starts playback from
. Genres the beginning of the current track
Repeat after the last track finishes.
To search for tracks:
Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set Connecting and Controlling a
Repeat to On or Off, then press the 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
USB Drive
BACK button to return to the main 2. Select Search.
screen. The infotainment system can only
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, play back .mp3 and .wma files from
On: Repeats the current track. Song Titles, Podcasts, a USB drive.
Off: Starts playback from the or Genres.
Only the first 10,000 songs are
beginning of the current track after 4. Select the track. recognized on the device.
the last track finishes.
Shuffle Functionality When a device is not supported, the
Connecting and Controlling a Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set message “No supported data found.
PlaysForSure Device (PFD) Shuffle Songs (Random) to On You can safely disconnect the
or Zune or Off. device” appears.
Connecting a PFD or Zune On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the PFD or Zune to the order. Connect the USB drive to the
USB port. USB port.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Searching for a Track 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Phone

It is normal for the search feature to Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
take some time to display the Bluetooth (Overview)
information after reading the device 4. Select the track.
due to the amount of information For vehicles equipped with
stored. Shuffle Functionality Bluetooth capability, the system can
Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set interact with many cell phones,
Files that do not have any meta allowing:
data stored in the ID3 tag display as Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
Unknown. or Off. . Placement and receipt of calls in
On: Plays current tracks in random a hands-free mode.
Tracks can be searched for by:
order. . Sharing of the cell phone’s
. Playlists* address book or contact list with
Off: Plays current tracks in
. Artists sequential order. the vehicle.
. Albums Repeat Functionality To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
. Song Titles Turn the MENU/SEL knob and set parked:
. Genres Repeat to On or Off. . Become familiar with the
. Folder View Repeat On: Repeats the current features of the cell phone.
track. Organize the phone book and
*This only displays if a playlist is
found on the device. Repeat Off: Starts playback from contact lists clearly and delete
the beginning of the current track duplicate or rarely used entries.
To search for tracks: after the last track finishes. If possible, program speed dial
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. or other shortcuts.
2. Select Search.
. Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. make and receive phone calls. The Infotainment System Controls
The system may not work with infotainment system and voice
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in If equipped, the infotainment system
recognition are used to control the allows certain controls to be
this section. system. The system can be used selected on the infotainment display.
. If the cell phone has voice while in ON/RUN or ACC/ See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.
dialing capability, learn to use ACCESSORY. The range of the
that feature to access the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to
address book or contact list. See (30 ft). Not all phones support all navigate the menu system using the
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this functions and not all phones work infotainment controls. See
section. with the Bluetooth system. See Operation on page 7-4.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more 5 \ > (Phone/Mute): Press to
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone information about compatible
Numbers” in this section. enter the Phone main menu. Press
phones. to mute the audio system.
{ Warning Bluetooth Controls Voice Recognition
Use the buttons located on the The voice recognition system uses
When using a cell phone, it can infotainment system and the
be distracting to look too long or commands to control the system
steering wheel to operate the and dial phone numbers.
too often at the screen of the Bluetooth system.
phone or the infotainment system. Noise: The system may not
Taking your eyes off the road too Steering Wheel Controls recognize voice commands if there
long or too often could cause a b / g (Push To Talk): Press to is too much background noise.
crash resulting in injury or death. answer incoming calls, confirm When to Speak: A tone sounds to
Focus your attention on driving. system information, and start voice indicate that the system is ready for
recognition. a voice command. Wait for the tone
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to and then speak.
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to operation. calm and natural voice.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Audio System your cell phone manufacturer's user

. If multiple paired cell phones are
guide for Bluetooth functions before within range of the system, the
When using the Bluetooth system, system connects to the first
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
sound comes through the vehicle's available paired cell phone in the
phone is not connected, calls will be
front audio system speakers and order that they were first paired
made using OnStar Hands-Free
overrides the audio system. Use the to the system. To link to a
Calling, if available. See Operation
VOL/ O knob during a call to on page 7-4. different paired phone, see
change the volume level. The “Linking to a Different Phone”
adjusted volume level remains in Pairing Information later in this section.
memory for later calls. The system . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 Pairing a Phone
maintains a minimum volume level. capability cannot be paired to
the vehicle as a phone and an 1. Press the CONFIG button.
Other Information
MP3 player at the same time. 2. Select Phone Settings.
See Radio Frequency Statement on . Up to five cell phones can be 3. Select Bluetooth.
page 13-15.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
Bluetooth (Infotainment . The pairing process is disabled A four-digit Personal
when the vehicle is moving. Identification Number (PIN)
Controls)
. Pairing only needs to be appears on the display. The PIN
For information about how to completed once, unless the is used in Step 6.
navigate the menu system using the pairing information on the cell
infotainment controls, see Operation 5. Start the pairing process on the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone to be paired to the
on page 7-4. is deleted from the system. vehicle. See the cell phone
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can manufacturer's user guide for
be connected to the Bluetooth information on this process.
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time. 6. Locate the device named “Your
system and then connected to the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
vehicle before it can be used. See phone. Follow the instructions
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
on the cell phone to enter the 4. Select Device List. Making a Call Using
PIN provided in Step 4. After the 5. Select the phone to delete and Phone Book
PIN is successfully entered, the follow the on screen prompts.
system prompts you to provide a For cell phones that support the
name for the paired cell phone. Linking to a Different Phone phone book feature, the Bluetooth
This name will be used to system can use the contacts stored
To link to a different phone, the new on your cell phone to make calls.
indicate which phones are phone must be in the vehicle and
paired and connected to the See your cell phone phone
available to be connected to the manufacturer's user guide or
vehicle. The system responds Bluetooth system before the
with “<Phone name> has been contact your wireless provider to
process is started. find out if this feature is supported
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete. 1. Press the CONFIG button. by your phone.
7. Repeat Steps 1–6 to pair 2. Select Phone Settings. When a cell phone supports the
additional phones. phone book feature, the Phone
3. Select Bluetooth. Book and Call Lists menus are
Listing All Paired and Connected 4. Select Device List. automatically available.
Phones
5. Select the new phone to link to The Phone Book menu allows you
1. Press the CONFIG button. and follow the on screen to access the phone book stored in
2. Select Phone Settings. prompts. the cell phone to make a call.
3. Select Bluetooth. If delete is selected, the The Call Lists menu allows you to
highlighted phone will be access the phone numbers from the
4. Select Device List. deleted. Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Deleting a Paired Phone Missed Calls menus on your cell
phone to make a call.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
To make a call using the Phone Making a Call Call Waiting

Book menu:
To make a call: Call waiting must be supported on
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice the wireless service carrier to work.
(depending on the radio).
(depending on the radio).
2. Select Phone Book. Accepting a Call
2. Enter the character sequence.
3. Search through the list by See “Entering a Character Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
selecting the letter group the Sequence” in Operation on “Answer” and press the MENU/SEL
phone book entry begins with, page 7-4. knob to accept the call.
or press the MENU/SEL knob to
3. Select Call to start dialing the Declining a Call
scroll through the entire list of
number. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
names/numbers in the
phone book. Accepting or Declining a Call “Decline” and press the MENU/SEL
knob to decline the call.
4. Select the name or number you When an incoming call is received,
want to call. the infotainment system mutes and Switching Between Calls (Call
To make a call using the Call a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Waiting Calls Only)
Lists menu: Accepting a Call To switch between calls:
1. Press 5 \ > once or twice Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn or press the MENU/
(depending on the radio). “Answer” and press the MENU/SEL SEL knob.
2. Select Call Lists. knob to accept the call. 2. Select Switch Call from
Declining a Call the menu.
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Outgoing Calls, or Missed Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Calls list. “Decline” and press the MENU/SEL
4. Select the name or number you knob to decline the call.
want to call.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Conference Calling Ending a Call Bluetooth (Voice

Conference calling and three-way Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob Recognition)
calling must be supported on the and select Hang Up.
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Using Voice Recognition
wireless service carrier to work. Muting a Call
To use voice recognition, press the
To start a conference while in a To Mute a Call b / g button on the steering wheel.
current call: Use the commands below for the
Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob
various voice features. For
1. Turn or press the MENU/ and select Mute Call.
additional information, say “Help”
SEL knob. To Cancel Mute while you are in a voice
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob recognition menu.
3. Enter the character sequence and select Mute Call. Pairing
then select Call. See “Entering a
Character Sequence” in Dual Tone Multi-Frequency A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
Operation on page 7-4. (DTMF) Tones must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the
4. After the call has been placed, The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
vehicle before it can be used. See
turn or press the MENU/SEL send numbers during a call. This is
your cell phone manufacturer's user
knob and choose Merge Calls. used when calling a menu-driven guide for Bluetooth functions before
phone system.
5. To add more callers to the pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
conference call, repeat 1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL phone is not connected, calls will be
Steps 1–4. The number of knob and select Enter Number. made using OnStar Hands-Free
callers that can be added is 2. Enter the character sequence. Calling, if available. See Operation
limited by your wireless service See “Entering a Character on page 7-4.
carrier. Sequence” in Operation on
page 7-4.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone This name will be used to

indicate which phones are
A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
.
capability cannot be paired to paired and connected to the

responds “Ready,” followed by vehicle. The system responds
the vehicle as a phone and an a tone.
MP3 player at the same time. with “<Phone name> has been
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command successfully paired” after the
. Up to five cell phones can be can be skipped. pairing process is complete.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds 6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair
. The pairing process is disabled with instructions and a four-digit additional phones.
when the vehicle is moving. Personal Identification Number Listing All Paired and Connected
. Pairing only needs to be (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. Phones
completed once, unless the 4. Start the pairing process on the
pairing information on the cell The system can list all cell phones
cell phone that you want to pair. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
phone changes or the cell phone For help with this process, see
is deleted from the system. also connected to the vehicle, the
your cell phone manufacturer's system responds with “is connected”
. Only one paired cell phone can user guide. after that phone name.
be connected to the Bluetooth 5. Locate the device named “Your
system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. Press b / g. The system
. If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions responds “Ready,” followed by
within range of the system, the on the cell phone to enter the a tone.
system connects to the first PIN provided in Step 3. After the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
available paired cell phone in the PIN is successfully entered, the
system prompts you to provide a 3. Say “List.”
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a name for the paired cell phone.
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.” Delete: This command is used to

If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.” delete individual name tags.
delete is unknown, see “Listing All . If another cell phone is Delete All Name Tags: This
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands-Free Calling
1. Press b / g. The system “<Phone name> is now
Directory and the Destinations
responds “Ready,” followed by connected.”
Directory.
a tone. . If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone Using the “Store” Command
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
remains connected. 1. Press b / g. The system
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone responds “Ready,” followed by
Numbers a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete. The system can store up to 2. Say “Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags in 3. Say the phone number or group
Connecting to a Different Phone
the Hands-Free Directory that is of numbers you want to store all
To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and at once with no pauses, then
the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems. follow the directions given by the
next available cell phone in the system to save a name tag for
The following commands are used
order in which all available cell this number.
to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store a Using the “Digit Store” Command
connect to, you may have to use phone number, or a group of If an unwanted number is
this command several times. numbers as a name tag. recognized by the system, say
Digit Store: This command allows “Clear” at any time to clear the last
1. Press b / g. The system
a phone number to be stored as a number.
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Making a Call
recognized by the system, say Command
Calls can be made using the
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored following commands.
1. Press b / g. The system name tags in the Hands Free
Dial or Call: The dial or call
responds “Ready,” followed by Calling Directory and the
command can be used
a tone. Destinations Directory.
interchangeably to dial a phone
2. Say “Digit Store.” To delete all name tags: number or a stored name tag.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 1. Press b / g. The system Digit Dial: This command allows a
that you want to store. After responds “Ready,” followed by phone number to be dialed by
each digit is entered, the system a tone. entering the digits one at a time.
repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” Re-dial: This command is used to
followed by a tone. After the last dial the last number used on the cell
digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers phone.
“Store,” and then follow the
The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
directions given by the system to
numbers and name tags. Command
save a name tag for this number.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press b / g. The system
Using the “Delete” Command
1. Press b / g. The system responds “Ready,” followed by
1. Press b / g. The system a tone.
a tone. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
a tone.
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without
2. Say “Delete.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.” pausing or say the name tag.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete. 4. Say “List.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Calling 911 Emergency 2. Say “Digit Dial.” Receiving a Call

1. Press b / g. The system 3. Say each digit, one at a time, When an incoming call is received,
responds “Ready,” followed by that you want to dial. After each the audio system mutes and a ring
a tone. digit is entered, the system tone is heard in the vehicle.
repeats back the digit it heard
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” followed by a tone. After the last
. Press b / g to answer the call.
3. Say “911.” digit has been entered, . Press $ / i to ignore a call.
say “Dial.”
4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Once connected, the person called Call Waiting
Using the “Digit Dial” Command will be heard through the audio Call waiting must be supported on
The digit dial command allows a speakers. the cell phone and enabled by the
phone number to be dialed by Using the “Re-dial” Command wireless service carrier.
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the 1. Press b / g. The system
. Press b / g to answer an
system repeats back the digit it responds “Ready,” followed by incoming call when another call
heard followed by a tone. a tone. is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
If an unwanted number is 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
recognized by the system, say system dials the last number . Press b / g again to return to
“Clear” at any time to clear the last called from the connected cell the original call.
number. phone. . To ignore the incoming call, no
To hear all of the numbers Once connected, the person called action is required.
recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
“Verify” at any time. speakers.
. Press $ / i to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
1. Press b / g. The system on hold.
a tone.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Three-Way Calling To cancel mute, press b / g , and does not transfer to the vehicle, use
then say “Un-mute Call.” the audio transfer feature on the cell
Three-way calling must be
phone. See your cell phone
supported on the cell phone and Transferring a Call manufacturer's user guide for more
enabled by the wireless service
Audio can be transferred between information.
carrier.
the Bluetooth system and the cell Voice Pass-Thru
1. While on a call, press b / g. phone.
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
2. Say “Three-way call.” The cell phone must be paired and voice recognition commands on the
3. Use the dial or call command to connected with the Bluetooth cell phone. See your cell phone
dial the number of the third party system before a call can be manufacturer's user guide to see if
to be called. transferred. The connection process the cell phone supports this feature.
can take up to two minutes after the
4. Once the call is connected, ignition is turned to ON/RUN. To access contacts stored in the cell
press b / g to link all callers phone:
together. To Transfer Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone 1. Press b / g. The system
Ending a Call responds “Ready,” followed by
During a call with the audio in the a tone.
Press $ / i to end a call. vehicle:
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
Muting a Call 1. Press b / g. can be skipped.
During a call, all sounds from inside 2. Say “Transfer Call.” 3. Say “Voice.” The system
the vehicle can be muted so that the To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth responds “OK, accessing
person on the other end of the call System from a Cell Phone <phone name>.”
cannot hear them. The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the
To mute a call, press b / g , and messages will go through their cycle
cell phone, press b / g. The audio according to the phone's operating
then say “Mute Call.” transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System Trademarks and

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
License Agreements
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This The Bluetooth® word mark and
name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
menu-driven phone system. information. For information on how by General Motors is under license.
Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the Other trademarks and trade names
stored for use. previous sections on “Deleting a are those of their respective owners.
Paired Phone” and “Deleting
Sending a Number or Name Tag Name Tags.”
During a Call
1. Press b / g. The system
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
Manufactured under license under
3. Say the number or name tag U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
to send. 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks and DTS
Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
an “XL” preceding the channel

name. Channel blocking is available
for SiriusXM Satellite Radio
receivers by notifying SiriusXM at:
. USA Customers — See
www.siriusxm.com or call
Manufactured under license from Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, 1-866-635-2349.
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the taxes, one time activation fee, and . Canadian Customers — See
double-D symbol are trademarks of other fees may apply. Subscription
www.xmradio.ca or call
Dolby Laboratories. fee is consumer only. All fees and
1-877-209-0079.
programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
Agreement available at disassemble, reverse engineer,
www.siriusxm.com. XM® service hack, manipulate, or otherwise
only available in the 48 contiguous make available any technology or
United States and Canada*. software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the SiriusXM®
*Canada — Some deterioration of
Satellite Radio System or that
service may occur in extreme
“Made for iPod and iPhone” means support the SiriusXM website, the
northern latitudes. This is beyond
that an electronic accessory has Online Service or any of its content.
the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
been designed to connect Furthermore, the AMBER voice
Radio. Explicit Language
specifically to iPod and has been compression software included in
Notice — Channels with frequent
certified by the developer to meet this product is protected by
explicit language are indicated with
Apple performance standards. intellectual property rights including
iPod is a trademark of Apple patent rights, copyrights, and trade
Computer, Inc., registered in the secrets of Digital Voice
U.S. and other countries. Systems, Inc.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
General Requirements: content delivery. For more Regarding the use of Gracenote
1. A License Agreement from information, visit Music Recognition Service, when
SiriusXM® is required for any www.gracenote.com. this product is used, it is necessary
product that incorporates CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music to agree to the following articles.
SiriusXM Technology and/or for and video-related data from Gracenote® End User License
use of any of the SiriusXM Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to
marks to be manufactured, present Gracenote. One or more This application or device contains
distributed or marketed in the patents owned by Gracenote apply software from Gracenote, Inc. of
SiriusXM Service Area. to this product and service. See the Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
Gracenote website for a The software from Gracenote (the
2. For products to be distributed, “Gracenote Software”) enables this
marketed and/or sold in Canada, non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote and application to perform disc and/or
a separate agreement is file identification and obtain
required with Canadian Satellite CDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, the
Gracenote logo and logotype, and music-related information, including
Radio Inc. (operating as XM name, artist, track, and title
Canada). the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
are either registered trademarks or information (“Gracenote Data”) from
trademarks of Gracenote in the online servers or embedded
United States and/or other databases (collectively, “Gracenote
countries. Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote
If you require more information Data only by means of the intended
regarding the use of the Gracenote End-User functions of this
Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/ application or device. You agree that
corporate. you will use Gracenote Data, the
Music and video recognition
For the data provided by Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
technology and related data are
Gracenote® Music Recognition Servers for your own personal
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote
Service, the content is not non-commercial use only. You agree
is the industry standard in music
necessarily guaranteed 100%. not to assign, copy, transfer or
recognition technology and related
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
transmit the Gracenote Software or Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its No warranty is made that the
any Gracenote Data to any third rights under this Agreement against Gracenote Software or Gracenote
party. you directly in its own name. Servers are error-free or that
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR The Gracenote service uses a functioning of Gracenote Software
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE unique identifier to track queries for or Gracenote Servers will be
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR statistical purposes. uninterrupted.
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT The purpose of a randomly Gracenote is not obligated to
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED assigned numeric identifier is to provide you with new enhanced or
HEREIN. You agree that your allow the Gracenote service to additional data types or categories
non-exclusive license to use the count queries without knowing that Gracenote may provide in the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote anything about who you are. For future and is free to discontinue its
Software, and Gracenote Servers more information, see the web page services at any time.
will terminate if you violate these for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for Gracenote disclaims all warranties
restrictions. If your license the Gracenote service. express or implied, including, but
terminates, you agree to cease any not limited to, implied warranties of
and all use of the Gracenote Data, The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed merchantability, fitness for a
the Gracenote Software, and particular purpose, title, and
Gracenote Servers. to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
representations or warranties, non-infringement. Gracenote does
Gracenote reserves all rights in express or implied, regarding the not warrant the results that will be
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote accuracy of any Gracenote Data obtained by your use of the
Software, and the Gracenote from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote software or any
Servers, including all ownership Gracenote server. In no case will
rights. Gracenote reserves the right to Gracenote be liable for any
delete data from the Gracenote consequential or incidental
Under no circumstances will Servers or to change data
Gracenote become liable for any damages or for any lost profits or
categories for any cause that lost revenues.
payment to you for any information Gracenote deems sufficient.
that you provide. You agree that
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 6. Driver and Passenger Heated

Seats (If Equipped)
Systems 7. Rear Window Defogger
Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, defrosting, and 8. Defog
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 ventilation for the vehicle can be
Automatic Climate Control controlled with these systems. 9. Defrost
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Vehicles with Air Conditioning
Vehicles without Air Conditioning
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
1. Temperature Control 1. Temperature Control

2. Bi-level Air Mode 2. Bi-level Air Mode
3. Floor Air Mode 3. Floor Air Mode
4. Vent Air Mode 4. Vent Air Mode
5. Fan Control 5. Fan Control
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
8-2 Climate Controls
6. Driver and Passenger Heated W (Defog): Clears the windows of It helps to quickly cool the air inside
Seats (If Equipped) fog or moisture. Air is directed to the the vehicle or prevent outside air
7. Rear Window Defogger windshield and floor outlets. and odors from entering.
8. Recirculation 0 (Defrost): Clears the To improve fuel efficiency and to

windshield of fog or frost more cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
9. Defog quickly. Air is directed to the may be automatically selected in
10. Air Conditioning windshield and side window outlets. warm weather. The recirculation
For best results, clear all snow and light will not come on. Press h to
11. Defrost
ice from the windshield before select recirculation; press it again to
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase
defrosting. select outside air.
or decrease the fan speed.
Do not drive the vehicle until all Rear Window Defogger
Temperature Control: Turn to
windows are clear. 1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
increase or decrease the
temperature. Air Conditioning the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off
Air Delivery Mode Control: To # (Air Conditioning, If after about 10 minutes. It can also
change the current mode, press one Equipped): Press to turn the air be turned off by turning the ignition
of the following: conditioning on or off. If the fan is to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
F (Vent): Air is directed to the turned off or the outside OFF. If turned on again it runs for
instrument panel outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the about five minutes before
air conditioning compressor will turning off.
* (Bi-level): Air is directed to the not work.
instrument panel outlets and the Do not drive the vehicle until all
floor outlets. h (Recirculation, If Equipped): windows are clear.
Press to turn on the recirculation.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the An indicator light comes on. Air is If equipped with heated outside
floor outlets. recirculated inside the vehicle. rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
on and help to clear fog or frost from Automatic Operation

the surface of the mirrors. See The system automatically controls
Heated Mirrors on page 2-19. the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation in
{ Caution order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear When the indicator light is on, the
window. Do not adhere anything system is in full automatic operation.
to the defogger grid lines in the If the air delivery mode or fan
rear glass. These actions may setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
damage the rear defogger.
will show the selected settings.
Repairs would not be covered by 1. Temperature Control
the vehicle warranty. To place the system in automatic
2. Rear Window Defogger
mode do the following:
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press 1. Press AUTO.
to turn the heated seats on or off. 4. Defrost
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
See Heated Front Seats on 5. Fan Control system time to stabilize. Then
page 3-5 adjust the temperature as
6. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats needed for best comfort.
Automatic Climate To improve fuel efficiency and to
7. Power
Control System cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
8. Recirculation may be automatically selected in
The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled 9. MODE (Air Delivery Mode) warm weather. The recirculation
with this system. 10. AQS (Air Quality Sensor) light will not come on. Press h to
select recirculation; press it again to
11. Air Conditioning select outside air.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
English units can be changed to \ (Bi-level): Air is divided automatically to cool the air inside
metric units through the Driver between the instrument panel the vehicle or to dry the air needed
Information Center (DIC). See outlets and the floor outlets. to defog the windshield faster.
Vehicle Personalization on h (Recirculation):
page 5-35. C (Tri-Level): Air is divided Press to turn
between the windshield, instrument on recirculation. An indicator light
Manual Operation panel, and floor outlets. comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
O (Power): Press to turn the [ (Floor): Air is directed to the or prevent outside air and odors
climate control system on or off. floor outlets. from entering.
Fan Control: Turn the knob - (Defog): Clears the windows of Automatic Air Recirculation:
clockwise or counterclockwise to fog or moisture. Air is directed to the When the AUTO indicator light is
increase or decrease the fan speed. windshield and floor outlets. on, the air is automatically
The selected fan speed is indicated
by a number on the display screen.
0 (Defrost): Clears the recirculated as needed to help
windshield of fog or frost more quickly cool the inside of the
Press AUTO to return to automatic vehicle.
quickly. Air is directed to the
operation.
windshield. AQS (Air Quality Sensor): If the
MODE (Air Delivery Mode): Press
to change the direction of the
# (Air Conditioning): Press to vehicle is equipped with an air
turn the automatic air conditioning quality sensor, the climate control
airflow. The current mode appears system adjusts to limit some
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
in the display screen. Automatic exhaust fumes from being pulled
the outside temperature falls below
operation is canceled and manual inside your vehicle.
freezing, the air conditioning
mode is initiated. Press AUTO to
compressor will not run. Press the AQS button on the
return to automatic operation.
Press AUTO to return to automatic climate control to activate the air
To change the current mode, select quality sensor. The air quality
operation and the air conditioner
one of the following: sensor will not maintain recirculation
runs as needed. When the indicator
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the light is on, the air conditioner runs for an extended period to prevent
instrument panel outlets. the air inside the vehicle from
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
becoming too dry or stuffy. To adjust The rear window defogger turns off
the sensitivity of the Air Quality automatically after about { Caution
Control, see “Climate and Air 10 minutes. If turned on again it
Quality” under Vehicle runs for about five minutes before Do not try to clear frost or other
Personalization on page 5-35. turning off. material from the inside of the
front windshield and rear window
Auto Defog: The climate control The rear window defogger can be with a razor blade or anything
system may have a sensor to set to automatic operation. See else that is sharp. This may
automatically detect high humidity “Climate and Air Quality” under damage the rear window
inside the vehicle. When high Vehicle Personalization on
defogger grid and affect the
humidity is detected, the climate page 5-35. When Auto Rear Defog
radio's ability to pick up stations
control system may adjust to is selected, the rear window
outside air supply and turn on the defogger turns on automatically clearly. The repairs would not be
air conditioner. If the climate control when the interior temperature is cold covered by the vehicle warranty.
system does not detect possible and the outside temperature is
window fogging, it returns to normal about 40°F and below. The auto Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or rear defogger turns off automatically to turn the heated seats on or off.
on, see “Climate and Air Quality” after about 10 minutes. At higher See Heated Front Seats on
under Vehicle Personalization on speeds, the rear window defogger page 3-5.
page 5-35. may stay on continuously.
Remote Start Climate Control
Rear Window Defogger If equipped with heated outside Operation: If the vehicle is
rearview mirrors, they turn on when equipped with the remote vehicle
= (Rear Window Defogger): the rear window defogger button is start feature, the climate control
Press to turn the rear window on and help to clear fog or frost from system may run when the vehicle is
defogger on or off. the surface of the mirrors. See started remotely. The system uses
Heated Mirrors on page 2-19. the driver’s previous settings to heat
or cool the inside of the vehicle. The
rear defog may come on during
remote start based on cold ambient
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
conditions. The rear defog indicator Air Vents Additional air vents are located
light does not come on during a beneath the windshield, driver and
remote start. If the vehicle has front Adjustable air vents are in the passenger side door windows, and
heated seats, they may come on center and on the side of the in the footwells. These are fixed and
during a remote start. The heated instrument panel. cannot be adjusted.
seat indicator lights do not come on
during a remote start. See Remote Operation Tips
Vehicle Start on page 2-10 and . Clear away any ice, snow,
Heated Front Seats on page 3-5. or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
Sensors block the flow of air into the
The solar sensor, on top of the vehicle.
instrument panel near the . Keep the path under the front
windshield, monitors the solar heat. seats clear of objects to help
The climate control system uses the circulate the air inside of the
sensor information to adjust the vehicle more effectively.
temperature, fan speed, . Use of non-GM approved hood
recirculation, and air delivery mode deflectors can adversely affect
for best comfort. Move the slats (1) to change the the performance of the system.
If the sensor is covered, the direction of the airflow. Check with your dealer before
automatic climate control system Use the thumbwheels (2) near the adding equipment to the outside
may not work properly. air vents to open or close off the of the vehicle.
airflow.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Maintenance Service
All vehicles have a label underhood
Passenger Compartment that identifies the refrigerant used in
Air Filter the vehicle. The refrigerant system
should only be serviced by trained
The filter removes dust, pollen, and and certified technicians. The air
other airborne irritants from outside conditioning evaporator should
air that is pulled into the vehicle. never be repaired or replaced by
The filter should be replaced as part one from a salvage vehicle.
of routine scheduled maintenance. It should only be replaced by a new
See Maintenance Schedule on evaporator to ensure proper and
page 11-2. safe operation.
See your dealer regarding During service, all refrigerants
replacement of the filter. should be reclaimed with proper
equipment. Venting refrigerants
directly to the atmosphere is harmful
to the environment and may also
create unsafe conditions based on
inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
or other health-based concerns.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
9-23
9-24
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Cruise Control

Parking over Things Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Driving Information
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Driver Assistance Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-45
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Side Blind Zone
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . 9-26 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Rear Vision
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Running the Vehicle While Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Fuel
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-33 Recommended Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-53
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Manual Transmission California Fuel
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-37 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-53
Starting and Operating Brakes Fuel Additives (Gasoline) . . . . 9-54
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Antilock Brake Fuel for Diesel Engines . . . . . . 9-54
Ignition Positions (Keyless System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 What Fuel to Use in Canada
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 and Mexico (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 9-59
Ignition Positions (Key Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Cold Weather Operation
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Water in Fuel (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 9-61
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
9-2 Driving and Operating
Running Out of Fuel

. Designate a front seat
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 distractions.
Filling a Portable Fuel Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
General Towing
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Driving Characteristics and activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy governments have enacted laws driving.
Model or Diesel Engine) . . . . 9-67 regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Trailer Towing (Except Fuel familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
Economy Model or Diesel your area.
to the floor.
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Conversions and Add-Ons . Keep pets in an appropriate
Add-On Electrical . Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system and the navigation system, time. Actually doing it is
if equipped, including pairing and { Warning reaction time.
using a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-8. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering wheel is turned until it Steering in Emergencies
vehicle is being driven, brake reaches the end of its travel, and is . There are some situations when
normally but do not pump the held in that position for an extended
steering around a problem may
brakes. Doing so could make the period of time, power steering assist
be more effective than braking.
pedal harder to push down. If the may be reduced.
engine stops, there will be some . Holding both sides of the
If the steering assist is used for an
power brake assist but it will be steering wheel allows you to turn
extended period of time, power
used when the brake is applied. 180 degrees without removing
assist may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it a hand.
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering . Antilock Brake System (ABS)
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
allows steering while braking.
system cools down.
Steering See specific vehicle steering Off-Road Recovery
messages under Vehicle Messages
Electric Power Steering on page 5-27.
The vehicle has electric power
steering, it does not have power Curve Tips
steering fluid. Regular maintenance . Take curves at a reasonable
is not required. speed.
If power steering assist is lost due . Reduce speed before entering a
to a system malfunction, the vehicle curve.
can be steered, but may require . Maintain a reasonable steady
increased effort. See your dealer if
speed through the curve.
there is a problem.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The vehicle's right wheels can drop

. Steering or Cornering material on the road. Learn to
off the edge of a road onto the Skid — too much speed or recognize warning clues — such
shoulder while driving. Follow steering in a curve causes tires as enough water, ice, or packed
these tips: to slip and lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Acceleration Skid — too much mirrored surface — and slow
then, if there is nothing in the throttle causes the driving down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it wheels to spin. . Try to avoid sudden steering,
straddles the edge of the Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
pavement. by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the skids are always possible. the tires to slide.
pavement edge. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
3. Turn the steering wheel to go these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
straight down the roadway. . Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Driving on Wet Roads
Loss of Control way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your
Skidding Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate.
There are three types of skids that occurs. Always drive slower in these types
correspond to the vehicle's three . Slow down and adjust your of driving conditions and avoid
control systems: driving according to weather driving through large puddles and
. conditions. Stopping distance deep‐standing or flowing water.
Braking Skid — wheels are not
rolling. can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
{ Warning Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis
Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under the vehicle's
They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to
quick stop and could cause water. This can happen if the road is your surroundings while driving.
pulling to one side. You could wet enough and you are going fast If you become tired or sleepy, find a
lose control of the vehicle. enough. When the vehicle is safe place to park the vehicle
hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
After driving through a large contact with the road. Other driving tips include:
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake There is no hard and fast rule about . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
pedal until the brakes work . Keep the interior
slow down when the road is wet.
normally. temperature cool.
Flowing or rushing water creates Other Rainy Weather Tips . Keep your eyes moving — scan
strong forces. Driving through Besides slowing down, other wet the road ahead and to the sides.
flowing water could cause the weather driving tips include: . Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle to be carried away. If this . Allow extra following distance. vehicle instruments often.
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
. Pass with caution.
ignore police warnings and be
Hill and Mountain Roads
. Keep windshield wiping
very cautious about trying to drive equipment in good shape. Driving on steep hills or through
through flowing water. mountains is different than driving
. Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include:
. Have good tires with proper . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
page 10-43.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Check all fluid levels and brakes, Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
tires, cooling system, and Warning (Continued) (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
transmission. fall, resulting in even less traction.
loss of steering. Always have the Avoid driving on wet ice or in
. Shift to a lower gear when going
engine running and the vehicle freezing rain until roads can be
down steep or long hills.
in gear. treated with salt or sand.
{ Warning . Stay in your own lane. Do not
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
Using the brakes to slow the swing wide or cut across the traction is not lost. Accelerating too
vehicle on a long downhill slope center of the road. Drive at quickly causes the wheels to spin
can cause brake overheating, can speeds that let you stay in your and makes the surface under the
reduce brake performance, and own lane. tires slick, so there is even less
could result in a loss of braking. . Be alert on top of hills; traction.
Shift the transmission to a lower something could be in your lane Try not to break the fragile traction.
gear to let the engine assist the (stalled car, accident). If you accelerate too fast, the drive
brakes on a steep downhill slope. . Pay attention to special road wheels will spin and polish the
signs (falling rocks area, winding surface under the tires even more.
roads, long grades, passing or Traction Control should be turned
{ Warning no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
on. See Traction Control/Electronic
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
or with the ignition off is Winter Driving improves vehicle stability during
dangerous. This can cause hard stops on slippery roads, but
overheating of the brakes and
Driving on Snow or Ice
apply the brakes sooner than when
(Continued) Drive carefully when there is snow on dry pavement. See Antilock
or ice between the tires and the Brake System (ABS) on page 9-39.
road, creating less traction or grip.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Allow greater following distance on

any slippery road and watch for { Warning Warning (Continued)
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
shaded areas. The surface of a under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
curve or an overpass can remain icy cause exhaust gases to get panel.
when the surrounding roads are inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control
clear. Avoid sudden steering carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
maneuvers and braking while cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
on ice. cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems” in
the Index.
Blizzard Conditions . Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, For more information about
Being stuck in snow can be a especially any that is blocking carbon monoxide, see Engine
serious situation. Stay with the the exhaust pipe. Exhaust on page 9-26.
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use Roadside
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does To save fuel, run the engine for only
Assistance. See Roadside
not collect there. short periods as needed to warm
Assistance Program on page 13-5.
the vehicle and then shut the engine
To get help and keep everyone in . Open a window about 5 cm off and close the window most of
the vehicle safe: (2 in) on the side of the the way to save heat. Repeat this
. Turn on the hazard warning vehicle that is away from the until help arrives but only when you
flashers. wind to bring in fresh air. feel really uncomfortable from the
. Tie a red cloth to an outside (Continued) cold. Moving about to keep warm
mirror. also helps.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If it takes some time for help to Slowly spinning the wheels in the
arrive, now and then when you run Warning (Continued) forward and reverse directions
the engine, push the accelerator causes a rocking motion that could
pedal slightly so the engine runs vehicle can overheat, causing an free the vehicle. If that does not get
faster than the idle speed. This engine compartment fire or other the vehicle out after a few tries, it
keeps the battery charged to restart damage. Spin the wheels as little might need to be towed out. If the
the vehicle and to signal for help as possible and avoid going vehicle does need to be towed out,
with the headlamps. Do this as little above 56 km/h (35 mph). see Towing the Vehicle on
as possible to save fuel. page 10-85.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
If the Vehicle Is Stuck it Out Vehicle Load Limits
Slowly and cautiously spin the Turn the steering wheel left and It is very important to know how
wheels to free the vehicle when right to clear the area around the much weight the vehicle can
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. front wheels. Turn off any traction carry. This weight is called the
If stuck too severely for the traction system. Shift back and forth vehicle capacity weight and
system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a low includes the weight of all
traction system off and use the forward gear, spinning the wheels occupants, cargo, and all
rocking method. See Traction as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options.
Control/Electronic Stability Control transmission wear, wait until the
Two labels on the vehicle show
on page 9-41. wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator how much weight it may
properly carry: the Tire and
{ Warning pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal Loading Information label and
If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear. the Certification label.
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Tire and Loading Information positions (1), and the maximum

{ Warning Label vehicle capacity weight (2) in
Do not load the vehicle any kilograms and pounds.
heavier than the Gross The Tire and Loading
Vehicle Weight Rating Information label also shows the
(GVWR), or either the tire size of the original
maximum front or rear Gross equipment tires (3) and the
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). recommended cold tire inflation
This can cause systems to pressures (4). For more
break and change the way the information on tires and inflation
vehicle handles. This could see Tires on page 10-43 and
cause loss of control and a Tire Pressure on page 10-51.
crash. Overloading can also There is also important loading
shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example information on the Certification
A vehicle-specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
attached to the vehicle center and the Gross Axle Weight
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver Rating (GAWR) for the front and
door open, you will find the label rear axle; see “Certification
attached below the door lock Label” later in this section.
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
“Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity is information on towing a trailer,
Load Limit– 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) towing safety rules, and
1. Locate the statement "The = 650 lbs.) trailering tips.
combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
in your vehicle. a trailer, load from your trailer
3. Subtract the combined will be transferred to your
weight of the driver and vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this Example 1
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. reduces the available cargo 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
and luggage load capacity of Example 1 = 453 kg
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.” (1,000 lbs).
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing (Fuel 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
For example, if the "XXX" Economy Model or Diesel 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
amount equals 1400 lbs. and Engine) on page 9-67 or Trailer (300 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb Towing (Except Fuel Economy
3. Available Occupant and
passengers in your vehicle, Model or Diesel Engine) on
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
the amount of available cargo page 9-67 for important
(700 lbs).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = label, found on the vehicle
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and the gross weight capacity of the
Loading Information label for vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
specific information about the Weight Rating (GVWR). The
vehicle's capacity weight and GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
and cargo. Never exceed the If you put things inside the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle — like suitcases, Warning (Continued)
Gross Axle Weight Rating tools, packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
(GAWR) for either the front or else — they will go as fast as things, like suitcases,
rear axle. the vehicle goes. If you have to inside the vehicle so that
And, if you do have a heavy stop or turn quickly, or if there is some of them are above
load, you should spread it out. a crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this { Warning . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
section. Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
strike and injure people in a
{ Warning sudden stop or turn, or in a
. Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
This can cause systems to evenly.
break and change the way the (Continued)
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Starting and Caution (Continued)

The transmitter must be in the
vehicle for the system to operate.
Operating breaking-in guideline every
If the pushbutton start is not
working, the vehicle may be near a
time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the Keyless Access
Following break-in, engine speed system. See Remote Keyless Entry
{ Caution and load can be gradually (RKE) System Operation on
The vehicle does not need an increased. page 2-3.
elaborate break-in. But it will To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle
perform better in the long run if Ignition Positions must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
you follow these guidelines: ON/RUN and the brake pedal must
(Keyless Access) be applied.
. Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow, Stopping the Engine/OFF (No
for the first 805 km (500 mi). Indicator Lights): When the
Do not make full-throttle vehicle is stopped, press the
starts. Avoid downshifting to ENGINE START/STOP button once
brake or slow the vehicle. to turn the engine off.
. Avoid making hard stops for If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
the first 322 km (200 mi) or The vehicle may be equipped with ignition will turn off, and Retained
so. During this time the new an electronic keyless ignition with Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
brake linings are not yet pushbutton start. active. See Retained Accessory
broken in. Hard stops with Power (RAP) on page 9-23.
new linings can mean Pressing the button cycles it through
three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY, If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
premature wear and earlier ignition will return to ACC/
replacement. Follow this ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the
Engine/OFF. ACCESSORY and the Driver
(Continued) Information Center (DIC) will display
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
the message SHIFT TO PARK in 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift With the ignition off, pressing the
the Driver Information Center (DIC). to P (Park) with an automatic button one time without the brake
See Transmission Messages on transmission, or Neutral with a pedal applied will place the ignition
page 5-33. When the vehicle is manual transmission. Turn the system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
shifted into P (Park), the ignition ignition to LOCK/OFF. The ignition will switch from ACC/
system will switch to OFF. 4. Set the parking brake. See ACCESSORY to OFF after
Do not turn the engine off when the Parking Brake on page 9-40. five minutes to prevent battery
vehicle is moving. This will cause a rundown.
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
{ Warning ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator
Light): This mode is for driving and
the airbags. Turning off the vehicle while starting. With the ignition off, and
If the vehicle must be shut off in an moving may cause loss of power the brake pedal applied, pressing
emergency: assist in the brake and steering the button once will place the
systems and disable the airbags. ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the
pressure. Do not pump the Once engine cranking begins,
vehicle off in an emergency. release the button. Engine cranking
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring will continue until the engine starts.
increased brake pedal force. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, See Starting the Engine on
and must be shut off while driving, page 9-18. The ignition will then
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). remain in ON/RUN.
This can be done while the press and hold the ENGINE START/
vehicle is moving. After shifting STOP button for longer than Service Only Mode
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the two seconds, or press twice in
five seconds. This power mode is available for
brakes and steer the vehicle to a service and diagnostics, and to
safe location. ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber verify the proper operation of the
Indicator Light): This mode allows malfunction indicator lamp as may
you to use some electrical be required for emission inspection
accessories when the engine is off. purposes. With the vehicle off, and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
the brake pedal not applied, The ignition switch has four different This is the only position from which
pressing and holding the button for positions. the key can be removed. This locks
more than five seconds will place the steering wheel, ignition, and
the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The instruments and audio systems
{ Caution automatic transmission.
The ignition switch can bind in the
will operate as they do in ON/RUN, Using a tool to force the key to LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
but the vehicle will not be able to be turn in the ignition could cause turned off center. If this happens,
driven. The engine will not start in damage to the switch or break the move the steering wheel from right
Service Only Mode. Press the key. Use the correct key, make to left while turning the key to ACC/
button again to turn the vehicle off. sure it is all the way in, and turn it ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
only with your hand. If the key then the vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions (Key cannot be turned by hand, see
Do not turn the engine off when the
Access) your dealer. vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
The key must be fully extended to and steering systems and disable
start the vehicle. the airbags.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the If the vehicle must be shut off in an
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the emergency:
brake pedal. 1. Brake using a firm and steady
1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ pressure. Do not pump the
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, brakes repeatedly. This may
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/ deplete power assist, requiring
OFF to turn the engine off. Retained increased brake pedal force.
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain 2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. This
active. See Retained Accessory can be done while the vehicle is
Power (RAP) on page 9-23. moving. After shifting to Neutral,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
continue to firmly apply the 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This The battery could be drained if the
brakes and steer the vehicle to a position provides power to some of key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
safe location. the electrical accessories. It unlocks or ON/RUN position with the engine
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift the steering wheel and ignition. To off. The vehicle might not start if the
to P (Park) with an automatic move the key from ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an
transmission, or Neutral with a ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push extended period of time.
manual transmission. Turn the in the key and then turn it to 4 (START): This position starts the
ignition to LOCK/OFF. LOCK/OFF. engine. When the engine starts,
4. Set the parking brake. See 3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switch release the key. The ignition switch
Parking Brake on page 9-40. stays in this position when the will return to ON/RUN for normal
engine is running. This position can driving.
be used to operate the electrical
{ Warning accessories, including the
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened if the ignition
ventilation fan and 12-volt power is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
Turning off the vehicle while
outlet, as well as to display some key is in the ignition.
moving may cause loss of power warning and indicator lights. This
assist in the brake and steering position can also be used for If the ignition becomes difficult to
systems and disable the airbags. service and diagnostics, and to turn, see Keys on page 2-1.
While driving, only shut the verify the proper operation of the
vehicle off in an emergency. malfunction indicator lamp as may
be required for emission inspection
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, purposes. The transmission is also
and must be shut off while driving, unlocked in this position on
turn the ignition to ACC/ automatic transmission vehicles.
ACCESSORY.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Key Lock Release low voltage, try charging or jump Automatic Transmission
starting the battery. See Jump Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
Starting on page 10-82. N (Neutral). The engine will not start
If charging or jump starting the in any other position. To restart the
battery does not work, locate the vehicle when it is already moving,
hole below the ignition lock. Insert a use N (Neutral) only.
flat bladed tool or another key from
the key chain into the opening.
When the lever can be felt, actuate
{ Caution
the lever toward the driver, and Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
remove the key from the ignition. vehicle is moving. If you do, you
could damage the transmission.
Starting the Engine Shift to P (Park) only when the
Place the transmission in the vehicle is stopped.
Vehicles with an automatic proper gear.
transmission are equipped with an
Manual Transmission
electronic key lock release system.
The key lock release is designed to { Caution The shift lever should be in Neutral
prevent ignition key removal unless and the parking brake engaged.
If you add electrical parts or
the shift lever is in P (Park). Hold the clutch pedal down to the
accessories, you could change floor and start the engine. The
The key lock release is always the way the engine operates. Any vehicle will not start if the clutch
functional except in the case of an resulting damage would not be pedal is not all the way down.
uncharged or low voltage (less than covered by the vehicle warranty.
9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has an See Add-On Electrical Equipment
uncharged battery or a battery with on page 9-69.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Gasoline Engine Starting prevents cranking if the engine least 15 seconds between each
Procedure (Key Access) is already running. Engine try, to allow the cranking motor
1. With your foot off the accelerator cranking can be stopped by to cool. When the engine starts,
pedal, turn the ignition key to turning the ignition switch to let go of the key and accelerator.
START. When the engine starts, ACC/ACCESSORY or If the vehicle starts briefly but
let go of the key. The idle speed LOCK/OFF. then stops again, repeat the
will go down as the engine procedure. This clears the extra
warms. Do not race the engine { Caution gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
immediately after starting it.
Allow the oil to warm up and Cranking the engine for long after starting it. Operate the
lubricate all moving parts. periods of time, by returning the engine and transmission gently
ignition to the START position until the oil warms up and
The vehicle has a immediately after cranking has lubricates all moving parts.
Computer-Controlled Cranking
ended, can overheat and damage Gasoline Engine Starting
System. This feature assists in
the cranking motor, and drain the Procedure (Keyless Access)
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
1. If the vehicle has the Keyless
turned to the START position, between each try, to let the
Access system, the transmitter
and then released when the cranking motor cool down.
must be in the vehicle. Put your
engine begins cranking, the foot on the brake pedal and
engine will continue cranking for 2. If the engine does not start after push the ENGINE START/STOP
a few seconds or until the five to 10 seconds, especially in button. When the engine begins
vehicle starts. If the engine does very cold weather (below 0°F or cranking, let go of the button.
not start and the key is held in −18°C), it could be flooded with
START for many seconds, The idle speed will go down as
too much gasoline. Push the the engine gets warm. Do not
cranking stops after 15 seconds accelerator pedal all the way to
to prevent cranking motor race the engine immediately
the floor and hold it there as you after starting it. Operate the
damage. To prevent gear hold the key in START for a
damage, this system also maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
engine and transmission gently begins cranking, the engine 2. If the engine does not start after
to allow the oil to warm up and will continue cranking for a five to 10 seconds, especially in
lubricate all moving parts. few seconds or until the vehicle very cold weather (below −18°C
If the transmitter is not in the starts. If the engine does not or 0°F), it could be flooded with
vehicle or something is start and the button is pressed too much gasoline. Try pushing
interfering with the transmitter, for many seconds, cranking will the accelerator pedal all the way
the Driver Information Center be stopped after 15 seconds to to the floor and holding it there
(DIC) will display NO REMOTE prevent cranking motor damage. as you hold the key in START,
DETECTED. See Driver To prevent gear damage, this or press the START button, for
Information Center (DIC) on system also prevents cranking if up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
page 5-23. the engine is already running. Wait at least 15 seconds
Engine cranking can be stopped between each try, to allow the
If the battery in the RKE by pressing the ENGINE START cranking motor to cool down.
transmitter needs replacing, the button a second time. When the engine starts, let go of
DIC displays REPLACE the key or button, and the
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.
The vehicle can still be driven.
{ Caution accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
See “Starting the Vehicle with a Cranking the engine for long the same thing. This clears the
Low Transmitter Battery” in periods of time, by returning the extra gasoline from the engine.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ignition to the START position Do not race the engine
System Operation on page 2-3. immediately after cranking has immediately after starting it.
The vehicle has a ended, can overheat and damage Operate the engine and
Computer-Controlled Cranking the cranking motor, and drain the transmission gently until the oil
System. This feature assists in battery. Wait at least 15 seconds warms up and lubricates all
starting the engine and protects moving parts.
between each try, to let the
components. If the ENGINE cranking motor cool down.
START button is pressed, and
then released when the engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Diesel Engine Starting Procedure Cold Weather Starting (Diesel

The diesel engine starts differently
{ Caution Engine)
than a gasoline engine. If the wait-to-start light stays on The following tips will help with cold
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. after starting the vehicle, the weather starting.
vehicle may not run properly. Use the recommended engine oil
Observe the wait-to-start light.
Have the vehicle serviced when the outside temperature drops
See Wait-to-Start Light on
right away. below freezing. See Engine Oil on
page 5-19. This light may not
come on if the engine is warm. page 10-11. When the outside
3. If the engine does not start after temperature drops below –18°C
2. As soon as the wait-to-start light (0°F), use of the engine heater is
goes off, immediately turn the 15 seconds of cranking, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. recommended.
ignition key to START. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Wait one minute for the starter to See Fuel for Diesel Engines on
cool, then try the same steps page 9-54 for information on what
The engine has a fast warm-up again. fuel to use in cold weather.
glow plug system. The
wait-to-start light will illuminate If you are trying to start the engine If the Diesel Engine Will Not
for a much shorter time than after you have run out of fuel, follow
Start
most diesel engines, due to the the steps in Running Out of Fuel
(Diesel) on page 9-61. If you have run out of fuel, see
rapid heating of the glow plug
Running Out of Fuel (Diesel) on
system. When the engine is cold, let it run
page 9-61.
for a few minutes before you move
the vehicle. This lets oil pressure If the vehicle is not out of fuel, and
build up. The engine will sound the engine will not start, do this:
louder when it's cold. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
Immediately after the wait-to-start
light goes off, turn the ignition key to
START.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If the light does not go off, wait a To Use the Heater

few seconds, then try starting the { Warning 1. Turn off the engine.
engine again. See your dealer for a
starting system check. Do not use gasoline or starting
aids, such as ether, in the air
If the light comes on and then goes intake. They could damage the
off, and it is known that the batteries engine, which may not be
are charged, but the engine still will covered by the warranty. There
not start, the vehicle needs service. could also be a fire, which could
If the light does not come on when cause serious personal injury.
the engine is cold, the vehicle
needs service.
Engine Heater
If the batteries do not have enough
charge to start the engine, see The gasoline engine heater and
Battery on page 10-28. diesel engine oil heater, if equipped,
can help in cold weather conditions 1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L and 2.0L
Check that the correct engine oil at or below −18°C (0°F) for easier
has been used and changed at Similar
starting and better fuel economy
appropriate intervals. If the wrong oil during engine warm-up. Plug in the 2. Open the hood and unwrap the
is used, the engine may be harder heater at least four hours before electrical cord. The electrical
to start. starting the vehicle. An internal cord is located on the passenger
Be sure you are using the proper thermostat in the plug end of the side of the engine compartment,
fuel for existing weather conditions. 1.4L engine’s cord will prevent behind the air cleaner.
See Fuel for Diesel Engines on engine heater operation at 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
page 9-54. temperatures above −18°C (0°F). 110-volt AC outlet.
If the engine starts, runs a short
time, then stops, the vehicle needs
service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park

{ Warning Power (RAP) Use this procedure to shift into
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories may be P (Park):
ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine is turned off: set the parking brake.
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System See Parking Brake on page 9-40
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows for more information.
the cord into a properly grounded . Sunroof 2. Hold the button on the shift lever
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. and push the lever toward the
If the cord will not reach, use a The power windows and sunroof will front of the vehicle into P (Park).
heavy-duty three-prong extension continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
opened. The radio will work when Leaving the Vehicle with the
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ Engine Running
4. Before starting the engine, be ACCESSORY. Once the key is
sure to unplug and store the turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
cord as it was before to keep it the radio will continue to work for { Warning
away from moving engine parts. 10 minutes, or until the driver door is
If you do not it could be It can be dangerous to leave the
opened or the key is removed from
damaged. the ignition. vehicle with the engine running.
It could overheat and catch fire.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on It is dangerous to get out of the
several factors. Ask a dealer in the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
area where you will be parking the in P (Park) with the parking brake
vehicle for the best advice on this. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Warning (Continued)
Torque Lock Shifting out of Park
Torque lock is when the weight of This vehicle is equipped with an
Do not leave the vehicle when the the vehicle puts too much force on automatic transmission shift lock
engine is running. If you have left the parking pawl in the control system. The shift lock is
the engine running, the vehicle transmission. This happens when designed to:
can move suddenly. You or others parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
. Prevent ignition key removal
could be injured. To be sure the unless the shift lever is in
vehicle will not move, even when done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent P (Park) with the shift lever
you are on fairly level ground, button fully released.
always set the parking brake and torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find . Prevent movement of the shift
move the shift lever to P (Park).
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” lever out of P (Park) unless the
See Shifting Into Park on
listed previously. ignition is in ON/RUN and the
page 9-23. If you are towing a
If torque lock does occur, the brake pedal is applied.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-63. vehicle may need to be pushed The shift lock release is always
uphill by another vehicle to relieve functional except in the case of an
the parking pawl pressure, so you uncharged or low voltage (less than
If you have to leave the vehicle with can shift out of P (Park). 9‐volt) battery.
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking If the vehicle has an uncharged
brake set. battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
Release the button and check that battery. See Jump Starting on
the shift lever cannot be moved out page 10-82
of P (Park).
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3. Press the shift lever button. To access the shift lock manual
4. Move the shift lever to the release:
desired position. 1. Apply the parking brake.
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
press the shift lever button
again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
3. Insert a tool into the opening as
If the shift lever still cannot be far as it will go and move the
moved from P (Park), see “Shift shift lever out of P (Park).
Lock Manual Release.” If P (Park) is selected again, the
2. Open the cover to the right of shift lever will be locked again.
Shift Lock Manual Release Have the cause of the problem
the shift lever.
The automatic transmission has an fixed by your dealer.
electric park lock. The key must be 4. Close the cover.
in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal pressed so the shift
lever can be moved from the
Parking
P (Park) position. If the battery has If the vehicle has a manual
lost power, the shift lever cannot be transmission, before getting out of
moved from P (Park) unless the the vehicle, move the shift lever into
shift lock manual release is R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
disengaged manually. parking brake. Once the shift lever
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
has been placed into R (Reverse) Engine Exhaust

with the clutch pedal pressed in, Warning (Continued)
turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, and
release the clutch. { Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
is pulling a trailer, see Driving monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
Characteristics and Towing Tips on seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
page 9-63. can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
Parking over Things coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
That Burn
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
{ Warning garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
Things that can burn could touch that may block underbody immediately.
hot exhaust parts under the airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
over papers, leaves, dry grass, sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
or other things that can burn. . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged, Diesel Particulate Filter
or improperly repaired.
(Continued) The diesel particulate filter (DPF)
system filters soot particles out of
the exhaust gases. The system
includes a self-cleaning function that
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
runs automatically during driving If the vehicle continues to be driven

without any notification. The filter is with the DPF warning message on, Warning (Continued)
cleaned by periodically burning off and the exhaust filter is not cleaned
the soot particles at high as required, the malfunction material that could ignite or burn.
temperature. This process takes indicator lamp and the ENGINE See Parking over Things That
place automatically under set POWER IS REDUCED message Burn on page 9-26 for more
driving conditions and may take up will come on and dealer service is information.
to 25 minutes. Fuel consumption necessary. See Malfunction
may be higher during this period. Indicator Lamp on page 5-14 and
Engine Power Messages on
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Under certain driving conditions,
page 5-29.
e.g. short distances, the system
cannot clean itself automatically.
{ Warning
If the cleaning of the filter is required { Warning Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
and if previous driving conditions did corrosive. Do not allow it to come
not enable automatic cleaning, a During DPF self cleaning or
during extended idling in P (Park), in contact with your skin, eyes,
warning message appears in the or the finished surfaces of the
DIC. See Diesel Particulate Filter the exhaust system and exhaust
gases are very hot. Things that vehicle. If exposed, it may cause
Messages on page 5-30. Start the
burn could touch hot exhaust skin and eye irritation. Wear skin
cleaning process as soon as
possible. parts under the vehicle and ignite. and eye protection when
You or others could be burned. handling. Inhalation may cause
Cleaning Process irritation to the upper respiratory
Do not park, or idle for an
To activate the cleaning process, extended period of time, near or tract. Store in a cool,
continue driving safely, and keep over papers, leaves, dry grass, well-ventilated area. For more
vehicle speed above 50 km/h or other things that can burn. safety and storage information,
(30 mph) until the warning message Keep the exhaust area clear of see the label of the Diesel
in the DIC goes off. Exhaust Fluid container.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
DEF is used with diesel engines to Filling the DEF Tank Exhaust Fluid Low
reduce the amount of regulated A full DEF tank will last for several
emissions produced. The fluid level
in the DEF tank must be maintained
{ Caution thousand kilometers (miles),
depending on vehicle usage. As the
for the vehicle to run correctly. The Use only exhaust fluid that is GM exhaust fluid level drops, warnings
capacity of the DEF tank is 18.5 L approved, or fluid containing the will automatically be displayed in the
(4.9 gal). API certified or ISO 22241 label. DIC. Exhaust fluid level status is
It is normal to hear the DEF system The use of other fluids could available on the DIC under the
purge fluid back into the tank after damage the system, requiring vehicle Information button. See
the vehicle is shutoff. costly repairs that will not be “Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level (Diesel
covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Only)” in Driver Information
Locating Diesel Exhaust Fluid Center (DIC) on page 5-23.
DEF can be purchased at a To avoid vehicle speed limitations,
When adding DEF to an empty or
Chevrolet dealer. It can also be the DEF tank should be refilled at
very low tank, always add at least
purchased at authorized vehicle the first opportunity after a low
7.6 L (2 gal) of fluid to release the
dealerships. Additionally, some warning indication. If DEF is added
vehicle from speed limitation.
diesel fueling stations or retailers before the EXHAUST FLUID
may have DEF for purchase. For To prevent damage to the system,
EMPTY REFILL NOW message
vehicles with an active OnStar do not overfill the DEF tank. When
appears, it may take several km/mi
subscription, OnStar can help to fluid reaches the top of the fill pipe,
for the DIC message to update.
locate a DEF retailer. See Customer stop filling. Do not top off the
Assistance Offices on page 13-3 for DEF tank. If the vehicle speed has been
phone numbers to assist in limited and DEF has been added, it
If you spill DEF during filling, wipe
contacting a GM dealer. See may take up to 30 seconds after
any effected surface with a damp
Recommended Fluids and engine start with the vehicle
cloth.
Lubricants on page 11-12. stopped for the EXHAUST FLUID
For information on the DEF tank, EMPTY REFILL NOW message to
see Filling the Tank on page 9-61. clear. If the vehicle is driven prior to
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
the DIC message clearing, the Below 500 km (300 mi) of range chime also come on. Vehicle speed
vehicle speed will still be limited. remaining, these messages will will be reduced to a maximum
If the DIC message clears while appear every time the vehicle is speed limit of 105 km/h (65 mph).
driving, the speed limitation will be started. After the transition to 105 km/h
removed gradually. Below 121 km (75 mi) of range (65 mph) is complete, the DIC
If DEF is added under freezing remaining, the DIC message message EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
conditions, additional time may be EXHAUST FLUID LOW SPEED REFILL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
required to remove speed limitations LIMITED SOON displays. This TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) – 120 KM
and may require less fluid to fill the message will display every time the (75 MI) UNTIL 89 KM/H (55 MPH)
DEF tank. vehicle is started. MAX SPEED displays. The
The following actions describe If these warnings are ignored and displayed mileage will decrease as
strategies required by the U.S. the DEF tank becomes empty, the driving continues. A warning light
Environmental Protection Agency DIC message EXHAUST FLUID and a chime also come on.
(EPA) and the California Air EMPTY REFILL NOW - 563 KM When the mileage countdown
Resource Board (CARB). The DEF (350 MI) UNTIL 105 KM/H (65 MPH) is zero, the DIC message
messages relate to these strategies. MAX SPEED displays. The EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY REFILL
The DIC message EXHAUST displayed mileage will decrease as NOW - TRANSITIONING TO
FLUID RANGE: XXXX km (mi) driving continues. A warning light 89 KM/H (55 MPH) MAX SPEED
displays at approximately 1600 km also comes on. displays. A flashing warning light
(1,000 mi) of fluid range remaining. When the mileage countdown and a chime also come on. Vehicle
This message appears again at is zero, the DIC message speed will be reduced to a
approximately 500 km (300 mi) of EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY REFILL maximum speed limit of 89 km/h
remaining range before the exhaust NOW - TRANSITIONING TO (55 mph).
fluid tank becomes empty. 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX SPEED After the transition to 89 km/h
displays. A warning light and a (55 mph) is complete, the DIC
message EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
REFILL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) – 120 KM Add at least 7.6 L (2 gal) of fluid to DIC message persists, see your
(75 MI) UNTIL 7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX release the vehicle from speed dealer or additional DIC messages
SPEED displays. The displayed limitation from a very low or empty may display.
mileage will decrease as driving tank. The capacity of the DEF tank When the mileage countdown
continues. A flashing warning light is 18.5 L (4.9 gal). is zero, a DIC message
and a chime also come on. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid Messages EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY
When the mileage countdown on page 5-29, Diesel Exhaust Fluid POOR - SEE OWNERS MANUAL
is zero, the DIC message (DEF) Warning Light on page 5-21, NOW - TRANSITIONING TO
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY REFILL and Recommended Fluids and 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX SPEED
NOW - TRANSITIONING TO Lubricants on page 11-12. displays. A warning light and a
7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX SPEED chime also come on. Vehicle speed
displays. A flashing warning light Exhaust Fluid Quality Poor will be reduced to a maximum
and a chime also come on. Vehicle Use only exhaust fluid that is GM speed limit of 105 km/h (65 mph).
speed will be reduced to a approved, or fluid containing the API After the transition to 105 km/h
maximum speed limit of certified or ISO 22241 label. (65 mph) is complete, the DIC
7 km/h (4 mph). All DEF has an expiration date. message EXHAUST FLUID
After the transition to 7 km/h (4 mph) If the system detects poor quality, QUALITY POOR - SEE OWNERS
is complete, the DIC message or contaminated or diluted DEF, the MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY REFILL DIC message EXHAUST FLUID TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) – 120 KM
NOW - SPEED LIMITED TO 7 KM/H QUALITY POOR - SEE OWNERS (75 MI) UNTIL 89 KM/H (55 MPH)
(4 MPH) displays. A flashing MANUAL NOW – 160 KM (99 MI) MAX SPEED displays. The
warning light and a chime also UNTIL 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX displayed mileage will decrease as
come on. SPEED displays. The displayed driving continues. A warning light
mileage will decrease as driving and a chime also come on.
continues. A warning light also When the mileage countdown
comes on. Adding fresh DEF to the is zero, the DIC message
system may resolve the problem, EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY
depending on several factors. If the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
POOR - SEE OWNERS MANUAL speed will be reduced to a When the mileage countdown
NOW - TRANSITIONING TO maximum speed limit of is zero, the DIC message
89 KM/H (55 MPH) MAX SPEED 7 km/h (4 mph). SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID
displays. A flashing warning light After the transition to 7 km/h (4 mph) SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
and a chime also come on. Vehicle is complete, a DIC message MANUAL NOW - TRANSITIONING
speed will be reduced to a EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX
maximum speed limit of 89 km/h POOR - SEE OWNERS MANUAL SPEED displays. A warning light
(55 mph). NOW - SPEED LIMITED TO 7 KM/H and a chime also come on. Vehicle
After the transition to 89 km/h (4 MPH) displays. A flashing speed will be reduced to a
(55 mph) is complete, a DIC warning light and a chime also maximum speed limit of 105 km/h
message EXHAUST FLUID come on. (65 mph).
QUALITY POOR - SEE OWNERS After the transition to 105 km/h
MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED Service Exhaust Fluid System (65 mph) is complete, a DIC
TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) – 120 KM If a problem occurs with the DEF message SERVICE EXHAUST
(75 MI) UNTIL 7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX system, the DIC message SERVICE FLUID SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
SPEED displays. The displayed EXHAUST FLUID SYSTEM - SEE MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
mileage will decrease as driving OWNERS MANUAL NOW – 160 KM TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) – 120 KM
continues. A flashing warning light (99 MI) UNTIL 105 KM/H (65 MPH) (75 MI) UNTIL 89 KM/H (55 MPH)
and a chime also come on. MAX SPEED displays. The MAX SPEED displays. The
When the mileage countdown displayed mileage will decrease as displayed mileage will decrease as
is zero, a DIC message driving continues. A warning light driving continues. A warning light
EXHAUST FLUID QUALITY also comes on. In some cases this and a chime also come on.
POOR - SEE OWNERS MANUAL message will clear itself, indicating When the mileage countdown
NOW - TRANSITIONING TO that the DEF system was able to is zero, the DIC message
7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX SPEED correct the condition. If the DIC SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID
displays. A flashing warning light message persists, see your dealer SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
and a chime also come on. Vehicle or additional DIC messages may MANUAL NOW - TRANSITIONING
display. TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) MAX SPEED
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
displays. A flashing warning light After the transition to 7 km/h (4 mph) SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
and a chime also come on. Vehicle is complete, the DIC message MANUAL NOW - TRANSITIONING
speed will be reduced down to a SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX
maximum speed limit of 89 km/h SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS SPEED displays. A chime also
(55 mph). MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED comes on. Vehicle speed will be
After the transition to 89 km/h TO 7 KM/H (4 MPH) displays. reduced to a maximum speed limit
(55 mph) is complete, the DIC A flashing warning light and a chime of 105 km/h (65 mph).
message SERVICE EXHAUST also come on. After the transition to 105 km/h
FLUID SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS Service Emission System (65 mph) is complete, the DIC
MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED message SERVICE EMISSION
TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) – 120 KM If a problem occurs with the SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
(75 MI) UNTIL 7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX vehicle emission system, the DIC MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
SPEED displays. The displayed message SERVICE EMISSION TO 105 KM/H (65 MPH) – 120 KM
mileage will decrease as driving SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS (75 MI) UNTIL 89 KM/H (55 MPH)
continues. A flashing warning light MANUAL NOW – 282 KM (175 MI) MAX SPEED displays. The
and a chime also come on. UNTIL 105 KM/H (65 MPH) MAX displayed mileage will decrease as
SPEED displays. The displayed driving continues. A chime also
When the mileage countdown mileage will decrease as driving
is zero, the DIC message comes on.
continues. In some cases this
SERVICE EXHAUST FLUID message will clear itself, indicating When the mileage countdown
SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS that the emission system was able is zero, the DIC message
MANUAL NOW - TRANSITIONING to correct the condition. If the DIC SERVICE EMISSION
TO 7 KM/H (4 MPH) MAX SPEED message persists, see your dealer SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
displays. A flashing warning light or additional DIC messages may MANUAL NOW - TRANSITIONING
and a chime also come on. Vehicle display. TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) MAX SPEED
speed will be reduced to a displays. A chime also comes on.
maximum speed limit of When the mileage countdown Vehicle speed will be reduced to a
7 km/h (4 mph). is zero, the DIC message maximum speed limit of 89 km/h
SERVICE EMISSION (55 mph).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
After the transition to 89 km/h Automatic

(55 mph) is complete, the DIC
message SERVICE EMISSION Transmission
SYSTEM - SEE OWNERS
MANUAL NOW - SPEED LIMITED
TO 89 KM/H (55 MPH) displays.
A chime also comes on.
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. English Shown, Metric Similar
If the vehicle is left with the engine
running, follow the proper steps to P (Park): This position locks the
be sure the vehicle will not move. drive wheels. It is the best position
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-23 The selected gear is also shown in to use when starting the engine
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-26. the instrument cluster. because the vehicle cannot move
If the vehicle has a manual easily.
transmission, see Parking on
page 9-25.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
{ Warning
trailer, see Driving Characteristics It is dangerous to get out of the
and Towing Tips on page 9-63. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
all the way into P (Park) as you N (Neutral) only. Also, use
Warning (Continued) maintain brake application. Then N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
press the shift lever button and being towed.
Do not leave the vehicle when the move the shift lever into another
engine is running. If you have left The vehicle has an automatic
gear. See Shifting out of Park on neutral shift feature which allows the
the engine running, the vehicle page 9-24.
can move suddenly. You or others transmission to automatically shift to
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
vehicle will not move, even when back up. stopped with a forward gear
engaged. The reduced load on the
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and { Caution engine improves vehicle fuel
economy.
move the shift lever to P (Park).
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9-23 and Driving
vehicle is moving forward could { Warning
damage the transmission. The
Characteristics and Towing Tips Shifting into a drive gear while the
repairs would not be covered by
on page 9-63. engine is running at high speed is
the vehicle warranty. Shift to
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle dangerous. Unless your foot is
Make sure the shift lever is fully in is stopped. firmly on the brake pedal, the
P (Park) before starting the engine. vehicle could move very rapidly.
The vehicle has an automatic You could lose control and hit
transmission shift lock control To rock the vehicle back and forth to
people or objects. Do not shift
system. The regular brake must be get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If into a drive gear while the engine
fully applied first and then the shift is running at high speed.
lever button pressed before shifting the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9.
from P (Park) when the ignition key N (Neutral): In this position, the
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out engine does not connect with the
of P (Park), ease pressure on the wheels. To restart the engine when
shift lever, then push the shift lever the vehicle is already moving, use
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
{ Caution { Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or If the vehicle accelerates slowly,
N (Neutral) with the engine or does not shift gears, the
running at high speed may transmission could be damaged.
damage the transmission. The Have the vehicle serviced
repairs would not be covered by right away.
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle. Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
D (Drive): This position is for 1. Move the shift lever from
All Models Except Fuel Economy
normal driving. It provides the best D (Drive) to the left into the (+) or
Model
fuel economy. If more power is (−) manual position.
needed for passing, and the
vehicle is: { Caution
. Going less than 56 km/h Driving with the engine at a high
(35 mph), push the accelerator rpm without upshifting while using
pedal about halfway down. Driver Shift Control (DSC), could
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or damage the vehicle. Always
more, push the accelerator all upshift when necessary while
the way down. using DSC.
DSC allows you to shift an

automatic transmission similar to a
manual transmission.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2. Press the shift lever forward (+) While in the DSC mode, the ERS allows for the selection of the
to upshift or rearward (−) to transmission will automatically range of gear positions. Use this
downshift. An M and the current downshift when the vehicle comes mode when driving downhill or
gear will be displayed in the DIC. to a stop. This will allow for more towing a trailer to limit the top gear
While using the DSC feature, the power during take-off. and vehicle speed. The shift
vehicle will have firmer, quicker When accelerating the vehicle from position indicator within the Driver
shifting. Use DSC for sport driving a stop in snowy and icy conditions, Information Center (DIC) will display
or when climbing or descending you may want to shift into second a number next to the M indicating
hills, to stay in gear longer, or to gear. A higher gear allows the the highest available gear under
downshift for more power or engine vehicle to gain more traction on manual mode and the driving
braking. slippery surfaces. conditions when manual mode was
selected.
The transmission will only allow Electronic Range Select
shifting into gears appropriate for 1. Move the shift lever from
(ERS) Mode D (Drive) to the left into the (+) or
vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (rpm). The Fuel Economy Model (−) manual position.
transmission will not automatically 2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine rpm is too high, nor to the
{ Caution to upshift or rearward (−) to
downshift. An M and the current
next higher gear when the maximum If the vehicle is driven at a high gear will be displayed in the DIC.
engine rpm is reached. rpm without upshifting while using When shifting to M (Manual Mode),
If shifting is prevented for any Electronic Range Select (ERS), the transmission will shift to the
reason, the currently selected gear the vehicle could be damaged. range of the current gear. For this
will flash multiple times, indicating Always upshift when necessary range, the highest gear available is
that the transmission has not shifted while using ERS. displayed next to the M in the DIC.
gears. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5-23 for more information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
All gears below that number are Manual Transmission

available to use. For example, when { Caution
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M, Shift Pattern
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are Do not rest your foot on the clutch
shifted automatically. To shift to pedal while driving or while
5 (Fifth) gear, press the shift lever stopped. The pressure can cause
forward (+) to upshift or shift into premature wear in the clutch. The
D (Drive). repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
M (Manual Mode) will prevent
shifting to a lower gear range if the All Models Fuel Economy
engine speed is too high. If vehicle Except Fuel Model 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
speed is not reduced within the time Economy Model fully to the pedal stop and shift into
allowed, the lower gear range shift 1 (First). Then slowly let up on the
will not be completed. Slow the These are the shift patterns for the clutch pedal as the accelerator
vehicle, then press the shift lever six-speed manual transmissions. pedal is pressed.
rearward (−) to downshift to the To operate the transmissions: If the vehicle comes to a complete
desired lower gear range. stop and it is hard to shift into
While using the ERS, cruise control { Caution 1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
can be used. and let up on the clutch. Press the
Do not rest your hand on the shift clutch pedal back down. Then shift
lever while driving. The pressure into 1 (First).
could cause premature wear in
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
the transmission. The repairs fully to the pedal stop while letting
would not be covered by the up on the accelerator pedal and
vehicle warranty. shifting into 2 (Second). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
the accelerator pedal is pressed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and To stop, let up on the accelerator into R (Reverse). Let up on the
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), pedal and press the brake pedal. clutch pedal slowly while pressing
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the Just before the vehicle stops, press the accelerator pedal.
same way as for 2 (Second). Slowly the clutch pedal and the brake If the gear does not engage, shift
let up on the clutch pedal as the pedal, and shift to Neutral. the transmission to Neutral, release
accelerator pedal Is pressed. Neutral: Use this position when the clutch pedal, and press it back
For the best fuel economy, use you start or idle the engine. The down. Repeat the gear selection.
6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehicle shift lever is in Neutral when it is
speed and driving conditions allow. centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
{ Warning
If you skip a gear when
downshifting, you could lose
control of the vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not
shift down more than one gear at
a time when downshifting.
An up-shift light in the instrument
cluster indicates when to shift to the
next higher gear for the best fuel
economy. { Caution
During normal driving, upshifts Do not skip gears while
should occur between 1300 and
upshifting. This can cause
2500 rpm, and downshifts should
premature wear in the
occur between 1500 and 1000 rpm.
R (Reverse): To back up, with the transmission. The repairs would
vehicle at a complete stop, press not be covered by the vehicle
down the clutch pedal. Then pull up warranty.
the ring on the shift lever, and shift
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
When the vehicle begins to drive the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself. normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
might be heard while this test is
you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves at the same time. In many
a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-17.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Parking Brake To release the parking brake: If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
1. Hold the brake pedal down. is pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
2. Pull the parking brake handle up page 9-63.
until you can press the release
button. Brake Assist
3. Hold the release button in as This vehicle has a brake assist
you move the brake handle all feature designed to assist the driver
the way down. in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
{ Caution conditions. This feature
automatically uses the stability
Driving with the parking brake on system hydraulic brake control
can overheat the brake system module to supplement the power
To apply the parking brake, pull up and cause premature wear or brake system under conditions
on the parking brake handle. It is damage to brake system parts. where the driver has quickly and
not necessary to push in on the Make sure that the parking brake forcefully applied the brake pedal in
release button while applying the is fully released and the brake an attempt to quickly stop or slow
parking brake. If the ignition is in the warning light is off before driving. down the vehicle. The stability
ON/RUN position, the brake system system hydraulic brake control
warning light will come on. See module increases brake pressure at
Driving with the parking brake
Brake System Warning Light on each corner of the vehicle until the
applied will cause a warning chime
page 5-16. ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
to sound and the RELEASE
pulsation or pedal movement during
PARKING BRAKE message to
this time is normal and the driver
appear in the DIC. The message will
should continue to apply the brake
remain on until the parking brake is
released or the vehicle is stopped.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
pedal as the driving situation Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the
dictates. The brake assist feature driver in keeping the vehicle on the
will automatically disengage when intended path.
the brake pedal is released or brake Traction Control/
If cruise control is being used and
pedal pressure is quickly Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
decreased. Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
disengage. Cruise control may be
System Operation turned back on when road
The vehicle has a Traction Control conditions allow.
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on
electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is
These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
and assist the driver in maintaining systems may be heard or felt while
control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there
of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle.
beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both
happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving
the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary
engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
the intended path and the direction page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
If d comes on and stays on:

{ Caution
1. Stop the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly brake or
2. Turn the engine off and wait
accelerate heavily when TCS is
15 seconds.
off. The vehicle driveline could be
3. Start the engine. damaged.
The indicator light for both systems
is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and
. Flash when TCS is limiting
more time to diagnose the problem. release the g button. The traction
If the condition persists, see your
wheel spin. off light i displays in the instrument
dealer.
. Flash when StabiliTrak is cluster. To turn TCS on again, press
activated. Turning the Systems Off and release the g button. The
and On traction off light i displayed in the
. Turn on and stay on when either
system is not working. instrument cluster will turn off.
If either system fails to turn on or to If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
activate, a message displays in the the g button is pressed, the system
Driver Information Center (DIC), and will not turn off until the wheels stop
d comes on and stays on to spinning.
indicate that the system is inactive
and is not assisting the driver in To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold the g button until
maintaining control. The vehicle is is on the center console, behind the
safe to drive, but driving should be shift lever. the traction off light i and
adjusted accordingly. StabiliTrak OFF light g come on
and stay on in the instrument
cluster. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
on again, press and release the g Cruise Control using cruise control and the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
button. The traction off light i and If equipped with cruise control, the See Traction Control/Electronic
StabiliTrak OFF light g in the vehicle can maintain a speed of Stability Control on page 9-41.
instrument cluster turn off. about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more When road conditions allow you to
Adding accessories can affect the without keeping your foot on the safely use it again, the cruise
vehicle performance. See accelerator. Cruise control does not control can be turned on.
Accessories and Modifications on work at speeds below 40 km/h
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
page 10-3. (25 mph).
control shuts off.
{ Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. Do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
1 (On/Off): Press to turn the
cruise control system on and off.
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system
that begins to limit wheel spin while
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate): 3. Move the thumbwheel down and Increasing Speed While Using
Move the thumbwheel up briefly to release it. Cruise Control
make the vehicle resume to a 4. Take your foot off the accelerator If the cruise control system is
previously set speed or hold pedal. already activated:
upwards to accelerate. If cruise
control is already active, use to When the cruise control has been . Move the thumbwheel up toward
increase vehicle speed. set to the desired speed, the cruise RES/+ and hold it until the
control indicator turns green on the desired speed is reached, then
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the instrument cluster. release it.
thumbwheel down briefly to set the
speed and activate cruise control. Resuming a Set Speed . To increase the vehicle speed in
If cruise control is already active, small increments, move the
If the cruise control is set at a thumbwheel up toward RES/+
use to decrease speed. desired speed and then the brakes briefly and then release it. Each
* (Cancel): Press to disengage or clutch for manual transmissions time this is done, the vehicle
cruise control without erasing the are applied, the cruise control is goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)
set speed from memory. disengaged without erasing the set faster.
speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control Reducing Speed While Using
Once the vehicle reaches about
If the cruise button is on when not in 40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, move Cruise Control
use, it could get bumped and go into the thumbwheel up toward RES/+ If the cruise control system is
cruise when not desired. Keep the briefly. The vehicle returns to the already activated:
cruise control switch off when cruise previous set speed.
is not being used. . Move the thumbwheel toward
SET/− and hold until the desired
1. Press the 1 button to turn the lower speed is reached, then
cruise system on. A white cruise release it.
control indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
2. Get to the speed desired.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. To decrease the vehicle speed in downhill, you might have to brake or
smaller increments, move the shift to a lower gear to maintain the
Driver Assistance
thumbwheel toward SET/− vehicle speed. When the brakes are Systems
briefly. Each time this is done, applied, the cruise control will
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h turn off. Ultrasonic Parking Assist
(1 mph) slower.
Ending Cruise Control The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
Passing Another Vehicle While (URPA) system assists the driver
Using Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise
control: with parking and avoiding objects
Use the accelerator pedal to while in R (Reverse). URPA
increase the vehicle speed. When
. To disengage cruise control, operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
you take your foot off the pedal, the step lightly on the brake pedal or (5 mph). The sensors on the rear
vehicle slows down to the previous clutch for a manual transmission. bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m
set cruise control speed. While . Press * on the steering wheel. (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
pressing the accelerator pedal or 20 cm (8 in) off the ground. The
shortly following the release to . To turn off cruise control, press distance objects can be detected
override cruise control, briefly 1 on the steering wheel. may be less during warmer or humid
moving the thumbwheel toward Erasing Speed Memory weather.
SET– will result in cruise control set
to the current vehicle speed. The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if 1 is pressed
{ Warning
Using Cruise Control on Hills
or if the ignition is turned off. The URPA system does not
How well the cruise control works detect children, pedestrians,
on hills depends upon the vehicle bicyclists, animals, or objects
speed, load, and the steepness of below the bumper or that are too
the hills. When going up steep hills, close or too far from the vehicle.
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the (Continued)
vehicle speed. When going
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Turning the System On and Off ice, and slush. For cleaning
Warning (Continued) instructions, see Exterior Care
The URPA system can be turned on
on page 10-88.
It is not available at speeds and off using the infotainment
system controls. See Vehicle . The park assist sensors are
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To
Personalization on page 5-35. covered by frost or ice. Frost or
prevent injury, death, or vehicle ice can form around and behind
damage, even with URPA, always When the system is off, PARK
the sensors and may not always
check the area around the vehicle ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver
be seen; this can occur after
and check all mirrors before Information Center (DIC). The
washing the vehicle in cold
backing. message disappears after a short
weather. The message may not
period of time.
clear until the frost or ice has
How the System Works URPA defaults to the on setting melted.
each time the vehicle is started.
URPA comes on automatically when If the above conditions do not exist,
the shift lever is moved into Turn off URPA when towing a trailer. take the vehicle to your dealer to
R (Reverse). A single beep sounds repair the system.
When the System Does Not
to indicate the system is working. Seem to Work Properly PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA
An obstacle detection is indicated system does not activate due to a
The following messages may be temporary condition, the message
by beeps. The interval between the displayed on the DIC:
beeps becomes shorter as the displays on the DIC. This can occur
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: If under the following conditions:
When the distance is less than this message occurs, check the . The driver has disabled the
30 cm (12 in), the beeping is a following conditions: system.
continuous beep for five seconds. . The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. An object was hanging out of the SBZA Detection Zones
trunk during the last drive cycle. { Warning
Once the object is removed,
URPA will return to normal SBZA does not alert the driver to
operation. vehicles rapidly approaching
outside of the side blind zones,
. The bumper is damaged. Take
the vehicle to your dealer to pedestrians, bicyclists,
repair the system. or animals. It may not provide
alerts when changing lanes under
. Other conditions, such as all driving conditions. Failure to
vibrations from a jackhammer or use proper care when changing
the compression of air brakes on lanes may result in injury, death,
a very large truck, are affecting or vehicle damage. Before
system performance.
making a lane change, always
check mirrors, glance over your The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
Side Blind Zone shoulder, and use the turn approximately one lane over from
Alert (SBZA) signals. both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
If equipped, the Side Blind Zone (11 ft). The height of the zone is
Alert system is a lane-changing aid approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
that assists drivers with avoiding and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This
crashes that occur with vehicles in zone starts at approximately the
the side blind zone (or spot) areas. middle of the vehicle and goes back
The SBZA warning display will light 5 m (16 ft).
up in the corresponding outside side How the System Works
mirror and will flash if the turn signal
is on. The SBZA symbol lights up in the
side mirrors when the system
detects a vehicle in the next lane
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
over that is in the side blind zone. SBZA can be disabled through The system does not need to be
This indicates it may be unsafe to vehicle personalization. See serviced. The system may light up
change lanes. Before making a lane “Collision/Detection Systems” under due to guardrails, signs, trees,
change, check the SBZA display, Vehicle Personalization on shrubs, and other non-moving
check mirrors, glance over your page 5-35. If SBZA is disabled by objects. This is normal system
shoulder, and use the turn signals. the driver, the SBZA mirror displays operation; the vehicle does not need
will not light up. service.
When the System Does Not SBZA may not operate when the
Seem to Work Properly SBZA sensors in the left or right
corners of the rear bumper are
SBZA displays may not come on covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
when passing a vehicle quickly or or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror when towing a trailer. The SBZA cleaning instructions, see "Washing
Display Display detection zones that extend back the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
from the side of the vehicle do not page 10-88. If the DIC still displays
When the vehicle is started, both move further back when a trailer is the system unavailable message
outside mirror SBZA displays will towed. Use caution while changing after cleaning both sides of the
briefly come on to indicate the lanes when towing a trailer. SBZA vehicle toward the rear corners of
system is operating. When the may alert to objects attached to the the vehicle, see your dealer.
vehicle is moving forward, the left- vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,
or right-side mirror display will light or object extending out to either side If the SBZA displays do not light up
up if a vehicle is detected in that of the vehicle. This is normal system when vehicles are in the blind zone
blind zone. If the turn signal is operation; the vehicle does not need and the system is clean, the system
activated in the same direction of a service. may need service. Take the vehicle
detected vehicle, this display will to your dealer.
flash as an extra warning not to SBZA may not always alert the
change lanes. driver to vehicles in the side blind
zone, especially in wet conditions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
When SBZA is disabled for any To return to the previous screen

reason other than the driver turning Warning (Continued) sooner, do one of the following:
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On . Press a hard key on the
option will not be available on the located outside the camera's field
of view, below the bumper, infotainment system.
personalization menu.
or under the vehicle. Perceived . Shift into P (Park).
FCC Information distances may be different from . Reach a vehicle speed of
See Radio Frequency Statement on actual distances. Do not back the
8 km/h (5 mph).
page 13-15. vehicle using only the RVC
screen, during longer, higher Turning the Rear Vision Camera
Rear Vision speed backing maneuvers, System On or Off
or where there could be cross To turn the RVC system on or off:
Camera (RVC) traffic. Failure to use proper care
This vehicle may have the RVC before backing may result in 1. Shift into P (Park).
system. Read this entire section injury, death, or vehicle damage. 2. Press the CONFIG button to
before using it. Always check behind and around enter the configure menu
The RVC system can assist the the vehicle before backing. options.
driver when backing up by 3. Select Display.
displaying a view of the area behind An image appears on the 4. Select Rear Camera Options.
the vehicle. infotainment screen when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). 5. Select Camera. When a
{ Warning The infotainment screen goes to the checkmark appears next to the
Camera option, then the RVC
previous screen after approximately
The RVC system does not display 10 seconds once the vehicle is system is on.
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, shifted out of R (Reverse).
animals, or any other object
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Symbols 5. Select Symbols. When a On some vehicles, RCTA can be

The system may have a feature that checkmark appears next to the turned on or off through the
lets the driver view caution symbols Symbols option, symbols will infotainment system:
on the infotainment screen while appear. 1. Shift into P (Park).
using the RVC. The Ultrasonic Rear Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) 2. Press the CONFIG button to
Park Assist (URPA) system must enter the configure menu
not be disabled to use the caution On vehicles with the RCTA, a
warning triangle with a left or right options.
symbols. The error message Rear
Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable pointing arrow may also display on 3. Select Display.
may display if URPA has been the RVC screen to warn of traffic
coming from the left or the right. 4. Select Rear Camera Options.
disabled and the symbols have
been turned on. Three beeps will also sound from 5. Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert.
the left or right. This system detects When a checkmark appears next
The symbols appear and may cover objects coming from up to 20 m to the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
an object when viewing the (65 ft) from the left or right side option, this feature will be on.
infotainment screen when an object behind the vehicle. The RCTA
is detected by the URPA system. system will not work properly if ice, Guidelines
To turn the symbols on or off: snow, mud, or anything else builds The RVC system may have a
up on the rear bumper sensors. guideline overlay that can help the
1. Shift into P (Park). driver align the vehicle when
Use caution while backing up when
2. Press the CONFIG button to towing a trailer, as the RCTA backing into a parking spot.
enter the configure menu detection zones that extend out To turn the guidelines on or off:
options. from the back of your vehicle do not
move further back when a trailer is 1. Shift into P (Park).
3. Select Display.
towed. 2. Press the CONFIG button to
4. Select Rear Camera Options. enter the configure menu
options.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
3. Select Display. Rear Vision Camera Location

4. Select Rear Camera Options.
5. Select Guidelines. When a
checkmark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
appear.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
SYSTEM: This message can
display when the system is not
1. View displayed by the camera.
operating properly.
If any other problem occurs or if a
The camera is above the license
problem persists, see your dealer.
plate.
The area displayed by the camera is
limited. It does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper and can vary
depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions. Displayed images
may be closer or farther than they 1. View displayed by the camera.
appear.
2. Corner of the rear bumper.
The following illustrations show the
field of view that the camera
provides.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
When the System Does Not Fuel Recommended Fuel

Seem to Work Properly (Gasoline)
Use of the recommended fuel is an
The RVC system may not work important part of the proper Use regular unleaded gasoline with
properly or display a clear image if: maintenance of this vehicle. When a posted octane rating of 87 or
. The RVC is turned off. See driving in the U.S., to help keep the higher. If the octane rating is less
“Turning the Rear Camera engine clean and maintain optimum than 87, an audible knocking noise
System On or Off” earlier in this vehicle performance, we may be heard. If this occurs, use a
section. recommend using TOP TIER gasoline rated at 87 octane or
.
Detergent Gasolines. See higher as soon as possible. If heavy
It is dark.
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP knocking is heard when using
. The sun or the beam of TIER Detergent Gasolines. gasoline with a higher octane rating,
headlamps are shining directly the engine needs service.
into the camera lens.
Use of Seasonal Fuels
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens. Use summer and winter fuels in the
Clean the lens, rinse it with appropriate season. Driving or
water, and wipe it with a soft starting could be affected if the
cloth. incorrect fuel is used. Drive the
vehicle with the engine running until
. The back of the vehicle is in an the fuel is a half tank or less, then
accident. The position and refuel with the current seasonal fuel.
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can Prohibited Fuels
be affected. Be sure to have the Gasolines containing oxygenates,
camera and its position and such as ethers and ethanol, as well
mounting angle checked at your as reformulated gasolines are
dealer. available in some cities. If these
gasolines comply with the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
previously described specification, performance. The malfunction federal specifications, but emission
then they are acceptable to use. indicator lamp may turn on. If this control system performance might
However, E85 and other fuels occurs, see your dealer for service. be affected. The malfunction
containing more than 15% ethanol indicator lamp could turn on and the
must be used only in FlexFuel Gasoline Specifications vehicle may not pass a smog-check
vehicles. test. See Malfunction Indicator
At a minimum, gasoline should meet Lamp on page 5-14. If this occurs,
ASTM specification D 4814. Some
{ Caution gasolines contain an
return to your authorized dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of
Do not use fuel containing
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs may not be
methanol. It can corrode metal
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty.
parts in the fuel system and also against the use of gasolines
damage plastic and rubber parts. containing MMT. See “Prohibited
That damage would not be Fuels" in Recommended Fuel
Fuels in Foreign
covered under the vehicle (Gasoline) on page 9-52. Countries
warranty.
If planning to drive in countries
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the
Some gasolines that are not Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
reformulated for low emissions can Check regional auto club or fuel
contain an octane-enhancing If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
additive called California Emissions Standards, it is in the country where driving. Never
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use meet California specifications. See methanol, or any other fuel not
gasolines with MMT as they can the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
reduce spark plug life and affect label. If this fuel is not available in caused by use of improper fuel
emission control system states adopting California Emissions would not be covered by the vehicle
Standards, the vehicle will operate warranty.
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Fuel Additives (Gasoline) Caution (Continued)

At a minimum, the diesel fuel you
use should meet the latest version
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP of ASTM specification D 975
TIER Detergent Gasoline is warranty. Do not use marine, (Grades number 2-D or number 1-D
recommended. See Fuel on locomotive, or boiler distillate fuel S15, commonly known as Ultra Low
page 9-52. since it may contain higher sulfur Sulfur Diesel) in the United States.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is levels. If there are questions about the fuel
not available, one bottle of Fuel you are using, contact your fuel
System Treatment PLUS, part The emission control system supplier.
number 88861013, added to the fuel requires the use of diesel fuel with Diesel Fuel Grades
tank at every engine oil change, can ultra low sulfur content (15 ppm or
help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS 0.0015% by weight, maximum). For best results use number 2-D
is the only gasoline additive Look for the following label on the diesel fuel year-round (above and
recommended by General Motors. dispenser to ensure you are filling below freezing conditions) as oil
It is available at your dealer. with Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel. companies blend number 2-D fuel to
address climate differences.
Fuel for Diesel Engines Number 1-D diesel fuel can be used
in very cold temperatures (when it
stays below −18°C or 0°F);
{ Caution however, it will produce a power and
fuel economy loss. Avoid the use of
Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra
number 1-D diesel fuel in warm or
Low Sulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur
hot climates. It can result in stalling,
maximum) will cause damage to poor starting when the engine is hot,
the exhaust after-treatment and damage to the fuel injection
system. This damage would not system.
be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Premium Diesel Fuel Biodiesel blends

Caution (Continued)
Diesel fuel corresponding to the It is acceptable to use diesel fuel
Engine Manufacturers Association unmodified bio-oils, fats, containing up to 20% biodiesel
(EMA) Recommended Guideline on or blends of vegetable oil with (B20). The diesel fuel portion of the
Premium Diesel Fuel (FQP-1A) diesel. They could damage the blend must meet the same
could provide better starting, less fuel system and engine, and specification, ASTM D975 (Grades
noise, and better vehicle damages would not be covered number 2-D or number 1-D S15
performance, but its use is not by the vehicle warranty. commonly known as Ultra Low
required. Sulfur Diesel), as other fuels used in
your vehicle, and the biodiesel used
Biodiesel What not to use for making this fuel must meet the
What is biodiesel? Do not use home-made biodiesel in latest version of ASTM specification
your vehicle since its quality cannot D6751.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from
vegetable oils or animal fats that be verified by approved scientific
have been chemically modified to methods. Home test kits are not
reduce the possibility of damage to approved scientific methods.
the fuel system and engine.
{ Caution
{ Caution Any damage caused by raw,
Do not use home-made biodiesel unmodified, or home-made
or home test kits because the biodiesel would not be covered by
quality cannot be verified by the vehicle warranty.
approved scientific methods. Do
not use raw vegetable oil or other
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Pump labeling — Retail pumps Pumps dispensing more than
dispensing blends containing up 5% and up to 20% biodiesel are
to 5% biodiesel (B5) are not required to be labeled with the
required to be labeled with the concentration of biodiesel. When
concentration of biodiesel. refueling with a biodiesel blend
Blends up to B5 must meet above B5, ensure one of the
ASTM D975 (Grades following two labels appears on
number 2-D or number 1-D S15 the dispenser:
commonly known as Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel).
{ Caution
Do not use blends containing
more than 20% biodiesel. Any
engine, fuel system, or exhaust
after-treatment system damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
. Biodiesel quality — Blends

containing more than 5% and up
to 20% biodiesel must meet the
latest version of ASTM
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
specification D7467 (Biodiesel We neither encourage nor biodiesel. Storage at hot ambient
blend, B6 - B20). Biodiesel is an discourage the use of biodiesel temperatures will accelerate
emerging product, and its quality blends for vehicles. As a renewable biodiesel degradation.
can vary widely. To reduce the fuel, biodiesel provides some When vehicles will be stored for
risk of poor quality fuel, we environmental benefits. However, extended periods of time
recommend that biodiesel users biodiesel has unique properties and (greater than one month), they
purchase biodiesel blends from needs to be handled differently than should be run out of biodiesel to
a BQ-9000 certified marketer. diesel fuel. Its use presents below one-quarter tank, refueled
A listing of certified marketers additional risks and may not be with conventional Ultra Low
can be found at appropriate in all situations. Certain Sulfur Diesel fuel, and driven
www.bq-9000.org. If there are vehicle operating modes increase several miles before storage.
questions about the these risks and should be avoided.
biodiesel-containing fuels you Read further to determine if your . Biodiesel gels sooner than
are using, contact your fuel driving habits are compatible with conventional diesel fuel at cold
supplier. the use of biodiesel. temperature, and biodiesel fuel
.
requires proper blending for
Biodiesel fuel quality degrades
{ Caution with time and exposure to high
winter time operation.
temperature much more quickly Fuels improperly blended for
Certain driving patterns are not than conventional diesel fuel. cold temperature operation may
compatible with biodiesel use. More frequent refueling provides result in restricted fuel filters and
It is the operator’s responsibility the best opportunity to have a degraded vehicle performance.
to ensure that biodiesel in the supply of fresh fuel. Your vehicle is equipped with a
vehicle’s tank does not lead to fuel heating system to provide a
Owners who have very low fuel level of protection against filter
engine, fuel system, or exhaust
usage or who have vehicles plugging from gelling (waxing) of
after-treatment system damage.
stored for extended periods of conventional diesel fuel and
time should avoid the use of biodiesel blends. However, the
system will not prevent all cases
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
of plugged filters if the operating

. Use of biodiesel blends will
temperature is far below the degrade the performance of your Warning (Continued)
temperature at which gelling or vehicle’s water separator.
waxing of the fuel occurs (cloud Biodiesel reduces the the tank slowly and only until the
point). effectiveness of the vehicle’s nozzle shuts off. Do not top it off.
water separator, and in the event Clean up any spilled fuel.
Use of biodiesel blends greater of water contamination of the
than B5 (5% blend) should be fuel, increases the risk of
avoided in cold temperatures. Accidental Refueling with
damage to the fuel system. Gasoline
. Vehicles operated for extended
periods of time on conventional Refueling
diesel fuel and then switched to Diesel fuel can foam when you fill { Caution
biodiesel blends may experience the tank. This can cause the If the vehicle is accidentally
premature fuel filter clogging and automatic pump nozzle to shut off,
refueled with gasoline, do not
require more frequent fuel filter even though the tank is not full.
continue driving the vehicle
service. If this happens, wait for the foaming
to stop, and then try filling the tank except to get to a location where
With long-term use of it can be stopped safely. Driving
conventional diesel fuel, gum more slowly. See Filling the Tank on
page 9-61. the vehicle will damage the fuel
and varnish may be deposited system. Have the vehicle towed
within the tank and fuel system. to a qualified technician to have
These deposits, while not { Warning the gasoline removed from the
problematic with the use of
Heat coming from the engine can tank, preferably until the fuel
conventional diesel fuel, may
cause the fuel to expand and gauge reads near E (Empty).
become loosened with a sudden
switch to biodiesel blends and force the fuel out of the tank. Refuel with Ultra Low Sulfur
cause fuel filter plugging. If something ignites the fuel, a fire Diesel fuel.
could start. To help avoid this, fill
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
What Fuel to Use in Diesel Fuel Types

Canada and Mexico Fuels are blended for seasonal
{ Caution
(Diesel) changes. Diesel Type A fuel is Do not use home-made biodiesel
blended for better cold weather or home test kits because the
Use only diesel fuel with ultra low starting in extreme conditions. This quality cannot be verified by
sulfur content (15 ppm maximum). may cause some power and fuel approved scientific methods. Do
economy loss. If Type A fuel is used not use raw vegetable oil or other
What Fuel to Use in Canada in warmer temperatures, stalling and unmodified bio-oils, fats,
hard starting may occur. Diesel
{ Caution Type B fuel is blended for higher
or blends of vegetable oil with
diesel. They could damage the
temperatures experienced during
Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra most of the year. fuel system and engine, and
Low Sulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur damages would not be covered
maximum) will cause damage to Premium Diesel Fuel by the vehicle warranty.
the exhaust after-treatment If available, premium diesel fuel
system. This damage would not (FQP-1A) corresponding to the Biodiesel blends
be covered by the vehicle Engine Manufacturers Association
warranty. Do not use marine, (EMA) Recommended Guideline Biodiesel blends that meet the CAN/
could provide better starting and CGSB-3.522 specifications up to
locomotive, or boiler distillate fuel
vehicle performance with less noise. 20% (B20) can be used. Avoid the
since it may contain higher sulfur
use of biodiesel blends above 20%,
levels.
Biodiesel as they may damage the engine
and fuel system. For detailed
Biodiesel is a renewable fuel
Use diesel fuel that meets CAN/ information on the use of biodiesel,
produced from vegetable oils or
CGSB-3.517 specification in see Fuel for Diesel Engines on
animal fats that have been
Canada. Contact a fuel supplier for page 9-54.
chemically modified for normal
questions about fuel. engine performance.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
What Fuel to Use in Mexico

Use diesel fuel specification
{ Warning Caution (Continued)
NOM-086 Pemex UBA, which meets Heat coming from the engine can tank, preferably until the fuel
the Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cause the fuel to expand and gauge reads near E (Empty).
requirement. This fuel is not force the fuel out of the tank. Refuel with Ultra Low Sulfur
available in all regions of Mexico. If something ignites the fuel, a fire Diesel fuel.
could start. To help avoid this, fill
{ Caution the tank slowly and only until the
Cold Weather Operation
nozzle shuts off. Do not top it off.
Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra Clean up any spilled fuel. (Diesel)
Low Sulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur
maximum) will damage the Follow the instructions under Fuel
Accidental Refueling with for Diesel Engines on page 9-54.
exhaust after-treatment system.
This damage would not be Gasoline
covered by the vehicle warranty. { Caution
{ Caution Using any fuel not approved for
Refueling If the vehicle is accidentally this vehicle can cause engine
Diesel fuel can foam when filling the refueled with gasoline, do not damage and would not be
tank. This can cause the automatic continue driving the vehicle covered by the vehicle warranty.
pump nozzle to shut off, even if the except to get to a location where See “What Fuel to Use" for the
tank is not full. If this happens, wait it can be stopped safely. Driving proper fuel.
for the foaming to stop, and then fill the vehicle will damage the fuel
the tank more slowly. See Filling the system. Have the vehicle towed In cold weather, the fuel filter could
Tank on page 9-61. to a qualified technician to have become clogged by wax naturally
the gasoline removed from the present in the fuel. To unclog it,
(Continued) move the vehicle to a warm garage
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
area and allow the filter to warm up With engine switched off, turn
to between 0°C (32°F) and 10°C ignition key to ON, wait Warning (Continued)
(50°F). You will not need to replace approximately 15 seconds, and turn
the filter. Additional information on key to LOCK to perform priming
. Do not leave the fuel pump
the fuel filter follows. operation. Perform this operation unattended.
Use of biodiesel blends greater than three times or more while the . Do not reenter the vehicle
B5 (5% blend) should be avoided in engine is switched off, to avoid air while pumping fuel.
cold temperatures. entering the fuel line. . Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
Water in Fuel (Diesel) Filling the Tank children pump fuel.
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel
The fuel filter assembly has a
sensor to determine if there
{ Warning cap is opened too quickly.
is water in the fuel. If there is This spray can happen if the
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
water in the fuel, a WATER IN tank is nearly full, and is
violently and can cause injury or
FUEL – CONTACT SERVICE more likely in hot weather.
death. Open the fuel cap slowly and
message will display. See Fuel
System Messages on page 5-29. . To help avoid injuries to you wait for any hiss noise to stop
The water will need to be drained. and others, read and follow then unscrew the cap all
See your dealer. all the instructions on the fuel the way
pump island.
Running Out of Fuel . Turn off the engine when
(Diesel) refueling.
Running out of diesel fuel requires
. Keep sparks, flames, and
priming after fuel is added. smoking materials away
from fuel.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Do not top off or overfill the tank.

Wait a few seconds before removing Caution (Continued)
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See emissions system. See
Exterior Care on page 10-88. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5-14.
{ Warning
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel notifying the station attendant.
door on the passenger side of the Leave the area immediately.
vehicle. To open the fuel door, push
and release the rearward center
edge of the door.
{ Caution
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise
to remove. Reinstall the cap by If a new fuel cap is needed, be
turning it clockwise until it clicks. sure to get the right type of cap
On vehicles with gasoline engines, from your dealer. The wrong type
of fuel cap might not fit properly, DEF is a non-toxic solution that is
if the cap is not properly installed,
might cause the malfunction sprayed into the exhaust stream of
the malfunction indicator lamp will
indicator lamp to light, and could diesel vehicles to cause a chemical
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
damage the fuel tank and reaction and break down NOx
Lamp on page 5-14.
emissions into harmless nitrogen
(Continued) and water.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
DEF is not a fuel additive and never Trailer Towing

comes into contact with diesel fuel. Warning (Continued)
It is stored in a separate tank, under
the load floor carpet in the trunk.
. Place the container on the General Towing
It has a blue filler cap. See Diesel ground. Information
Exhaust Fluid on page 9-27. . Place the nozzle inside the fill
Only use towing equipment that has
opening of the container
been designed for the vehicle.
Filling a Portable Fuel before dispensing fuel, and
Contact your dealer or trailering
keep it in contact with the fill
Container opening until filling is
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
complete.
{ Warning . Fill the container no more
the entire section before towing a
trailer.
Filling a portable fuel container than 95% full to allow for
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
while it is in the vehicle can cause expansion.
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-85.
fuel vapors that can ignite either . Do not smoke, light matches, For towing the vehicle behind
by static electricity or other or use lighters while another vehicle such as a motor
means. You or others could be pumping fuel. home, see Recreational Vehicle
badly burned and the vehicle . Avoid using cell phones or Towing on page 10-85.
could be damaged. Always: other electronic devices.
. Use approved fuel Driving Characteristics
containers. and Towing Tips
. Remove the container from Driving with a Trailer
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
bed before filling. When towing a trailer:
(Continued) . Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply
specifically to trailer towing.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Do not tow a trailer during the Towing a trailer requires a certain
first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent { Warning amount of experience. The
damage to the engine, axle or combination you are driving is
other parts. When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
. Then, during the first 800 km
the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
(500 mi) trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
do not make starts at full throttle. window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
. Vehicles with automatic When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
transmissions can tow in D . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
(Drive) but M (Manual Mode) is trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
recommended. See Manual window open. electric brakes, start the
Mode on page 9-35. Use a lower combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
gear if the transmission shifts
or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
too often. For vehicles with a
panel.
manual transmission, it is better During the trip, check occasionally
not to use the highest gear. . Also adjust the Climate to be sure that the load is secure
. Control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
Turn off Park Assist when
that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
towing.
See “Climate Control
Systems” in the Index. Towing with a Stability Control
For more information about System
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine When towing, the sound of the
Exhaust on page 9-26. stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
trailer, which mainly occurs during Making Turns lamps also flash, telling other
cornering. This is normal when drivers the vehicle is turning,
towing heavier trailers. { Caution changing lanes or stopping.
Following Distance When towing a trailer, the arrows on
Making very sharp turns while the instrument cluster flash for turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the trailering could cause the trailer to even if the bulbs on the trailer are
vehicle ahead as you would when come in contact with the vehicle. burned out. Check occasionally to
driving the vehicle without a trailer. The vehicle could be damaged. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
This can help to avoid situations Avoid making very sharp turns working.
that require heavy braking and while trailering.
sudden turns. Driving on Grades
Passing When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower
wider turns than normal so the gear before starting down a long or
More passing distance is needed steep downgrade. If the
when towing a trailer. Because the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down, the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go brakes might have to be used so
farther beyond the passed vehicle objects. Use the turn signal well in
advance and avoid jerky or sudden much that they would get hot and no
before returning to the lane. longer work well.
maneuvers.
Backing Up The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Turn Signals When Towing a Use a lower gear if the transmission
Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer
wheel with one hand. To move the shifts too often.
trailer to the left, move your hand to The turn signal indicators on the When towing at high altitude on
the left. To move the trailer to the instrument cluster flash whenever steep uphill grades, engine coolant
right, move your hand to the right. signaling a turn or lane change. boils at a lower temperature than at
Always back up slowly and, Properly hooked up, the trailer normal altitudes. If the engine is
if possible, have someone turned off immediately after towing
guide you. at high altitude on steep uphill
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
grades, the vehicle could show If parking the rig on a hill: 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
signs similar to engine overheating. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
To avoid this, let the engine run not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn clear of the chocks.
while parked, preferably on level the wheels into the curb if facing
ground, with the transmission in 4. Stop and have someone pick up
downhill or into traffic if facing and store the chocks.
P (Park) for a few minutes before uphill.
turning the engine off. If the
2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance When Trailer
overheat warning comes on, see
Engine Overheating on page 10-23. under the trailer wheels. Towing
3. When the wheel chocks are in The vehicle needs service more
Parking on Hills often when pulling a trailer. See the
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load. Maintenance Schedule on
{ Warning 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
page 11-2. Things that are
especially important in trailer
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift operation are automatic
the trailer attached can be into P (Park) for vehicles with an transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
dangerous. If something goes automatic transmission or into lubricant, belts, cooling system and
wrong, the rig could start to move. gear for vehicles with a manual brake system. Inspect these before
People can be injured, and both transmission. and during the trip.
the vehicle and the trailer can be 5. Release the brake pedal. Check periodically to see that all
damaged. When possible, always hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
park the rig on a flat surface. Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal Engine Cooling When Trailer
while you: Towing
. Start the engine. The cooling system may temporarily
. Shift into a gear. overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
. Release the parking brake. on page 10-23.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Trailer Towing (Fuel It depends on how the rig is used. curb weight of the vehicle, any
For example, speed, altitude, road cargo carried in it, and the people
Economy Model or Diesel grades, outside temperature, and who will be riding in the vehicle.
Engine) how much the vehicle is used to pull If there are a lot of options,
The vehicle is neither designed nor a trailer are all important. It can equipment, passengers, or cargo in
intended to tow a trailer. depend on any special equipment the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
on the vehicle, and the amount of weight the vehicle can carry, which
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. will also reduce the trailer weight the
Trailer Towing (Except See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
Fuel Economy Model or later in this section. the tongue load must be added to
Diesel Engine) Maximum trailer weight is calculated the GVW because the vehicle will
assuming only the driver is in the be carrying that weight, too. See
Before pulling a trailer, there are Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.
three important considerations that tow vehicle and it has all the
have to do with weight: required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
. The weight of the trailer. equipment, passengers, and cargo
. The weight of the trailer tongue. in the tow vehicle must be
subtracted from the maximum trailer
. The total weight on your
weight.
vehicle's tires.
Ask your dealer for trailering
Weight of the Trailer information or advice.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
It should never weigh more than
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that can
an important weight to measure
be too heavy.
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh Towing Equipment Safety Chains
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
Hitches Always attach chains between the
trailer weight (2).
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
After loading the trailer, weigh the Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
trailer and then the tongue, See your dealer or a hitch dealer for the trailer to help prevent the tongue
separately, to see if the weights are assistance. from contacting the road if it
proper. If they are not, adjustments . The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
might be made by moving some is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
items around in the trailer. not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
bumper-type hitches to it. Use drag on the ground.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires only a frame-mounted hitch that Trailer Brakes
does not attach to the bumper.
Be sure the vehicle's tires are Does the trailer have its own
inflated to the upper limit for cold
. Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
tires. These numbers can be found body of the vehicle when the the instructions for the trailer brakes
on the Tire and Loading Information trailer hitch is installed? If so, so they are installed, adjusted, and
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on seal the holes when the hitch is maintained properly.
page 9-9. Make sure not to go over removed. If the holes are not
sealed, dirt, water, and deadly Because the vehicle has antilock
the GVW limit for the vehicle, brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
including the weight of the trailer carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. brake system. If this is done, both
tongue. brake systems will not work well,
See Engine Exhaust on
page 9-26. or at all.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
{ Caution
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and
warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-27 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-28.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Overheated Engine
Vehicle Care Protection Operating Mode
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
(Gasoline and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-34
Engines Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-29 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Automatic Transmission Shift Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Lock Control Function Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Engine Compartment Fuse
Ignition Transmission Lock Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Park Brake and P (Park) Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30 Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Wiper Blade Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Headlamp Aiming Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Automatic Transmission Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Bulb Replacement Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Manual Transmission Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Tire Terminology and
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Headlamps, Front Turn Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17 Signal and Parking Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-23
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting General Information

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Towing the Vehicle your dealer. You will receive
When It Is Time for New Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-85 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Genuine GM parts have one of
Different Size Tires and Appearance Care these marks:
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Uniform Tire Quality
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Diesel) . . . 10-73
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-80 California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
California Perchlorate
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have
Certain types of automotive the proper knowledge, service
installation or use of non‐GM
applications, such as airbag manual, tools, or parts. Always
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, follow owner manual procedures
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in and consult the service manual
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for service work.
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
perchlorate. complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
Modifications installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
can affect vehicle performance and page 3-28.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3-27.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11-15.
{ Caution
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
Even small amounts of push the secondary hood
contamination can cause damage release handle toward the driver
to vehicle systems. Do not allow side of the vehicle.
contaminants to contact the fluids, 1. Pull up on the hood release
reservoir caps, or dipsticks. handle. It is located inside the
vehicle to the left of the steering
column.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot on the underside of the hood
and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release it
located above the radiator. so it fully latches. Check to
Securely place the hood prop make sure the hood is closed
into the slot on the underside of and repeat the process if
the hood. necessary.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 10. Engine Compartment Fuse

page 10-17. Block on page 10-38.
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See 11. Windshield Washer Fluid
“Checking Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Engine Oil on page 10-11. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of page 10-25.
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-11.
5. Remote Negative (-) Grounding
Point. See Jump Starting on
page 10-82.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes
on page 10-26 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 10-16.
7. Battery on page 10-28.
8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-19.
9. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10-82.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 10. Engine Compartment Fuse

page 10-17. Block on page 10-38.
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See 11. Windshield Washer Fluid
“Checking Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Engine Oil on page 10-11. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of page 10-25.
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-18.
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-11.
Point. See Jump Starting on
page 10-82.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes
on page 10-26 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 10-16.
7. Battery on page 10-28.
8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10-18.
page 10-82.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
2.0L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 10. Windshield Washer Fluid

. Change the engine oil at the
page 10-17. Reservoir. See “Adding Washer appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Life System on page 10-15.
2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on page 10-25. . Always dispose of engine oil
page 10-18. 11. Engine Compartment Fuse properly. See “What to Do with
Block on page 10-38. Used Oil” in this section.
Point. See Jump Starting on Checking Engine Oil
page 10-82. Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine
4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See To ensure proper engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
“Checking Engine Oil” under performance and long life, careful get an accurate reading, the vehicle
Engine Oil on page 10-11. attention must be paid to engine oil. must be on level ground. The
Following these simple, but engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When important steps will help protect
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine See Engine Compartment Overview
your investment: on page 10-6 for the location of the
Oil on page 10-11.
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See to the proper specification and of
“Brake Fluid” under Brakes on Obtaining an accurate oil level
the proper viscosity grade. See reading is essential:
page 10-26. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
7. Battery on page 10-28. in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
8. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and . Check the engine oil level allow several minutes for the oil
Pressure Cap. See Cooling regularly and maintain the to drain back into the oil pan.
System on page 10-18. proper oil level. See “Checking Checking the oil level too soon
Engine Oil” and “When to Add after engine shutoff will not
Engine Oil” in this section. provide an accurate oil level
page 10-82. reading.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil

{ Warning { Caution
The engine oil dipstick handle Do not add too much oil. Oil
may be hot; it could burn you. levels above or below the
Use a towel or glove to touch the acceptable operating range
dipstick handle. shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it Gasoline have an oil level above the
with a paper towel or cloth, then operating range, i.e., the engine
push it back in all the way. has so much oil that the oil level
Remove it again, keeping the tip gets above the cross-hatched
down, and check the level. area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
Diesel out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
If the oil is below the cross-hatched professional to remove the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add excess amount of oil.
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in See Engine Compartment Overview
this section for an explanation of on page 10-6 for the location of the
what kind of oil to use. For engine engine oil fill cap.
oil crankcase capacity, see Add enough oil to put the level
Capacities and Specifications on somewhere in the proper operating
page 12-2. range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
Selecting the Right Engine Oil always select an oil of the correct
(Gasoline Engines) { Caution specification. See “Specification”
earlier in this section.
Selecting the right engine oil Failure to use the recommended
depends on both the proper oil engine oil can result in engine Selecting the Right Engine Oil
specification and viscosity grade. damage not covered by the (Diesel Engines)
See Recommended Fluids and vehicle warranty. Check with your
Lubricants on page 11-12. Selecting the right engine oil
dealer or service provider on depends on both the proper oil
Specification whether the oil is approved to the specification and viscosity grade:
dexos1 specification.
Use and ask for licensed engine oils Specification
with the dexos1® approved
certification mark. Engine oils Viscosity Grade Use and ask for engine oils with the
meeting the requirements for the dexos2™ certification mark. Oils
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity meeting the requirements of the
vehicle should have the dexos1 grade for the vehicle. Do not use
approved certification mark. This vehicle should have the dexos2
other viscosity grade oils such as certification mark on the container.
certification mark indicates that the SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
oil has been approved to the dexos1 This certification mark indicates that
specification. Cold Temperature Operation: In an the oil has been approved to the
area of extreme cold, where the dexos2 specification. If you are
temperature falls below −29°C unsure whether the oil is approved
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-20 oil may be to the dexos2 specification, ask your
used. An oil of this viscosity grade service provider.
will provide easier cold starting for Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
the engine at extremely low dexos2 is unavailable: In the event
temperatures. When selecting an oil that dexos2-approved engine oil is
of the appropriate viscosity grade, not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
may use substitute engine oil that (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
meets ACEA C3 of the appropriate used. An oil of this viscosity grade
viscosity grade. will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
always select an oil of the correct
specification. See “Specification”
earlier in this section.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
{ Caution
Do not add anything to the oil. The
Use only engine oil that is recommended oils with the dexos
approved to the dexos2 specification and displaying the
specification or equivalent engine dexos certification mark are all that
oil as defined in the preceding is needed for good performance and
paragraph. Failure to use the engine protection.
recommended engine oil can Engine oil system flushes are not
result in engine damage not recommended and could cause
covered by the vehicle warranty. engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Viscosity Grade What to Do with Used Oil
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity Used engine oil contains certain
grade for the vehicle.* Do not use * Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the elements that can be unhealthy for
other viscosity grade oils such as your skin and could even cause
SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. temperature falls below −29°C
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
your skin for very long. Clean your indicated can vary considerably. For If the system is ever reset
skin and nails with soap and water, the oil life system to work properly, accidentally, the oil must be
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the system must be reset every time changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil is changed. since the last oil change.
containing used engine oil. See the When the system has calculated Remember to reset the oil life
manufacturer's warnings about the that oil life has been diminished, it system whenever the oil is changed.
use and disposal of oil products. indicates that an oil change is How to Reset the Engine Oil
Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Life System
environment. If you change your OIL SOON DIC message comes on.
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil See Engine Oil Messages on Reset the system whenever the
from the filter before disposal. Never page 5-29. Change the oil as soon engine oil is changed so that the
dispose of oil by putting it in the as possible within the next 1 000 km system can calculate the next
trash or pouring it on the ground, (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving engine oil change. To reset the
into sewers, or into streams or under the best conditions, the oil life system:
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system might indicate that an oil 1. Using the DIC MENU button and
it to a place that collects used oil. change is not necessary for up to a thumbwheel, scroll until you
year. The engine oil and filter must reach REMAINING OIL LIFE on
Engine Oil Life System be changed at least once a year the DIC (: % for Canada).
and, at this time, the system must
When to Change Engine Oil be reset. Your dealer has trained 2. Press the SET/CLR button to
This vehicle has a computer system service people who will perform this reset the oil life at 100%. When
that indicates when to change the work and reset the system. It is also prompted, use the thumbwheel
engine oil and filter. This is based important to check the oil regularly to highlight YES or NO. Press
on a combination of factors which over the course of an oil drain the SET/CLR button to confirm.
include engine revolutions, engine interval and keep it at the proper Be careful not to reset the oil life
temperature, and miles driven. level. display accidentally at any time
Based on driving conditions, the other than after the oil is changed.
mileage at which an oil change is It cannot be reset accurately.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Change the fluid and filter at the Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
DIC message comes back on when intervals listed in Maintenance A fluid loss in this system could
the vehicle is started, the engine oil Schedule on page 11-2, and be sure indicate a problem. Have the
life system has not reset. Repeat to use the fluid listed in system inspected and repaired.
the procedure. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12. When to Check and What
Automatic Transmission to Use
Fluid Manual Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid How to Check Manual
It is not necessary to check the Transmission Fluid
transmission fluid level. It is not necessary to check the
A transmission fluid leak is the only manual transmission fluid level. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
reason for fluid loss. If a leak A transmission fluid leak is the only reservoir cap has either a symbol or
occurs, take the vehicle to your reason for fluid loss. If a leak text specifying the type of brake
dealer and have it repaired as soon occurs, take the vehicle to your fluid. The common brake/clutch fluid
as possible. dealer and have it repaired as soon reservoir is filled with GM approved
The vehicle is not equipped with a as possible. See Recommended DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on
transmission fluid level dipstick. Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12 the reservoir cap. See Engine
There is a special procedure for for the proper fluid to use. Compartment Overview on
checking and changing the page 10-6 for reservoir location.
transmission fluid. Because this Hydraulic Clutch
procedure is difficult, this should be How to Check and Add Fluid
For vehicles with a manual
done at the dealer. Contact the transmission, it is not necessary to Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
dealer for additional information. regularly check brake/clutch fluid reservoir to make sure the fluid level
unless there is a leak suspected. is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
side of the reservoir. The brake/ How to Inspect the Engine Air 1.8L L4 Engine
hydraulic clutch fluid system should Cleaner/Filter
be closed and sealed.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
Do not remove the cap to check the remove the filter from the vehicle
fluid level or to top off the fluid level. and lightly shake the filter to release
Remove the cap only when loose dust and dirt. If the filter
necessary to add the proper fluid remains covered with dirt, a new
until the level reaches the MIN line. filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter:
See Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
on page 10-6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air 2.0L L4 Engine
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Maintenance Schedule
on page 11-2. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
1. Remove the six screws that

secure the cover on. { Caution
2. Lift off the cover. If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
3. Inspect or replace the engine air can easily get into the engine,
cleaner/filter. which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place
4. Align the filter correctly.
when you are driving.
5. Install the cover by lowering it
over the filter and secure with
the six screws. Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
{ Warning engine to maintain the correct 1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4
working temperature. Engine Similar
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or 1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
others to be burned. The air of View)
cleaner not only cleans the air; it 2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
helps to stop flames if the engine Pressure Cap
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
{ Warning Caution (Continued)

Heater and radiator hoses, and vehicle warranty. Always use
other engine parts, can be very DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, in the vehicle.
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a Engine Coolant
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could The cooling system in the vehicle is
cause an engine fire, and you filled with DEX-COOL engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
could be burned. Get any leak
2.0L L4 Engine remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out occurs first.
of View)
The following explains the cooling
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and { Caution system and how to check and add
Pressure Cap coolant when it is low. If there is a
Using coolant other than problem with engine overheating,
{ Warning DEX-COOL® can cause see Engine Overheating on
premature engine, heater core, page 10-23.
An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition,
under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require
when the engine is not running changing sooner. Any repairs
and can cause injury. Keep would not be covered by the
hands, clothing, and tools away (Continued)
from any underhood electric fan.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL Caution (Continued)
{ Warning coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added. mixture can freeze and crack
This mixture: engine cooling parts. The repairs
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down vehicle warranty. Use only the
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. for the cooling system. See
the proper coolant mixture will. . Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-12.
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by
hot but you would not get the corrosion. putting it in the trash, pouring it on
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. the ground, or into sewers, streams,
could catch fire and you or others or bodies of water. Have the coolant
. Helps keep the proper engine changed by an authorized service
could be burned. Use a temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable center, familiar with legal
water and DEX-COOL coolant. requirements regarding used
{ Caution coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
If improper coolant mixture, health.
inhibitors, or additives are used in
the vehicle cooling system, the
engine could overheat and be
damaged. Too much water in the
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the

The vehicle must be on a level Coolant Surge Tank { Warning
surface when checking the coolant Steam and scalding liquids from a
level. { Caution hot cooling system can blow out
Check to see if coolant is visible in and burn you badly. They are
This vehicle has a specific
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant under pressure, and if you turn
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
inside the coolant surge tank is the coolant surge tank pressure
follow this procedure could cause
boiling, do not do anything else until cap — even a little — they can
the engine to overheat and be
it cools down. If coolant is visible come out at high speed. Never
severely damaged.
but the coolant level is not at the turn the cap when the cooling
indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture system, including the coolant
of clean, drinkable water and If no problem is found, check to see surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant if coolant is visible in the coolant Wait for the cooling system and
surge tank, but be sure the cooling surge tank. If coolant is visible but coolant surge tank pressure cap
system is cool before this is done. the coolant level is not at the to cool if you ever have to turn
See Engine Overheating on indicated level mark, add a the pressure cap.
page 10-23. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
The coolant surge tank is located in water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
the engine compartment on the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
driver side of the vehicle. See cooling system, including the { Warning
Engine Compartment Overview on coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. Adding only plain water or some
page 10-6.
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) { Warning

The coolant warning system is set You can be burned if you spill
for the proper coolant mixture. coolant on hot engine parts.
With plain water or the wrong Coolant contains ethylene glycol
mixture, the engine could get too and it will burn if the engine parts
hot but you would not get the are hot enough. Do not spill
overheat warning. The engine coolant on a hot engine.
could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant. 1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4
Engine, and 2.0L L4 Engine
Similar
{ Caution 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
In cold weather, water can freeze system, including the coolant
and crack the engine, radiator, surge tank pressure cap and
heater core, and other parts. Use upper radiator hose, is no
the recommended coolant and longer hot.
the proper coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
will allow any pressure still left to Check the level in the coolant running. If it is not, do not continue
be vented out the surge tank when the cooling system to run the engine and have the
discharge hose. has cooled down. If the coolant is vehicle serviced.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap not at the proper level, repeat
slowly and remove it. Steps 1–3 and reinstall the pressure
cap. If the coolant still is not at the
{ Caution
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with proper level when the system cools Running the engine without
the proper DEX-COOL coolant down again, see your dealer. coolant may cause damage or a
mixture to the indicated fire. Vehicle damage would not be
level mark. Engine Overheating covered by the vehicle warranty.
4. With the coolant surge tank There is an engine coolant See Overheated Engine
pressure cap off, start the temperature gauge on the vehicle Protection Operating Mode
engine and let it run until the instrument cluster to warn of engine (Gasoline Engines Only) on
upper radiator hose can be felt overheating. See Engine Coolant page 10-25 for information on
getting hot. Watch out for the Temperature Gauge on page 5-11. driving to a safe place in an
engine cooling fan. emergency.
If the decision is made not to lift the
By this time, the coolant level hood when this warning appears,
inside the coolant surge tank get service help right away. See If Steam Is Coming from the
may be lower. If the level is Roadside Assistance Program on
lower, add more of the proper
Engine Compartment
page 13-5.
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the If the decision is made to lift the { Warning
level reaches the indicated hood, make sure the vehicle is
level mark. parked on a level surface. Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be Check to see if the engine cooling
just open the hood. Stay away
sure the pressure cap is fan is running. If the engine is
hand-tight. overheating, the fan should be (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
If No Steam Is Coming from If the temperature overheat gauge is

Warning (Continued) the Engine Compartment no longer in the overheat zone or an
overheat warning no longer
from the engine if you see or hear If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven.
steam coming from it. Just turn it displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
off and get everyone away from or heard, the problem may not be for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
the vehicle until it cools down. too serious. Sometimes the engine vehicle distance from the vehicle in
Wait until there is no sign of can get a little too hot when the front. If the warning does not come
steam or coolant before you open vehicle: back on, continue to drive normally
the hood. . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. and have the cooling system
If you keep driving when the checked for fill and function.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
engine is overheated, the liquids If the warning continues, pull over,
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
in it can catch fire. You or others stop, and park the vehicle
could be badly burned. Stop the . Tows a trailer. right away.
engine if it overheats, and get out If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the
of the vehicle until the engine with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while
is cool. parked. If the warning is still
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
displayed, turn off the engine until it
2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, for gasoline
temperature and to the highest engines only, see “Overheated
fan speed. Open the windows as Engine Protection Operating Mode”
necessary. following.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
Overheated Engine Adding Washer Fluid

Protection Operating
{ Caution
Mode (Gasoline After driving in the overheated
engine protection operating
Engines Only) mode, the engine oil will be
This emergency operating mode severely degraded. Any repairs
allows the vehicle to be driven to a performed before the engine is
safe place in an emergency cool may cause engine damage.
situation. If an overheated engine Allow the engine to cool before Open the cap with the washer
condition exists, an overheat symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
attempting any repair. Repair the
protection mode which alternates the tank is full. See Engine
cause of coolant loss, change the
firing groups of cylinders helps Compartment Overview on
oil, and reset the oil life system. page 10-6 for reservoir location.
prevent engine damage. In this See Engine Oil on page 10-11.
mode, a significant loss in power
and engine performance will be { Caution
noticed. The temperature gauge will Washer Fluid
indicate an overheat condition . Do not use engine coolant
exists. Driving extended distances What to Use (antifreeze) in the windshield
and/or towing a trailer in the washer. It can damage the
When windshield washer fluid is
overheat protection mode should be windshield washer system
needed, be sure to read the
avoided. and paint.
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an . Do not mix water with
area where the temperature may fall ready-to-use washer fluid.
below freezing, use a fluid that has Water can cause the solution
sufficient protection against (Continued)
freezing.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
The sound can come and go or be Properly torqued wheel nuts are
Caution (Continued) heard all the time the vehicle is necessary to help prevent brake
moving, except when applying the pulsation. When tires are rotated,
to freeze and damage the brake pedal firmly. inspect brake pads for wear and
washer fluid tank and other evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
parts of the washer system.
. When using concentrated
{ Warning proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
washer fluid, follow the The brake wear warning sound Specifications on page 12-2.
manufacturer instructions for means that soon the brakes will If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,
adding water. not work well. That could lead to they do not have wear indicators,
. Fill the washer fluid tank only a crash. When the brake wear but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
three-quarters full when it is warning sound is heard, have the heard, have the rear brake linings
very cold. This allows for fluid vehicle serviced. inspected immediately. Rear brake
expansion if freezing occurs, drums should be removed and
which could damage the tank inspected each time the tires are
if it is completely full. removed for rotation or changing.
{ Caution Drum brakes have an inspection
hole to inspect lining wear during
Brakes Continuing to drive with worn-out
scheduled maintenance. When the
brake pads could result in costly front brake pads are replaced, have
This vehicle has front disc brakes brake repair.
and could have rear drum brakes or the rear brakes inspected, too.
rear disc brakes. Brake linings should always be
Some driving conditions or climates replaced as complete axle sets.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
can cause a brake squeal when the
indicators that make a high-pitched Brake Pedal Travel
brakes are first applied or lightly
warning sound when the brake pads
applied. This does not mean See your dealer if the brake pedal
are worn and new pads are needed.
something is wrong with the brakes. does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
pedal travel. This could be a sign change in many other ways if the
. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
that brake service might be wrong replacement brake parts are hydraulic system can also cause
required. installed. a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid since a leak means that sooner
Every time the brakes are applied, or later the brakes will not
with or without the vehicle moving, work well.
the brakes adjust for wear. Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
Replacing Brake System Parts If fluid is added when the linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is worn, there will be too much fluid
complex. Its many parts have to be when new brake linings are
of top quality and work well together The brake/clutch master cylinder installed. Add or remove fluid, as
if the vehicle is to have really good reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake necessary, only when work is done
braking. The vehicle was designed fluid as indicated on the reservoir on the brake/clutch hydraulic
and tested with top-quality brake cap. See Engine Compartment system.
parts. When parts of the braking Overview on page 10-6 for the
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
location of the reservoir. { Warning
If this is not done, the brakes might There are only two reasons why the If too much brake fluid is added, it
not work properly. For example, brake fluid level in the reservoir can spill on the engine and burn,
installing disc brake pads that are might go down: if the engine is hot enough. You
wrong for the vehicle, can change . The brake fluid level goes down or others could be burned, and
the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining the vehicle could be damaged.
rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are Add brake fluid only when work is
braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes done on the brake/clutch
back up. hydraulic system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
Checking Brake Fluid Always clean the brake/clutch fluid

reservoir cap and the area around Caution (Continued)
The brake/clutch fluid can be
the cap before removing it. This
checked without taking off the cap be replaced. Do not let
helps keep dirt from entering the
by looking at the brake/clutch fluid someone put in the wrong
reservoir.
reservoir. kind of fluid.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake/
{ Warning . If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
clutch hydraulic system checked to With the wrong kind of fluid in the the paint finish can be
see if there is a leak. brake/clutch hydraulic system, the damaged. Be careful not to
After work is done on the brake/ brakes might not work well. This spill brake fluid on the
clutch hydraulic system, make sure could cause a crash. Always use vehicle. If you do, wash it off
the level is above MIN but not over the proper brake/clutch fluid. immediately.
the MAX mark.
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a Battery
low level, the brake warning light
comes on. See Brake System
{ Caution Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
Warning Light on page 5-16. . Using the wrong fluid can new battery is needed.
badly damage brake/clutch
What to Add
hydraulic system parts. For
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid example, just a few drops of { Warning
from a sealed container. See mineral-based oil, such as
Battery posts, terminals, and
Recommended Fluids and engine oil, in the brake
Lubricants on page 11-12. related accessories contain lead
hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts and lead compounds, chemicals
so badly that they will have to (Continued)
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
Warning (Continued)
Starter Switch Check For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
known to the State of California to { Warning down halfway, and try to start
cause cancer and reproductive the engine. The vehicle should
harm. Wash hands after handling. When you are doing this
start only when the clutch pedal
inspection, the vehicle could
is pushed down all the way to
move suddenly. If the vehicle
Vehicle Storage the floor. If the vehicle starts
moves, you or others could be when the clutch pedal is not
injured. pushed all the way down,
{ Warning contact your dealer for service.
Batteries have acid that can burn 1. Before starting this check, be
you and gas that can explode. sure there is enough room Automatic Transmission
You can be badly hurt if you are around the vehicle. Shift Lock Control
not careful. See Jump Starting on 2. Apply both the parking brake Function Check
page 10-82 for tips on working and the regular brake.
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
{ Warning
the engine immediately if it When you are doing this
Infrequent Usage: Remove the starts. inspection, the vehicle could
black, negative (−) cable from the 3. For automatic transmission move suddenly. If the vehicle
battery to keep the battery from vehicles, try to start the engine moves, you or others could be
running down. in each gear. The vehicle should injured.
Extended Storage: Remove the start only in P (Park) or
black, negative (−) cable from the N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
battery or use a battery trickle in any other position, contact
charger. your dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
1. Before starting this check, be shift lever is in P (Park). The Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
sure there is enough room ignition key should come out vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
around the vehicle. It should be only in LOCK/OFF. your foot on the regular brake, set
parked on a level surface. . For manual transmission the parking brake.
2. Apply the parking brake. Be vehicles, the ignition key should . To check the parking brake's
ready to apply the regular brake come out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
immediately if the vehicle begins Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in
to move. required. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
3. With the engine off, turn the pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
ignition on, but do not start the Park Brake and P (Park) held by the parking brake only.
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
Mechanism Check . To check the P (Park)
shift lever out of P (Park) with mechanism's holding ability:
normal effort. If the shift lever { Warning With the engine running, shift to
moves out of P (Park), contact P (Park). Then release the
your dealer for service. When you are doing this check, parking brake followed by the
the vehicle could begin to move. regular brake.
Ignition Transmission You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged. Contact your dealer if service is
Lock Check Make sure there is room in front required.
While parked, and with the parking of the vehicle in case it begins to
brake set, try to turn the ignition to roll. Be ready to apply the regular Wiper Blade Replacement
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever brake at once should the vehicle Windshield wiper blades should be
position. begin to move. inspected for wear or cracking. See
. For automatic transmission Maintenance Schedule on
vehicles, the ignition should turn page 11-2 for more information.
to LOCK/OFF only when the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Replacement blades come in 5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper

different types and are removed in blade replacement.
different ways. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and
type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
{ Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch 2. Lift up on the plastic latch (2) in
the windshield when no wiper the middle of the wiper blade
blade is installed could damage where the wiper arm attaches.
the windshield. Any damage that 3. With the latch open, pull the
occurs would not be covered by wiper blade (3) down toward the
your warranty. Do not allow the windshield far enough to release
wiper arm to touch the windshield. it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
To replace the windshield wiper 4. Remove the wiper blade.
blade: Allowing the wiper blade arm to
1. Pull the wiper assembly (1) touch the windshield when no
away from the windshield. wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade to touch the windshield.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement Signal and Parking
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-37.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure 1. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. 2. High-Beam Headlamp/
Low-Beam Headlamp and DRL
High-Beam Headlamp/
Low-Beam Headlamp and DRL
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-4.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
2. For the driver side bulb, remove 5. Remove the bulb (3) from the 2. For the driver side bulb, remove
the windshield washer bottle headlamp assembly by turning the windshield washer bottle
filler neck by firmly pulling it counterclockwise and pulling filler neck by firmly pulling it
straight up and out of the bottle. straight back. straight up and out of the bottle.
6. Install the new bulb in the
headlamp assembly by turning
clockwise.
7. Install the wiring harness
connector to the bulb. Be sure
the connector release (2) locks
into place.
8. Install the connector
retaining tab (1).
9. For the driver side, reinstall the
windshield washer bottle filler
neck by firmly pushing it straight
3. Remove the connector into the bottle. Ensure that the 3. Remove the parking/turn signal
retaining tab (1). filler neck clip engages into the lamp bulb socket from the
4. Disconnect the wiring harness underhood electrical center headlamp assembly by turning
connector from the bulb (3) by retainer. counterclockwise.
pressing the connector Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
release (2) and pulling
straight back. 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-4.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb 2. Remove the trunk deck trim
socket. cover (1).
5. Install the new bulb in the bulb 3. Remove the bulb socket (2) by
socket. turning counterclockwise and
6. Install the bulb socket into the Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps pulling straight out.
headlamp assembly by turning 1. Open the trunk.
clockwise.
7. For the driver side, reinstall the
windshield washer bottle filler
neck by firmly pushing it straight
into the bottle. Ensure that the
filler neck clip engages into the
underhood electrical center
retainer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
4. Remove the bulb from the 1. Sidemarker Lamp 2. Open the two screw covers.
socket. 2. Turn Signal Lamp
5. Install the new bulb in the bulb 3. Stoplamp/Taillamp
socket.
4. Back-up Lamp
6. Install the bulb socket by turning
clockwise. To replace any one of these bulbs:
7. Install the trunk deck trim cover. Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,

Back-up, and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the two screws that 8. Install the taillamp assembly and
secure the taillamp assembly. tighten the two screws.
9. Close the two screw covers.
License Plate Lamp

To replace the license plate
lamp bulb:
3. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and pull
straight out of the lamp
4. Remove the taillamp assembly assembly.
by pulling it straight back. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
5. Remove the bulb socket from straight out of the socket.
the taillamp assembly by turning 5. Push the new bulb into the
it counterclockwise. socket.
6. Install a new bulb into the bulb 1. Remove the two screws from the 6. Install the bulb socket by turning
socket. license plate lamp assembly. clockwise into the license plate
7. Install the bulb socket into the 2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp assembly.
taillamp assembly by turning it lamp assembly down. 7. Replace the license plate lamp
clockwise. assembly and tightien the two
screws to secure.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-37
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Headlamp Wiring

Bulb An electrical overload may cause
Exterior Lamp
Number Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
Back-Up Lamp 921K headlamp wiring checked right away
Front and Rear 194 The vehicle has fuses and circuit if the lamps go on and off or
Sidemarker breakers to protect against an remain off.
electrical system overload.
Front Parking/Turn 7444NA Windshield Wipers
Signal Lamp When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to
High‐Beam/Low‐ H13LL and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Bean and DRL until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools
Headlamp normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart.
License Plate Lamp W5W LL greatly reduces the chance of circuit Although the circuit is protected
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
Rear Turn 7443NA electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may
Signal Lamp
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage.
Stoplamp/Taillamp 3057K LCP power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
For replacement bulbs not listed Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers.
here, contact your dealer. of the identical size and rating.
If the overload is caused by an
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed.
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

Breakers Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can To remove the fuse block cover,
be temporarily borrowed from squeeze the clips and swing it up.
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible. { Caution
To identify and check fuses, circuit Spilling liquid on any electrical
breakers, and relays, see Engine component on the vehicle may
Compartment Fuse Block on damage it. Always keep the
page 10-38 and Instrument Panel covers on any electrical
Fuse Block on page 10-42. component.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Mini Fuses Usage
1 Transmission
Control Module
2 Engine Control
Module
3 Not Used
4 Canister Vent
Solenoid
5 Ignition
7 Not Used
8 Fuel Injection
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
9 Fuel Injection/
Ignition System
10 Engine Control
Module
11 Lambda Sensor
13 Canister Vent
Solenoid
14 LTE
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

15 Rear Wiper 36 Not Used 57 Not Used
16 Ignition/Air Quality 37 High Beam 58 Not Used
Sensor/Aero-Shutter Right Side
60 Heated Mirror
17 Ignition/Airbag 38 High Beam Left Side
61 Heated Mirror
18 Fuel Control Module 39 Not Used
62 Air Conditioning
19 Not Used 40 Not Used
63 Rear Window
20 Fuel Pump 46 Cooling Fan Sensor
23 Not Used 47 Lambda Sensor 64 Air Quality Sensor
29 Not Used 48 Fog Lights 65 Rear Fog Lamp
30 Antilock Brake 49 Not Used 66 Rear Washer
System
50 Not Used 67 Fuel System Control
31 Body Control Module
51 Horn
Module
68 Not Used
52 Ignition
32 Body Control
69 Battery Voltage
Module 53 Automatic Dimming
Sensor
Rearview Mirror
33 Front Seat Heating
70 Not Used
54 Light Switch/Light
34 Sunroof (If
Control 71 Not Used
Equipped)
55 Mirror Folding
35 Infotainment
System/Amplifier 56 Windshield Washer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
J-Case Usage J-Case Usage HC Relays Usage

Fuses Fuses
9 Cooling Fan K2
6 Front Wipers 45 Cooling Fan K1
13 Cooling Fan K1
12 Starter Solenoid 59 Diesel Fuel Heating
21 Rear Power Mini Relays Usage
Windows Micro Usage
7 Ignition 87 Main
Relays
22 Not Used 15 Ignition 15
1 A/C Clutch
24 Front Power 16 Diesel Fuel Heating/
Windows 2 Starter Solenoid
SEC Air Pump
25 Electronic 4 Front Wiper Speed
17 Window and Mirror
Vacuum Pump 5 Front Wiper On Defogger
26 Antilock Brake 6 Not Used
System Pump
10 Cooling Fan K3
27 Electronic Key
System/PEPS 12 Cooling Fan K3
28 Rear Window 14 Not Used
Defogger
41 Not Used U-Micro Usage
Relays
42 Cooling Fan K2
3 Cooling Fan K7
43 Not Used
8 Fuel Pump
44 Not Used
11 Not Used
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-42 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
Block features shown.
Fuses Usage
1 Infotainment
System/Hands-free
Phone
2 Not Used
3 Body Control
Module
4 Infotainment System
5 Information Display/
Parking Assist
The instrument panel fuse block is 6 Cigarette Lighter
in the driver side of the instrument
7 Power Outlet
panel. To access the fuses:
8 Body Control
1. Open the fuse block cover by
Module
pulling out at the top.
2. Remove the lower edge of the 9 Body Control
cover. Module
3. Remove the cover. Instrument Panel Fuse Block 10 Body Control

Module
To reinstall the cover, reverse the
steps above. 11 Interior Fan
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Wheels and Tires

12 Not Used 26 Not Used
Tires
13 Power Seat
Relays Usage Every new GM vehicle has
14 Diagnostic
1 Trunk Open high-quality tires made by a
Connector
leading tire manufacturer. See
15 Airbag 2 Not Used the warranty manual for
16 Central Locking 3 RAP Relay information regarding the tire
System/Tailgate warranty and where to get
17 Air Conditioning
service. For additional
System information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
18 Not Used
19 Not Used { Warning
20 Not Used . Poorly maintained and
21 Instrument Cluster improperly used tires are
22 Ignition/Electronic dangerous.
Key System . Overloading the tires can
23 Body Control cause overheating as a
Module result of too much flexing.
24 Body Control There could be a blowout
Module (Continued)
25 Not Used
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with
and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are
Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall
page 9-9. is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces
replace them. and weather conditions. Original
. Underinflated tires pose equipment tires designed to GM's
the same danger as . Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria
overloaded tires. The have been damaged by have a TPC specification code
resulting crash could impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original
cause serious injury. curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be
Check all tires frequently identified by the last two characters
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will
to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. be “MS.”
the dealer or an
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
Consider installing winter tires on
checked when the tires the vehicle if frequent driving on
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is
are cold. replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires. adequate performance for most
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h may not offer the same level of
impact — such as when traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
hitting a pothole. Keep surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended See Winter Tires on page 10-45.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-45

. Use only radial ply tires of the
Winter Tires same size, load range, and Caution (Continued)
This vehicle was not originally speed rating as the original
equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires. with road hazards like potholes,
tires are designed for increased or sharp edged objects, or when
Winter tires with the same speed
traction on snow and ice-covered sliding into a curb. The warranty
rating as the original equipment tires
roads. Consider installing winter does not cover this type of
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
tires on the vehicle if frequent damage. Keep tires set to the
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
driving on ice or snow covered correct inflation pressure and
tires with a lower speed rating are
roads is expected. See your dealer when possible, avoid contact with
chosen, never exceed the tire's
for details regarding winter tire curbs, potholes, and other road
maximum speed capability.
availability and proper tire selection. hazards.
Also, see Buying New Tires on
page 10-59. Low-Profile Tires
With winter tires, there may be If the vehicle has P225/45R18 Tire Sidewall Labeling
decreased dry road traction, size tires, they are classified as Useful information about a tire is
increased road noise, and shorter low-profile tires. molded into its sidewall. The
tread life. After changing to winter examples show a typical
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
{ Caution passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
If using winter tires: Low-profile tires are more
susceptible to damage from road
. Use tires of the same brand and hazards or curb impact than
tread type on all four wheel standard profile tires. Tire and/or
positions. wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification (4) Tire Identification Number

code molded onto the sidewall. (TIN): The letters and numbers
GM's TPC specifications meet or following the DOT (Department
exceed all federal safety of Transportation) code are the
guidelines. Tire Identification Number (TIN).
(3) DOT (Department of The TIN shows the
Transportation): The manufacturer and plant code,
Department of Transportation tire size, and date the tire was
(DOT) code indicates that the manufactured. The TIN is
tire is in compliance with the molded onto both sides of the
U.S. Department of tire, although only one side may
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example Transportation Motor Vehicle have the date of manufacture.
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Safety Standards. (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
combination of letters and DOT Tire Date of of cord and number of plies in
numbers used to define a Manufacture: The last four the sidewall and under the tread.
particular tire's width, height, digits of the TIN indicate the (6) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, tire manufactured date. The first Grading (UTQG): Tire
and service description. See the two digits represent the week manufacturers are required to
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (01–52) and the last two digits, grade tires based on three
section. the year. For example, the third performance factors: treadwear,
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would traction, and temperature
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date resistance. For more information
Specification): Original of 0310. see Uniform Tire Quality
equipment tires designed to Grading on page 10-61.
GM's specific tire performance
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-47
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
support that load. Tire on page 10-80 and If a Tire information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10-64. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10-51.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the (7) TPC Spec (Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example tire, although only one side may Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture. Specification): Original
(1) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in (4) Maximum Cold Inflation equipment tires designed to
the sidewall and under the tread. Load Limit: Maximum load that GM's specific tire performance
can be carried and the criteria have a TPC specification
(2) Temporary Use Only: The
maximum pressure needed to code molded onto the sidewall.
compact spare tire or temporary
support that load. GM's TPC specifications meet or
use tire should not be driven at
exceed all federal safety
speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
guidelines.
The compact spare tire is for
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
Tire Size height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
The following is an example of a For example, if the tire size
typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
tire size. item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
The letter R means radial ply or psi (pounds per square inch).
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply Accessory Weight: The
The United States version of a combined weight of optional
metric tire sizing system. The construction; and the letter B
means belted-bias ply accessories. Some examples of
letter P as the first character in optional accessories are
the tire size means a passenger construction.
automatic transmission, power
vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of windows, power seats, and air
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. conditioning.
and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These Aspect Ratio: The relationship
(2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load of a tire's height to its width.
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords between the plies and the and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
tread. Cords may be made from passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
steel or other reinforcing DOT Markings: A code molded page 9-9.
materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
alternate angles less than tire used on light duty trucks and
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, some multipurpose passenger
the tread. vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9-9.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10-51. Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9-9.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An
pressure for that tire. of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A a tire indicating the maximum
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and speed at which a tire can
weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and operate.
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
production options weight. Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire that
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown comes into contact with
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Limits on page 9-9. Pressure on page 10-51 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Occupant Distribution : bands, sometimes called wear
Designated seating positions. page 9-9.
bars, that show across the tread
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10-58.
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads information system that provides
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. consumers with ratings for a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
tire's traction, temperature, and recommended inflation pressure.

treadwear. Ratings are See “Tire and Loading Caution (Continued)
determined by tire Information Label” under Vehicle . Reduced fuel economy.
manufacturers using Load Limits on page 9-9.
government testing procedures. Overinflated tires, or tires that
The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure have too much air, can
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform result in:
Tires need the correct amount of
Tire Quality Grading on air pressure to operate
. Unusual wear.
page 10-61. effectively. . Poor handling.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The . Rough ride.
number of designated seating { Caution . Needless damage from
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated Neither tire underinflation nor road hazards.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load overinflation is good.
Limits on page 9-9. Underinflated tires, or tires
The Tire and Loading
that do not have enough air,
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Information label on the vehicle
can result in:
Tire: Load on an individual tire indicates the original equipment
due to curb weight, accessory . Tire overloading and tires and the correct cold tire
weight, occupant weight, and overheating which could inflation pressures. The
cargo weight. lead to a blowout. recommended pressure is the
. Premature or minimum air pressure needed to
Vehicle Placard: A label
irregular wear. support the vehicle's maximum
permanently attached to a
load carrying capacity. See
vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling. Vehicle Load Limits on
capacity weight and the original (Continued) page 9-9.
equipment tire size and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor
affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire System
comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System
designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
matches the recommended levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
When to Check
pressure on the Tire and the air pressure in your tires and
Check the tires once a month or Loading Information label, no transmit tire pressure readings to a
more. Do not forget the compact further adjustment is necessary. receiver located in the vehicle.
spare, if the vehicle has one. If the inflation pressure is low,
Each tire, including the spare (if
The cold compact spare tire add air until the recommended provided), should be checked
pressure should be at 420 kPa pressure is reached. If the monthly when cold and inflated to
(60 psi). See Compact Spare inflation pressure is high, press the inflation pressure recommended
Tire on page 10-80. on the metal stem in the center by the vehicle manufacturer on the
How to Check of the tire valve to release air. vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
Use a good quality pocket-type Recheck the tire pressure with tires of a different size than the size
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge. indicated on the vehicle placard or
Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the tire inflation pressure label, you
determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks should determine the proper tire
Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture. inflation pressure for those tires.)
when the tires are cold, meaning As an added safety feature, your
the vehicle has not been driven vehicle has been equipped with a
for at least three hours or no tire pressure monitoring system
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Radio Frequency Statement on
of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure page 13-15.
under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for Tire Pressure Monitor
approximately one minute and then
pressure telltale illuminates, you
remain continuously illuminated.
Operation
should stop and check your tires as
This sequence will continue upon This vehicle may have a Tire
soon as possible, and inflate them
subsequent vehicle start-ups as Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
long as the malfunction exists. The TPMS is designed to warn the
significantly under-inflated tire
driver when a low tire pressure
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
mounted onto each tire and wheel
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
assembly, excluding the spare tire
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
sensors monitor the air pressure in
ability. of reasons, including the installation
the tires and transmit the tire
Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure readings to a receiver
substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
located in the vehicle.
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to
illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
Your vehicle has also been properly.
equipped with a TPMS malfunction When a low tire pressure condition
indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10-53.
the low tire pressure warning light
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
located on the instrument cluster. A Tire and Loading Information label

If the warning light comes on, stop shows the size of the original Caution (Continued)
as soon as possible and inflate the equipment tires and the correct
tires to the recommended pressure inflation pressure for the tires when the GM approved tire sealant
shown on the Tire and Loading they are cold. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or
Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9, for an example included in the vehicle.
Limits on page 9-9. of the Tire and Loading Information
A message to check the pressure in label and its location. Also see Tire Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
a specific tire displays in the Driver Pressure on page 10-51. use a GM-approved liquid tire
Information Center (DIC) display. The TPMS can warn about a low sealant. Using non-approved tire
The low tire pressure warning light tire pressure condition but it does sealants could damage the TPMS
and the DIC warning message come not replace normal tire sensors. See Tire Sealant and
on at each ignition cycle until the maintenance. See Tire Inspection Compressor Kit on page 10-66 for
tires are inflated to the correct on page 10-56, Tire Rotation on information regarding the inflator kit
inflation pressure. Using the DIC, page 10-57 and Tires on materials and instructions.
tire pressure levels can be viewed. page 10-43.
For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
{ Caution
Center (DIC) on page 5-23. Tire sealant materials are not all
The low tire pressure warning light the same. A non-approved tire
may come on in cool weather when sealant could damage the TPMS
the vehicle is first started, and then sensors. TPMS sensor damage
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This caused by using an incorrect tire
could be an early indicator that the sealant is not covered by the
air pressure is getting low and must vehicle warranty. Always use only
be inflated to the proper pressure. (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or
Message process was not done or not being near facilities using radio
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the
The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS
if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction.
are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
system detects a malfunction, the If the TPMS is not functioning
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See
about one minute and then stays on low tire condition. See your dealer
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section.
cycle. A DIC warning message also light and DIC message come on
displays. The malfunction light and
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on.
DIC warning message come on at missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the malfunction TPMS Sensor Matching
each ignition cycle until the problem Process
is corrected. Some of the conditions light should go off when the
that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique
on are: the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the
replaced with the spare tire. The tires or replacing one or more of the
spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
TPMS sensor. The malfunction matching process should also be
light and DIC message should tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended performed after replacing a spare
go off after the road tire is tire with a road tire containing the
replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying TPMS sensor. The malfunction light
matching process is performed and the DIC message should go off
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 10-59.
at the next ignition cycle. The
Matching Process" later in this sensors are matched to the tire/
section. wheel positions, using a TPMS
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
relearn tool, in the following 5. Press the SET/CLR button to 10. Proceed to the passenger side
order: driver side front tire, begin the sensor matching rear tire, and repeat the
passenger side front tire, passenger process. procedure in Step 8.
side rear tire, and driver side rear. A message requesting 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
See your dealer for service or to acceptance of the process tire, and repeat the procedure
purchase a relearn tool. should display. in Step 8. The horn sounds two
There are two minutes to match the 6. Press the SET/CLR button again times to indicate the sensor
first tire/wheel position, and to confirm the selection. identification code has been
five minutes overall to match all four matched to the driver side rear
tire/wheel positions. If it takes The horn sounds twice to signal tire, and the TPMS sensor
longer, the matching process stops the receiver is in relearn mode matching process is no longer
and must be restarted. and the TIRE LEARNING active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on ACTIVE message on the DIC
The TPMS sensor matching the DIC screen.
process is: display screen goes off.
7. Start with the driver side 12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
1. Set the parking brake. front tire.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 13. Set all four tires to the
8. Place the relearn tool against recommended air pressure
the engine off. the tire sidewall, near the valve level as indicated on the Tire
3. Use the MENU button to select stem. Then press the button to and Loading Information label.
the Vehicle Information menu in activate the TPMS sensor.
the Driver Information A horn chirp confirms that the Tire Inspection
Center (DIC). sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and We recommend that the tires,
4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to
the Tire Pressure Menu item wheel position. including the spare tire, if the
screen. 9. Proceed to the passenger side vehicle has one, be inspected
front tire, and repeat the for signs of wear or damage at
procedure in Step 8. least once a month.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
Replace the tire if: Tire Rotation

. The indicators at three or Tires should be rotated every
more places around the tire 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
can be seen. Maintenance Schedule on
. There is cord or fabric page 11-2.
showing through the tire's Tires are rotated to achieve a
rubber. uniform wear for all tires. The
. The tread or sidewall is first rotation is the most
cracked, cut, or snagged important.
deep enough to show cord or Anytime unusual wear is
fabric. noticed, rotate the tires as soon Use this rotation pattern when
. The tire has a bump, bulge, as possible, check for proper tire rotating the tires.
or split. inflation pressure, and check for
Do not include the compact
damaged tires or wheels. If the
. The tire has a puncture, cut, spare tire in the tire rotation.
unusual wear continues after the
or other damage that cannot rotation, check the wheel Adjust the front and rear tires to
be repaired well because of alignment. See When It Is Time the recommended inflation
the size or location of the for New Tires on page 10-58 pressure on the Tire and
damage. and Wheel Replacement on Loading Information label after
page 10-63. the tires have been rotated. See
Tire Pressure on page 10-51
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-9.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Lightly coat the center of the
System. See Tire Pressure wheel hub with wheel bearing
Monitor Operation on grease after a wheel change or
page 10-53. tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Check that all wheel nuts are or rust build-up. Do not get
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease on the flat wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities mounting surface or on the
and Specifications on wheel nuts or bolts.
page 12-2.
When It Is Time for New
{ Warning Tires
Factors such as maintenance, Treadwear indicators are one way to
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the temperatures, driving speeds, tell when it is time for new tires.
parts to which it is fastened, can vehicle loading, and road conditions Treadwear indicators appear when
make wheel nuts become loose affect the wear rate of the tires. the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
after time. The wheel could come or less of tread remaining. See Tire
off and cause an accident. When Inspection on page 10-56 and Tire
changing a wheel, remove any Rotation on page 10-57.
rust or dirt from places where the The rubber in tires ages over time.
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In This also applies to the spare tire,
an emergency, a cloth or a paper if the vehicle has one, even if it is
towel can be used; however, use never used. Multiple factors
a scraper or wire brush later to including temperatures, loading
remove all rust or dirt. conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
equipped, be replaced after at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's
six years, regardless of tread wear. raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the
The tire manufacturer date is the weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
last four digits of the DOT Tire design, the TPC Spec number
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10-45.
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
Vehicle Storage system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park performance may be adversely
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
substances that can deteriorate the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
rubber. Rotation on page 10-57.
vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling, However, if it is necessary to
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire replace only one axle set of
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring worn tires, place the new tires
driving. When storing a vehicle for on the rear axle.
performance. GM's TPC Spec
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
Winter tires with the same speed sure they are the same size,
rating as the original equipment { Warning load range, speed rating, and
tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes, construction (radial) as the
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause original tires.
tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire
tires’ maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system
when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
{ Warning See Tire Pressure Monitor
Tires could explode during System on page 10-52.
improper service. Attempting { Warning The Tire and Loading
to mount or dismount a tire Information label indicates the
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9-9.
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking,
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
electronic systems such as antilock 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
or to some limited-production
control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
affected. and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
example: and light trucks may vary with
{ Warning respect to these grades, they
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A safety requirements and
there may not be an acceptable additional General Motors Tire
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
tires not recommended for those standards.
wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This These Grades.
have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades Treadwear
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
See Buying New Tires on most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
page 10-59 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
Modifications on page 10-3. (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade are not necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. Consider an alignment check
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all if there is unusual tire wear or the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet vehicle is significantly pulling to one
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety side or the other. Some slight pull to
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and the left or right, depending on the
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of crown of the road and/or other road
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel

or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor Caution (Continued)
vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire
to be rebalanced. See your dealer chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
{ Warning
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Replacing a wheel with a used
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing one is dangerous. How it has
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct been used or how far it has been
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel driven may be unknown. It could
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement. fail suddenly and cause a crash.
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
Your dealer will know the kind of new GM original equipment
wheel.
wheel that is needed. { Caution
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
diameter, width, offset, and be problems with bearing life, brake
mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or
replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Warning
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
{ Warning while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-43. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a
proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
suspension, or other vehicle that has been driven on while
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the severely underinflated or flat.
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
control and a crash. the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then possible.
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ Warning
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting under
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the it to do maintenance or repairs is
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to dangerous without the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
the instructions below. Then see

Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) Tire Changing on page 10-73. To
use the tire sealant and compressor
changing a flat tire. If it is used for level place to change the tire. To kit, see Tire Sealant and
anything else, you or others could help prevent the vehicle from Compressor Kit on page 10-66.
be badly injured or killed if the moving:
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
use it for changing a flat tire. 2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road, 3. Turn off the engine and do
if possible. Turn on the hazard not restart while the vehicle
warning flashers. See Hazard is raised.
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. 4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
{ Warning 5. Place wheel blocks on both
To use the wheel blocks, lift the
Changing a tire can be sides of the tire at the
wheel block and lock it into place.
dangerous. The vehicle can slip opposite corner of the tire
being changed. When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
off the jack and roll over or fall
use the following example as a
causing injury or death. Find a guide to assist in the placement of
(Continued) This vehicle may come with a jack, the wheel blocks (1).
spare tire, and wheel block(s) or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To
use the jacking equipment to
change a spare tire safely, follow
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-66 Vehicle Care

It can cause unconsciousness Storing the tire sealant and
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
engine in an enclosed area that equipment in the passenger
has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine cause injury. In a sudden stop or
Exhaust on page 9-26. collision, loose equipment could
1. Wheel Block strike someone. Store the tire
2. Flat Tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
The following information explains { Warning
how to repair or change a tire.
Overinflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
Tire Sealant and the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a
others could be injured. Be sure spare tire, tire changing equipment,
Compressor Kit to read and follow the tire sealant and on some vehicles there may not
and compressor kit instructions be a place to store a tire.
{ Warning and inflate the tire to its The tire sealant and compressor
recommended pressure. Do not can be used to temporarily seal
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 inch) in
area with poor ventilation is pressure. the tread area of the tire. It can also
dangerous. Engine exhaust may be used to inflate an under
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust inflated tire.
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
(Continued) or has a large puncture, the tire is
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
too severely damaged for the tire 6. Air Only Hose (Black) Using the Tire Sealant and
sealant and compressor kit to be 7. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Compressor Kit to Temporarily
effective. See Roadside Assistance Seal and Inflate a
Program on page 13-5. Tire Sealant Punctured Tire
Read and follow all of the tire Read and follow the safe handling
sealant and compressor kit instructions on the label adhered to
instructions. the sealant canister.
The kit includes: Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose When using the tire sealant and
assembly must be replaced. See compressor kit during cold
“Removal and Installation of the temperatures, warm the kit in a
Sealant Canister” following. heated environment for five minutes.
1. Air Compressor This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
2. Tire Sealant Canister
3. Power Plug
4. On/Off Button
5. Pressure Gauge
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap from The compressor will inject
and wheel damage by driving slowly the flat tire by turning it sealant and air into the tire.
to a level place. Turn on the hazard counterclockwise. The pressure gauge (5) will
warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (7) initially show a high pressure
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. onto the tire valve stem. Turn it while the compressor pushes the
See If a Tire Goes Flat on clockwise until it is tight. sealant into the tire. Once the
page 10-64 for other important 6. Plug the power plug (3) into the sealant is completely dispersed
safety warnings. accessory power outlet in the into the tire, the pressure will
Do not remove any objects that vehicle. Unplug all items from quickly drop and start to rise
have penetrated the tire. other accessory power outlets. again as the tire inflates with
See Power Outlets on page 5-6. air only.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle has an accessory 9. Inflate the tire to the
location. See Storing the Tire power outlet, do not use the recommended inflation pressure
Sealant and Compressor Kit on cigarette lighter. using the pressure gauge (5).
page 10-72 or Storing the Tire The recommended inflation
If the vehicle only has a cigarette pressure can be found on the
Sealant and Compressor Kit lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
(Diesel) on page 10-73. Tire and Loading Information
Do not pinch the power plug label. See Tire Pressure on
Make sure the on/off button (4) cord in the door or window. page 10-51.
is in the off (O) position.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The pressure gauge (5) may
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (7) must be running while using the read higher than the actual tire
and the power plug (3). air compressor. pressure while the compressor is
3. Place the kit on the ground. on. Turn the compressor off to
8. Press the on/off button (4) to get an accurate pressure
Make sure the tire valve stem is turn the tire sealant and reading. The compressor may
positioned close to the ground compressor kit on. be turned on/off until the correct
so the hose will reach it. pressure is reached.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
Be careful while handling the maximum speed label from the

{ Caution tire sealant and compressor kit sealant canister (2) and place it
as it could be warm after in a highly visible location.
If the recommended pressure usage.
cannot be reached after Do not exceed the speed on
approximately 25 minutes, the 11. Unplug the power plug (3) from this label until the damaged tire
vehicle should not be driven the accessory power outlet in is repaired or replaced.
farther. The tire is too severely the vehicle. 16. Return the equipment to its
damaged and the tire sealant and 12. Turn the sealant/air hose (7) original storage location in the
compressor kit cannot inflate the counterclockwise to remove it vehicle.
tire. Remove the power plug from from the tire valve stem. 17. Immediately drive the vehicle
the accessory power outlet and 13. Replace the tire valve 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
unscrew the inflating hose from stem cap. sealant in the tire.
the tire valve. See Roadside
14. Replace the sealant/air hose 18. Stop at a safe location and
Assistance Program on
(7), and the power plug (3) check the tire pressure. Refer
page 13-5.
back in their original location. to Steps 1–11 under “Using the
Tire Sealant and Compressor
10. Press the on/off button (4) to Kit without Sealant to Inflate a
turn the tire sealant and Tire (Not Punctured).”
compressor kit off. If the tire pressure has fallen
The tire is not sealed and will more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
continue to leak air until the below the recommended
vehicle is driven and the inflation pressure, stop driving
sealant is distributed in the tire. 15. If the flat tire was able to inflate the vehicle. The tire is too
Therefore, Steps 11–17 must to the recommended inflation severely damaged and the tire
be done immediately after pressure, remove the
Step 10.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
sealant cannot seal the tire. Using the Tire Sealant and See If a Tire Goes Flat on
See Roadside Assistance Compressor Kit without page 10-64 for other important
Program on page 13-5. Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not safety warnings.
If the tire pressure has not Punctured) 1. Remove the tire sealant and
dropped more than 68 kPa To use the air compressor to inflate compressor kit from its storage
(10 psi) from the recommended a tire with air only and not sealant: location. See Storing the Tire
inflation pressure, inflate the Sealant and Compressor Kit on
tire to the recommended page 10-72 or Storing the Tire
inflation pressure. Sealant and Compressor Kit
19. Wipe off any sealant from the (Diesel) on page 10-73.
wheel, tire or vehicle. 2. Unlock the air only hose (6) from
20. Dispose of the used sealant the sealant canister (2) by
canister (2) and sealant/air pulling up on the lever.
hose (7) assembly at a local 3. Pull the air only hose (6) from
dealer or in accordance with the sealant canister (2).
local state codes and practices. 4. Remove the power plug (3) from
21. Replace it with a new canister the air compressor (1).
available from your dealer. 5. Place the kit on the ground.
22. After temporarily sealing a tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire Make sure the tire valve stem is
using the tire sealant and and wheel damage by driving slowly positioned close to the ground
compressor kit, take the to a level place. Turn on the hazard so the hose will reach it.
vehicle to an authorized dealer warning flashers. See Hazard
within 161 km (100 mi) of 6. Remove the tire valve stem cap
Warning Flashers on page 6-3.
driving to have the tire repaired by turning it counterclockwise.
or replaced.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
7. Attach the air only hose (6) onto 11. Inflate the tire to the 14. Disconnect the air only hose
the tire valve stem and press the recommended inflation (6) from the tire valve stem by
lever down to secure it. pressure using the pressure lifting the lever. Replace the tire
8. Plug the power plug (3) into the gauge (5). The recommended valve stem cap.
accessory power outlet in the inflation pressure can be found 15. Replace the air only hose (6)
vehicle. Unplug all items from on the Tire and Loading and the power plug (3) back in
other accessory power outlets. Information label. See Tire its original location.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6. Pressure on page 10-51.
16. Place the equipment in the
If the vehicle has an accessory The pressure gauge (5) may original storage location in the
power outlet, do not use the read higher than the actual tire vehicle.
cigarette lighter. pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off The tire sealant and compressor kit
If the vehicle only has a cigarette to get an accurate reading. The has an accessory adapter located in
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. compressor may be turned on/ a compartment on the bottom of its
Do not pinch the power plug off until the correct pressure is housing that may be used to inflate
cord in the door or window. reached. air mattresses, balls, etc.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle 12. Press the on/off button (4) to Removal and Installation of the
must be running while using the turn the tire sealant and Sealant Canister
air compressor. compressor kit off.
To remove the sealant canister:
10. Press the on/off button (4) to Be careful while handling the
turn the compressor on. tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
The compressor will inflate the usage.
tire with air only.
13. Unplug the power plug (3) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
1. Unlock the air only hose (6) from To install a new sealant canister:
the sealant canister (2) by 1. Align the sealant/air hose (7)
pulling up on the lever. with the slot in the air
2. Pull the air only hose (6) from compressor.
the sealant canister (2). 2. Push the sealant canister (2)
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (7) down and turn it clockwise.
from the compressor (1). 3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (7)
around the air compressor
channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Push the air only hose (6) onto
the sealant canister inlet and 2. Turn the left knob
push the lever down. counterclockwise and the right
knob clockwise, 90 degrees, at
Storing the Tire Sealant the same time. Then pull the
access panel rearward and up to
and Compressor Kit remove it.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk, under the
load floor, behind an access panel.
4. Turn the sealant canister (2) so
the inflator filling hose is aligned To remove the kit:
with the slot in the compressor. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
5. Lift the sealant canister (2) from page 2-14.
the compressor and replace with
a new sealant canister. See your
dealer for more information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
Storing the Tire Sealant 3. Remove the tire sealant and

compressor kit from the storage
and Compressor Kit compartment.
(Diesel) 4. Remove the tire sealant and
The tire sealant and compressor kit compressor kit from the bag.
is located in the trunk in a storage
To store the inflator kit, reverse the
compartment on the driver side of
steps.
the vehicle.
To remove the kit: Tire Changing
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
Removing the Spare Tire and
page 2-14.
Tools
3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.
To access the spare tire and tools:
Squeeze the two tabs of the
quick release buckle to remove
the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
To store the inflator kit, reverse the
steps.
2. Turn the wing nut

counterclockwise to remove it.
1. Retainer Nut
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
2. Tool Bag Tether Removing the Flat Tire and

3. Tool Bag Installing the Spare Tire
4. Spare Tire This vehicle may have aluminum
wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on Use the wheel wrench to loosen all
page 2-14. the wheel nuts. Do not remove
2. Lift the load floor. them yet.
3. Turn the retainer nut (1) Or, this vehicle may have steel
counterclockwise to remove it. wheels with plastic covers.
Then remove the tool bag
tether (2) from the stow rod, the
tool bag (3) containing the wheel 1. Three-Piece Wrench
wrench and wheel blocks, and
the spare tire (4). 2. Hex Head Jack
4. Remove the jack, jack handle 3. Jack Handle Extension

extension, and two-piece 4. Coin/Pierce Jack
wrench, if equipped.
5. Two-Piece Wrench
This vehicle may have one of the
following: A coin/pierce jack (4), a
jack handle extension (3), and a
two-piece wrench (5), or a hex head
jack (2) and three-piece wrench (1). To remove the plastic covers and
wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
If needed, finish loosening them

with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down, as it
could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until the flat tire is repaired 2. Turn the wheel wrench 5. If this vehicle is the RS model,
or replaced. counterclockwise once on each locate the front or rear jack
Once you have removed the wheel wheel nut to loosen it. Do not cover on the rocker molding
cover, use the following procedure remove them yet. near the tire being changed.
to remove the flat tire and install the 3. Place the jack near the flat tire. Place your hand behind the
spare tire. edge of the cover on the rocker
4. Place the wheel blocks on both
1. Do a safety check before sides of the tire at the opposite molding. Pull down and out to
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes corner of the tire being changed. remove the cover.
Flat on page 10-64 for more See If a Tire Goes Flat on The cover will remain attached
information. page 10-64 for proper wheel to the molding by a tether.
block placement. 6. Place the jack under the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension { Warning
to the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack. Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If you have a hex head jack, If the vehicle slips off the jack,
place the hex tube end of the you could be badly injured or
wrench over the hex head of killed. Never get under a vehicle
the jack. when it is supported only by
a jack.
{ Caution
Make sure that the jack lift head
is in the correct position or you 8. Position the jack lift head at the { Warning
may damage your vehicle. The jack location nearest the flat tire.
repairs would not be covered by The location is indicated by a Raising the vehicle with the jack
your warranty. notch in the flange. The jack improperly positioned can
must not be used in any other damage the vehicle and even
position. make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
{ Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/ Make sure the jack lift head
is provided with the vehicle, only Pierce Jack Similar notch is placed in the flange
use it for changing a flat tire. notch.
9. Raise the jack by turning the
handle clockwise until it comes Raise the vehicle far enough off
in contact with the notch in the the ground so there is enough
flange. room for the road tire to clear the
ground.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-78 Vehicle Care

an emergency, a cloth or a paper Never use oil or grease on bolts
towel can be used; however, use or nuts because the nuts might
a scraper or wire brush later to come loose. The vehicle's wheel
remove all rust or dirt. could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.

Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 15. Lower the vehicle by turning
11. Remove the flat tire. the jack handle
counterclockwise.
{ Warning { Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can Wheel nuts that are improperly or
make wheel nuts become loose incorrectly tightened can cause
after time. The wheel could come the wheels to become loose or
12. Remove any rust or dirt from
off and cause an accident. When come off. The wheel nuts should
the wheel bolts, mounting
changing a wheel, remove any be tightened with a torque wrench
surfaces, and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the to the proper torque specification
13. Place the compact spare tire after replacing. Follow the torque
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In on the wheel-mounting surface. specification supplied by the
(Continued)
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
Warning (Continued)
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
{ Caution Front Jack Cover Shown, Rear

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
Improperly tightened wheel nuts a crisscross sequence, as Jack Cover Similar
can lead to brake pulsation and shown. 19. If this vehicle is the RS model,
rotor damage. To avoid expensive snap the jack cover back into
17. Lower the jack all the way and
brake repairs, evenly tighten the remove the jack from under the place.
wheel nuts in the proper vehicle.
sequence and to the proper 20. Remove the wheel blocks and
torque specification. See 18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly return them to their proper
with the wheel wrench. storage location.
Capacities and Specifications for
the wheel nut torque specification. When reinstalling the wheel cover or
center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with the
wheel wrench an additional
one-quarter of a turn.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-80 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the foam container from 6. Place the tool bag tether over
{ Caution the rear storage compartment. the stow rod and the tool bag
rear of the flat tire.
Wheel covers will not fit on the
vehicle's compact spare. If you try 7. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
to put a wheel cover on the until tight.
compact spare, the cover or the 8. Replace the load floor.
spare could be damaged.
The load floor may not lay flat.
The compact spare is for temporary
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire use only. Replace the compact
and Tools spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
{ Warning Storing the Compact Spare Tire
Storing a jack, a tire, or other Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, Hex and Tools
equipment in the passenger Head Jack Similar Reverse the instructions for
compartment of the vehicle could removing the spare tire and tools to
3. Place the flat tire in the storage store the compact spare tire.
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
compartment with the valve
collision, loose equipment could stem down.
strike someone. Store all these in Compact Spare Tire
the proper place. 4. Place the jack and jack handle
extension, if the vehicle has one,
in the foam container. { Warning
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
5. Place the foam container inside Driving with more than one
1. Replace the wheel wrench and the flat tire. Align the hole with compact spare tire at a time could
wheel blocks in the tool bag. the stow rod. result in loss of braking and
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
When using a compact spare tire,

Warning (Continued) the ABS and Traction Control { Caution
systems may engage until the spare
handling. This could lead to a tire is recognized by the vehicle, Tire chains will not fit the compact
crash and you or others could be especially on slippery roads. Adjust spare. Using them can damage
injured. Use only one compact driving to reduce possible the vehicle and the chains. Do not
spare tire at a time. wheel slip. use tire chains on the compact
spare.
If this vehicle has a compact spare { Caution
tire, it was fully inflated when new;
however, it can lose air over time. When the compact spare is
Check the inflation pressure installed, do not take the vehicle
regularly. It should be 420 kPa through an automatic car wash
(60 psi). with guide rails. The compact
Stop as soon as possible and check spare can get caught on the rails
that the spare tire is correctly which can damage the tire, wheel,
inflated after being installed on the and other parts of the vehicle.
vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only. Do not use the compact spare on
The vehicle will perform differently other vehicles.
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle Do not mix the compact spare tire or
speed be limited to 80 km/h wheel with other wheels or tires.
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
the spare tire, have the standard tire and its wheel together.
repaired or replaced as soon as
convenient and return the spare tire
to the storage area.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting { Caution

For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result
page 10-28. in costly damage to the vehicle
that would not be covered by the
If the battery has run down, try to vehicle warranty. Trying to start
use another vehicle and some the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
will not work, and it could damage
Be sure to use the following steps to
the vehicle.
do it safely.
{ Warning 1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4

Batteries can hurt you. They can Engine, and 2.0L L4 Engine
be dangerous because: Similar
. They contain acid that can 1. Discharged Battery Negative
burn you. Grounding Point
. They contain gas that can 2. Discharged Battery Positive
explode or ignite. Terminal
. They contain enough 3. Good Battery Negative Terminal
electricity to burn you. 4. Good Battery Positive Terminal
If you do not follow these steps The jump start negative grounding
exactly, some or all of these point (1) for the discharged battery
things can hurt you. is the engine block or an engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-83
mounting bolt. Connect to a spot as

far away from the discharged Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued)
battery as possible.
damaged. Only use a vehicle that warranty. Whenever possible, turn
The jump start positive terminal on has a 12-volt system with a off or unplug all accessories on
the discharged battery (2) is located negative ground for jump starting. either vehicle when jump starting.
in the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle.
2. Position the two vehicles so that 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
The jump start positive terminal (4) they are not touching. Turn off all lights and
and negative terminal (3) are on the accessories in both vehicles,
battery of the vehicle providing the 3. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in P (Park) except the hazard warning
jump start. flashers if needed.
with an automatic transmission,
The positive jump start connection or Neutral with a manual
for the discharged battery is under a
trim cover. Open the cover to
transmission. See Shifting Into { Warning
Park on page 9-23 with an
expose the terminal. automatic transmission, An electric fan can start up even
1. Check the other vehicle. It must or Parking on page 9-25 with a when the engine is not running
have a 12-volt battery with a manual transmission. and can injure you. Keep hands,
negative ground system. clothing and tools away from any
{ Caution underhood electric fan.
{ Caution If any accessories are left on or
If the other vehicle does not have plugged in during the jump
a 12-volt system with a negative starting procedure, they could be
ground, both vehicles can be damaged. The repairs would not
(Continued) be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-84 Vehicle Care
9. Start the engine in the vehicle

{ Warning { Warning with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine least four minutes.
cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. the dead battery. If it will not
Use a flashlight if you need more start after a few tries, it
light. probably needs service.
5. Connect one end of the red
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the
{ Caution
water to the battery installed in discharged battery. If the jumper cables are
your new vehicle. But if a battery 6. Connect the other end of the red connected or removed in the
has filler caps, be sure the right positive (+) cable to the wrong order, electrical shorting
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, positive (+) terminal of the good may occur and damage the
add water to take care of that battery. vehicle. The repairs would not be
first. If you do not, explosive gas 7. Connect one end of the black covered by the vehicle warranty.
could be present. negative (–) cable to the Always connect and remove the
Battery fluid contains acid that negative (–) terminal of the good jumper cables in the correct order,
can burn you. Do not get it on battery. making sure that the cables do
you. If you accidentally get it in not touch each other or other
8. Connect the other end of the
your eyes or on your skin, flush metal.
black negative (–) cable to the
the place with water and get negative (–) grounding point for
medical help immediately. the discharged battery. Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when
removing the jumper cables.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-85
Towing the Vehicle Consult your dealer or a Here are some important things to
professional towing service if the consider before recreational vehicle
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing:
{ Caution To tow the vehicle behind another . The towing capacity of the
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle for recreational purposes, towing vehicle. Be sure to read
vehicle may cause damage. The such as behind a motor home, see the tow vehicle manufacturer's
damage would not be covered by “Recreational Vehicle Towing” recommendations.
the vehicle warranty. Do not lash following. . How far the vehicle will be
or hook to the chassis towed. Some vehicles have
components — including the front Recreational Vehicle restrictions on how far and how
and rear subframes, suspension Towing long they can tow.
control arms, and links — during Recreational vehicle towing refers to . The proper towing equipment.
towing and recovery of a disabled towing the vehicle behind another See your dealer or trailering
vehicle, or when securing the vehicle – such as behind a motor professional for additional advice
vehicle to a flatbed car carrier. home. The two most common types and equipment
Use the proper nylon strap of recreational vehicle towing are recommendations.
harnesses around the tires to known as dinghy towing and dolly . If the vehicle is ready to be
secure them to the flatbed car towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed. Just as preparing the
carrier. vehicle with all four wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
ground. Dolly towing is towing the the vehicle is prepared to be
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed vehicle with two wheels on the towed.
car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. ground and two wheels up on a
If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the device known as a dolly.
drive wheels cannot contact the
road while the vehicle is being
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-86 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing (with Automatic Vehicles with an automatic 2. Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Transmission) transmission should not be towed 3. Turn the ignition to ACC/
with all four wheels on the ground. ACCESSORY.
If the vehicle must be towed, a dolly
should be used. See "Dolly Towing" 4. To prevent the battery from
that follows. draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove fuse 22,
Dinghy Towing (with Manual 23, 24, and 25 from the
Transmission) instrument panel fuse block. See
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
page 10-42.
Remember to reinstall the fuses
once the destination has been
reached.
{ Caution
{ Caution
If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded
If the vehicle is towed with all four while towing the vehicle, it could
wheels on the ground, the be damaged. Never exceed
drivetrain components could be 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing
damaged. The repairs would not the vehicle.
be covered by the vehicle To dinghy tow the vehicle from the
warranty. Do not tow the vehicle front with all four wheels on the
with all four wheels on the ground:
ground. 1. Position the vehicle to tow and
then secure it to the towing
vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-87
Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a

straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
{ Caution
Towing the vehicle from the rear Tow the vehicle with the two rear
could damage it. Also, repairs wheels on the ground and the front
would not be covered by the wheels on a dolly:
vehicle warranty. Never have the To tow the vehicle with two wheels
vehicle towed from the rear. on the ground and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Shift the automatic transmission
into P (Park) or a manual
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
3. Set the parking brake.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-88 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

Towing the vehicle from the rear Exterior Care products can be obtained from
could damage it. Also, repairs your dealer. Follow all
would not be covered by the Locks manufacturer directions regarding
vehicle warranty. Never have the Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary
vehicle towed from the rear. Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any
locks greased after using. See vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12.
Washing the Vehicle { Caution
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
of power washers exceeding
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals.
agents as they can damage the
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic This e symbol is on any
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power
warranty. Approved cleaning
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-89
washed. This could cause damage repaired. Foreign materials such as

that would not be covered by the calcium chloride and other salts, ice { Caution
vehicle warranty. melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from Machine compounding or
If using an automatic car wash, aggressive polishing on a
comply with the car wash industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
instructions. The windshield wiper may damage it. Use only
and rear window wiper, if equipped, remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. non-abrasive waxes and polishes
must be off. Remove any that are made for a basecoat/
accessories that may be damaged If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for clearcoat paint finish on the
or interfere with the car wash
painted surfaces to remove foreign vehicle.
equipment.
matter.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild To keep the paint finish looking new,
cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove keep the vehicle garaged or
are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See covered whenever possible.
they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
products. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Dry the finish with a soft, clean Moldings
chamois or an all-cotton towel to Do not apply waxes or polishes to
avoid surface scratches and water uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
{ Caution
spotting.
as damage can occur. Failure to clean and protect the
Finish Care bright metal moldings can result
Application of aftermarket clearcoat in a hazy white finish or pitting.
sealant/wax materials is not This damage would not be
recommended. If painted surfaces covered by the vehicle warranty.
are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-90 Vehicle Care
The bright metal moldings on the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,
vehicle are aluminum. To prevent Lenses, Emblems, Decals and or other harsh cleaners.
damage always follow these Stripes . Ice scrapers or other hard items.
cleaning instructions:
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a . Aftermarket appearance caps or
. Be sure the molding is cool to soft cloth, and a car washing soap covers while the lamps are
the touch before applying any to clean exterior lamps, lenses and illuminated, due to excessive
cleaning solution. emblems. Follow instructions under heat generated.
. Use a cleaning solution "Washing the Vehicle" previously in
approved for aluminum. Some this section. { Caution
cleaners are highly acidic or Lamp covers are made of plastic,
contain alkaline substances and and some have a UV protective Failure to clean lamps properly
can damage the moldings. coating. can cause damage to the lamp
cover that would not be covered
. Always dilute a concentrated Use only lukewarm water, a soft
cleaner according to the by the vehicle warranty.
cloth, and mild car washing soap to
manufacturer’s instructions. clean exterior lamps and lenses. Do
. Do not use chrome cleaners. not clean or wipe them while they
. Do not use cleaners that are not
are dry. { Caution
intended for automotive use. Do not use any of the following on
Using wax on low gloss black
lamp covers:
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the finish stripes can increase the
vehicle after washing to protect . Abrasive or caustic agents. gloss level and create a
and extend the molding finish. . Washer fluids and other cleaning non-uniform finish. Clean low
agents in higher concentrations gloss stripes with soap and
than suggested by the water only.
manufacturer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-91
Air Intakes Windshield and Wiper Blades Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. If the wiper motor overheats,
Clear debris from the air intakes, Clean the outside of the windshield
the windshield wipers will stop until
between the hood and windshield, with glass cleaner.
the motor cools and the wiper
when washing the vehicle. Clean rubber blades using lint-free control is turned off. See Electrical
Shutter System cloth or paper towel soaked with System Overload on page 10-37 for
windshield washer fluid or a mild more information.
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the Weatherstrips
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax weatherstrips to make them last
treatments may cause wiper longer, seal better, and not stick or
streaking. squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at
Replace the wiper blades if they are least once a year. Hot, dry climates
worn or damaged. Damage can be may require more frequent
caused by extreme dusty application. Black marks from
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, rubber material on painted surfaces
snow and ice. can be removed by rubbing with a
clean cloth. See Recommended
Clear ice and snow from the wiper Fluids and Lubricants on
The vehicle may have a shutter blades before using them. If frozen page 11-12.
system designed to help increase to the windshield, carefully loosen
fuel economy. Keep the shutter them or thaw them. Damaged wiper
system clean for proper operation. blades should be replaced. See
Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 10-30 for more information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-92 Vehicle Care
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
{ Caution Caution (Continued)
clean the tires. Chrome wheels and other chrome automatic car wash that uses
trim may be damaged if the silicone carbide tire cleaning
{ Caution vehicle is not washed after driving brushes. Damage could occur
on roads that have been sprayed and the repairs would not be
Using petroleum-based tire with magnesium, calcium, covered by the vehicle warranty.
dressing products on the vehicle or sodium chloride. These
may damage the paint finish and/ chlorides are used on roads for
or tires. When applying a tire Steering, Suspension, and
conditions such as ice and dust.
dressing, always wipe off any Chassis Components
Always wash the chrome with
overspray from all painted soap and water after exposure. Visually inspect the front and rear
surfaces on the vehicle. suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. If equipped, inspect
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
{ Caution the hydraulic power steering for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild To avoid surface damage, do not cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check
soap and water to clean the wheels. use strong soaps, chemicals, constant velocity joints, rubber
After rinsing thoroughly with clean abrasive polishes, cleaners, boots, and axle seals for leaks.
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. brushes, or cleaners that contain
A wax may then be applied. acid on aluminum or Body Component Lubrication
chrome-plated wheels. Use only Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
approved cleaners. Also, never hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and
drive a vehicle with aluminum or steel fuel door hinge unless the
chrome-plated wheels through an components are plastic. Applying
(Continued) silicone grease on weatherstrips
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-93
with a clean cloth will make them Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick dust from knobs and crevices on the
Quickly repair minor chips and
or squeak. instrument cluster. Using a mild
scratches with touch-up materials
soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance available from your dealer to avoid
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
corrosion. Larger areas of finish
At least twice a year, Spring and repellent from all interior surfaces or
damage can be corrected in your
Fall, use plain water to flush dirt and permanent damage may result.
dealer's body and paint shop.
debris from the vehicle's underbody. Your dealer may have products for
Your dealer or an underbody car Chemical Paint Spotting cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
washing system can do this. If not specifically designed for the
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
removed, rust and corrosion can surfaces being cleaned to prevent
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
develop. permanent damage. Apply all
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular cleaners directly to the cleaning
dark spots etched into the paint cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and surface. See “Finish Care” on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or previously in this section. Cleaners should be removed
replacement, make sure the body quickly. Never allow cleaners to
repair shop applies anti-corrosion remain on the surface being
material to parts repaired or Interior Care
cleaned for extended periods
replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time.
protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
Original manufacturer replacement can become concentrated in the
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
protection while maintaining the and adhere to all safety instructions
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the
interior. interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-94 Vehicle Care
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass Coated Moldings

the interior using the following
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Coated moldings should be cleaned.
cleaners or techniques:
dampened with water. Wipe droplets . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
. Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be dampened with water.
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water. . When heavily soiled, use warm
. Never use a brush with stiff
soapy water.
bristles.
. Never rub any surface { Caution Fabric/Carpet/Suede
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use Start by vacuuming the surface
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive using a soft brush attachment. If a
. Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or rotating brush attachment is being
dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage used during vacuuming, only use it
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger. on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
use approximately 20 drops per gently remove as much of the soil
3.8 L (1 gal) of water. as possible using one of the
A concentrated soap solution will Cleaning the windshield with water following techniques:
leave a residue that creates during the first three to six months
of ownership will reduce tendency
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not towel. Continue blotting until no
use solutions that contain strong to fog.
more soil can be removed.
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers . For solid soils, remove as much
. Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover as possible prior to vacuuming.
upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
. Do not use solvents or cleaners be damaged. Clean spots with just
containing solvents. water and mild soap.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-95
To clean: cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small

1. Saturate a clean lint-free hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
colorfast cloth with water. using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring Do not attach a device with a
Microfiber cloth is recommended suction cup to the display. This
to prevent lint transfer to the formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet. may cause damage and would
fabric or carpet. not be covered by the warranty.
2. Remove excess moisture by Following the cleaning process, a
gently wringing until water does paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture. Instrument Panel, Leather,
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,
3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and Natural Open Pore Wood
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays Surfaces
a clean area frequently to For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the Use a soft microfiber cloth
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric. dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
dust and loose dirt. For a more
4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
thorough cleaning, use a soft
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
microfiber cloth dampened with a
longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
mild soap solution.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners { Caution
solution followed only by plain or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately, Soaking or saturating leather,
water. especially perforated leather, as
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly well as other interior surfaces,
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use. (Continued)
use a commercial upholstery
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-96 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued) { Caution { Warning

may cause permanent damage. Use of air fresheners may cause Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
Wipe excess moisture from these permanent damage to plastics It may severely weaken them. In
surfaces after cleaning and allow and painted surfaces. If an air a crash, they might not be able to
them to dry naturally. Never use freshener comes in contact with provide adequate protection.
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot any plastic or painted surface in Clean safety belts only with mild
removers. Do not use cleaners the vehicle, blot immediately and soap and lukewarm water.
that contain silicone or wax-based clean with a soft cloth dampened
products. Cleaners containing with a mild soap solution.
these solvents can permanently Damage caused by air fresheners Floor Mats
change the appearance and feel would not be covered by the
of leather or soft trim and are not vehicle warranty. { Warning
recommended.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
Cargo Cover and is not properly installed, it can
Do not use cleaners that increase Convenience Net interfere with the pedals.
gloss, especially on the instrument Interference with the pedals can
panel. Reflected glare can decrease Wash with warm water and mild
detergent. Do not use chlorine cause unintended acceleration
visibility through the windshield and/or increased stopping
under certain conditions. bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
then dry completely. distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
Care of Safety Belts mat does not interfere with the
Keep belts clean and dry. pedals.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Vehicle Care 10-97
Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the

proper floor mat usage: Floor Mats
. The original equipment floor Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
mats were designed for your to unlock each retainer and remove.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
. Use only a single floor mat on
retainer openings over the carpet
the driver side.
retainers and snapping into position.
. Do not place one floor mat on
Make sure the floor mat is properly
top of another.
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
10-98 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Maintenance Replacement scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 needs. have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Maintenance Records Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Mainly driven in hilly or
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. mountainous terrain. Maintenance
There may need to be more . Frequently towing a trailer. Schedule
frequent checks and services.
The Additional Required
. Used for high speed or Owner Checks and Services
Services - Normal are for competitive driving.
At Each Fuel Stop
vehicles that: . Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.
. Check the engine oil level. See
. Carry passengers and cargo Engine Oil on page 10-11.
within recommended limits on Refer to the information in the
the Tire and Loading Information Maintenance Schedule Additional Once a Month
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Required Services - Severe chart. . Check the tire inflation
on page 9-9. pressures. See Tire Pressure on
. Are driven on reasonable road { Warning page 10-51.
surfaces within legal driving . Inspect the tires for wear. See
limits. Performing maintenance work can
Tire Inspection on page 10-56.
.
be dangerous and can cause
Use the recommended fuel. See serious injury. Perform . Check the windshield washer
Recommended Fuel (Gasoline) maintenance work only if the fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
on page 9-52. page 10-25.
required information, proper tools,
Refer to the information in the and equipment are available. Engine Oil Change
Maintenance Schedule Additional If they are not, see your dealer to
Required Services - Normal chart. have a trained technician do the When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
work. See Doing Your Own SOON DIC message displays, have
The Additional Required
Service Work on page 10-3. the engine oil and filter changed
Services - Severe are for vehicles
within the next 1 000 km/600 mi.
that are:
If driven under the best conditions,
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic the engine oil life system might not
in hot weather. indicate the need for vehicle service
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
for more than a year. The engine oil Tire Rotation and Required
. Check tire inflation pressures.
and filter must be changed at least Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on
once a year and the oil life system page 10-51.
7,500 mi
must be reset. Your trained dealer . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
technician can perform this work. Rotate the tires, if recommended for
Inspection on page 10-56.
If the engine oil life system is reset the vehicle, and perform the
accidentally, service the vehicle following services. See Tire . Visually check for fluid leaks.
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Rotation on page 10-57. . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
last service. Reset the oil life . Check engine oil level and oil See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
system when the oil is changed. life percentage. If needed, page 10-17.
See Engine Oil Life System on change engine oil and filter, and . Inspect brake system.
page 10-15. reset oil life system. See Engine
Oil on page 10-11 and Engine
. Visually inspect steering,
On vehicles with diesel engines, it is
Oil Life System on page 10-15. suspension, and chassis
recommended to drain the diesel
components for damaged, loose,
fuel filter of water when the oil is . Check engine coolant level. See or missing parts or signs of
changed or when the WATER IN Engine Coolant on page 10-19. wear. See Exterior Care on
FUEL – CONTACT SERVICE . Check windshield washer fluid page 10-88.
message displays.
level. See Washer Fluid on . Check restraint system
page 10-25. components. See Safety System
. Visually inspect windshield wiper Check on page 3-15.
blades for wear, cracking, . Visually inspect fuel system for
or contamination. See Exterior damage or leaks.
Care on page 10-88. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
. Visually inspect exhaust system
See Wiper Blade Replacement and nearby heat shields for
on page 10-30. loose or damaged parts.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Lubricate body components. See . Check tire sealant expiration
Exterior Care on page 10-88. date, if equipped. See Tire
. Check starter switch. See Starter Sealant and Compressor Kit on
Switch Check on page 10-29. page 10-66.
. Check automatic transmission
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
shift lock control function. See if equipped. See Sunroof on
Automatic Transmission Shift page 2-23.
Lock Control Function Check on
page 10-29.
. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10-30.
. Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10-30.
. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Drain the diesel fuel filter of water. (Diesel Only)
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
2.0L Diesel Engine Only: Replace fuel filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4) @ @ @
Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
ignition coil boots.
@
1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
@ @
1.4L and 1.8L Engine Vehicles Only: Change
automatic transmission fluid. Change filter if @
serviceable.
1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt, idler
pulley, and timing belt tensioner. (7)
@
2.0L Diesel Engine Only: Replace the timing belt,
timing belt tensioner, idler pulley, and water @
pump. (7)
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Replace clutch fluid. (7) @
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every five years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services - Normal page 10-18.
(1) Or every two years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. More frequent comes first. Inspect for fraying,
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage;
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy replace, if needed.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
or areas with high dust levels. comes first.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every two years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Drain the diesel fuel filter of water. (Diesel Only)
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
2.0L Diesel Engine Only: Replace fuel filter. (3) @ @ @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change manual transmission fluid. @ @ @
Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
@
1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
@ @
1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt. (7) @
2.0L Diesel Engine Only: Replace the timing belt,
timing belt tensioner, idler pulley, and water @
pump. (7)
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Replace clutch fluid. (7) @ @ @ @ @
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Footnotes — Maintenance (5) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services - Severe page 10-18. Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent comes first. Inspect for fraying, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the excessive cracking, or damage; components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy replace, if needed. 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, (7) Or every 10 years, whichever . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. comes first. performed. See "Underbody
Replacement may also be needed if
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
there is a reduction in air flow,
on page 10-88.
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every two years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
It is recommended that your dealer connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
perform these services — their corrosion-free.
trained dealer technicians know Fluids
your vehicle best. Your dealer can Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
also perform a thorough . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
assessment with a multi-point squeak or show signs of and components. See
inspection to recommend when your cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
vehicle may need attention. Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM
. Trained dealer technicians have
The following list is intended to access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
explain the services and conditions to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
to look for that may indicate recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be
services are required. replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill.
. A message may indicate when . Instrument cluster lights may
scheduled maintenance on the come on to indicate that fluids
timing belt and other may be low and need to be
components is required. filled.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multi-point inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicle’s interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-93 and Exterior Care on
. With a multi-point inspection, the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-88.
your dealer can check the lamps and can reduce the risk of tire
and note any concerns. failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil (Gasoline) Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 ® specification of the proper
SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.
See Engine Oil on page 10-11.
Engine Oil (Diesel) dexos2™ is designed for use with light-duty diesel engines. Use only
engine oil licensed to the dexos2 specification of the proper SAE viscosity
grade.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-19.
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Diesel Exhaust Aftertreatment System Diesel Exhaust Fluid (GM Part No. 19286291, in Canada 88862660) or
diesel exhaust fluid that meets ISO 22241-1 or displays the API Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Certification Mark.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(Except 2.0L Diesel)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission (2.0L Diesel) AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19256039, in
Canada 19256040).
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 13272719 AC3144C
1.8L L4 Engine 13272720 AC3145C
2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 13272719 AC3144C
Engine Oil Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 55594651 PF2257G
1.8L L4 Engine 55594651 PF2257G
2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 19301505 PF103G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176
Spark Plugs
1.4L L4 Engine 55585534 41–122
1.8L L4 Engine 55585534 41–122
Wiper Blades
Driver – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 95161605 —
Passenger – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 95161606 —
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 Engine 5.5 L 5.8 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 6.5 L 6.9 qt
2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt
1.8L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt
2.0L L4 Diesel Engine 4.5 L 4.75 qt
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Fuel Tank
Standard Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal
With RPO NL6 Fuel Tank 48.0 L 12.6 gal
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 18.5 L 4.9 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 (LUV) B Automatic 0.60 – 0.70 mm
Manual (0.24 – 0.028 in)
1.8L L4 (LUW) H Automatic 0.60 – 0.70 mm
Manual (0.24 – 0.028 in)
1.8L L4 (LWE) G Automatic 0.60 – 0.70 mm
Manual (0.24 – 0.028 in)
2.0L L4 Diesel (LUZ) Z Automatic -
Spark plug gap is for replacement spark plugs.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine 2.0L L4 Diesel Engine

1.4L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800–222–1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the . Towing or services for vehicles
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for driven on a non-public road or
Chevrolet and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle highway.
Canada Limited reserve the right to was in a crash and cannot be
make any changes or discontinue driven. Assistance is also given Services Specific to
the Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
Chevrolet and General Motors of . Flat Tire Change: Service to is approximately $5 Canadian.
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Diesel fuel delivery may be
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
restricted. Propane and other to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring
fuels are not provided through Mechanical failures may be the vehicle for service, you are
this service. covered, however any cost for urged to do so as early in the work
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for
registration is required. covered by the warranty are the same-day repair.
owner responsibility.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Courtesy Transportation
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where your Program
trip was started to qualify. Appointments To enhance your ownership
General Motors of Canada When the vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating
Limited requires service, contact your dealer and dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
pre-authorization, original request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer support
detailed receipts, and a copy of scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the
the repair orders. Once and advising the service consultant Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
authorization has been received, of your transportation needs, your Coverage period in Canada),
the Roadside Assistance advisor dealer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and/or
will help to make arrangements inconvenience. hybrid-specific warranties in both
and explain how to receive the U.S. and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
payment.
into the service department Several Courtesy Transportation
. Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in
assistance cannot be provided can be scheduled for service, reducing inconvenience when
right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required.
Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a
permission to get local your dealership, let them know this, part of the New Vehicle Limited
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet
receive payment, up to $100,
entitled “Limited Warranty and
after sending the original receipt
Owner Assistance Information”
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
furnished with each new vehicle Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
provides detailed warranty coverage Reimbursement and must be supported by original
information. If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement
Transportation Options and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
Warranty service can generally be your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements.
completed while you wait. However, expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include
if you are unable to wait, GM helps original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements,
to minimize inconvenience by to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
providing several transportation GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage
options. Depending on the for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be
circumstances, your dealer can offer arrange transportation through a responsible for taxes, levies, usage
one of the following: friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle Service repair.
expenses may be available. Claim
Shuttle service is the preferred amounts should reflect actual costs It may not be possible to provide a
means of offering Courtesy and be supported by original like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Transportation. Dealers may provide receipts. See your dealer for
shuttle service to get you to your information regarding the allowance Additional Program
destination with minimal interruption amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information
of your daily schedule. This includes or other transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
one-way or round-trip shuttle service
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
within reasonable time and distance
every dealer. Please contact your
parameters of your dealer's area. Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information about
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or availability. All Courtesy
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not
conditions described herein at its may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty.
sole discretion. parts are typically removed from Repair Facility
vehicles that were total losses in
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
If the vehicle is involved in a meets your needs before you ever
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
technician using the proper
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
equipment and quality replacement state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
value, and safety performance can
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
be compromised in subsequent equipment.
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle
Collision Parts that warranty.
Protect your investment in the GM
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also vehicle with comprehensive and
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by collision insurance coverage. There
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. quality of coverage afforded by
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit various insurance policy terms.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs

. Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM Number (VIN).
If there has been an injury, call
vehicle by limiting compensation for . Insurance company and policy
emergency services for help. Do not
damage repairs by using number.
leave the scene of a crash until all
aftermarket collision parts. Some
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the
insurance companies will not
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
puts you in danger, or you are
When purchasing insurance, we Choose a reputable repair facility
instructed to move it by a police
recommend that you ensure that the that uses quality replacement parts.
officer.
vehicle will be repaired with GM See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information section.
If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What
available from your current in the crash.
Will You See after an Airbag
insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3-22.
to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing page 13-5. Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have Repair Process
Gather the following information:
insurance that ensures repairs with In the event that the vehicle requires
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver name, address, and damage repairs, GM recommends
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or telephone number. that you take an active role in its
Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as repair facility of choice, take the
you may be charged at the end of
. Owner name, address, and
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
the lease for poor quality repairs. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle license plate number. required replacement collision parts
. Vehicle make, model, and be original equipment parts, either
model year. new Genuine GM parts or recycled
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,

recycled parts will not be covered by Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty.
Ordering Information Manual.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using suspension, brakes, electrical, Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Genuine GM parts. Remember, Service Bulletins $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be shipping fees.
Service Bulletins give additional
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Current and Past Models
needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. Technical Service Bulletins and
does not pay the full cost. Each bulletin contains instructions Manuals are available for current
to assist in the diagnosis and and past model GM vehicles.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs, service of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE:
you are not obligated to accept a 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
repair valuation based on that Owner Information 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
insurance company's collision policy Owner publications are written For Credit Card Orders Only
repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle. The
of the repair and parts choices as Owner Manual includes the
long as the cost stays within Maintenance Schedule for all
reasonable limits. models.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Or write to: Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Helm, Incorporated become involved in individual
Attention: Customer Service
Defects problems between you, your
47911 Halyard Drive dealer, or General Motors.
Plymouth, MI 48170 Reporting Safety Defects
To contact NHTSA, you may call
Prices are subject to change without to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
notice and without incurring Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
obligation. Allow ample time for (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
delivery. If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or write to:
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. death, you should immediately
funds.
Administrator, NHTSA
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail technician service the vehicle.
Code: CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a if the vehicle is leased, with the
better understanding of the consent of the lessee; in response
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and to an official request by police or
event data recorder EDR. The main injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are similar government office; as part of
purpose of an EDR is to record, in recorded by your vehicle only if a GM's defense of litigation through
certain crash or near crash-like non-trivial crash situation occurs; no the discovery process; or, as
situations, such as an air bag data are recorded by the EDR under required by law. Data that GM
deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no collects or receives may also be
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, used for GM research needs or may
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are be made available to others for
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, research purposes, where a need is
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could shown and the data is not tied to a
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
routinely acquired during a crash OnStar®
investigation.
record such data as: If the vehicle is equipped with
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar® and has an active
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and subscription, additional data may be
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is collected through the OnStar
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle system. This includes information
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as about the vehicle’s operation;
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collisions involving the vehicle; the
.
special equipment, can read the use of the vehicle and its features;
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and, in certain situations, the
the vehicle or the EDR. location and approximate GPS
and/or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar Terms and Conditions and GM vehicles does not use or record
Privacy Statement on the OnStar personal information or link with any
website. other GM system containing
personal information.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a
Radio Frequency
navigation system as part of the Statement
infotainment system, use of the This vehicle has systems that
system may result in the storage of operate on a radio frequency that
destinations, addresses, telephone comply with Part 15 of the Federal
numbers, and other trip information. Communications Commission (FCC)
See the infotainment manual for rules and with Industry Canada
information on stored data and for Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
deletion instructions.
Operation is subject to the following
Radio Frequency two conditions:
Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause
harmful interference.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
system security, as well as in interference that may cause
connection with conveniences such undesired operation of the
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) device.
transmitters for remote door locking/ Changes or modifications to any of
unlocking and starting, and these systems by other than an
in-vehicle transmitters for garage authorized service facility could void
door openers. RFID technology in authorization to use this equipment.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services Navigation

> to get a priority connection to
an Emergency Advisor available OnStar navigation requires the
24/7 to: Emergency Directions and Connections
With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get help for an emergency.
the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. have them sent to the vehicle
even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
. Get assistance in severe Destinations can also be forwarded
Press > to connect to an
weather or other crisis and to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
evacuation routes. Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with the information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank address and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar After five days, OnStar can contact The Advisor may give a verbal
and provide the Advisor with the Roadside Assistance and a route or may ask for a call back
current number. locksmith to help gain access to the after the vehicle is driven into an
vehicle. open area.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas
warranted as part of the New System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
furnishes detailed warranty buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
information. around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
underpasses, or parking
Languages garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
The vehicle can be programmed to dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
respond in multiple languages. not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
Press Q and ask an Advisor. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Advisors are available in English, OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Spanish and French. Available have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
languages may vary by country. exact location. call again or try again after driving a
. In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
Potential Issues can use the last stored GPS
OnStar cannot perform Remote location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Assistance after the vehicle has electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
been off continuously for five days. and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. available and operating for features
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
14-8 OnStar
to function properly. These systems OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
may not operate if the battery is acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
discharged or disconnected. THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
Add-on Electrical Equipment libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
The OnStar system is integrated
associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
into the electrical architecture of the
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
equipment. See Add-On Electrical CONTRACT, TORT OR
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
Equipment on page 9-69. Added
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
system and cause it to not operate. Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Privacy All rights reserved.
Except as contained in this notice,
The complete OnStar Privacy Permission to use, copy, modify,
the name of a copyright holder shall
Statement may be found at and distribute this software for any
not be used in advertising or
www.onstar.com (U.S.), purpose with or without fee is
otherwise to promote the sale, use
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). hereby granted, provided that the
or other dealings in this Software
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless above copyright notice and this
without prior written authorization of
communications are cautioned that permission notice appear in all
the copyright holder.
the privacy of any information sent copies.
via wireless cellular communications THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED unzip:
cannot be assured. Third parties “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
may unlawfully intercept or access ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR Info-ZIP copyright and license. The
transmissions and private IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT definitive version of this document
communications without consent. LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
OnStar 14-9
should be available at Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of

ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
license.html indefinitely. incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
rights reserved. inability to use this software. disabled.
For the purposes of this copyright Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
the following set of individuals: including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, marked as such and must not be
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris 1. Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright misrepresented as being the
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, original source. Such altered
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions. versions also must not be
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, misrepresented as being
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
14-10 OnStar
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail

addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Adding Equipment to the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Audio System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Automatic
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3
Additional Information
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Alarm Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-17
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alert Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Air Filter, Passenger
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-47 Automatic Transmission
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Antenna Shift Lock Control
Airbag System
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Auxiliary
How Does an Airbag
Antilock Brake Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 B
Appearance Care Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
What Makes an Airbag
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
What Will You See after an
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Voltage and Charging
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Assistance Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
When Should an Airbag
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-18
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-2 INDEX
Bluetooth C Check
Overview . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-23 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Brake Ignition
California
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-30
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Child Restraints
Perchlorate Materials
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Infants and Young
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Lower Anchors and
Camera
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-47
Capacities and
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Carbon Monoxide
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Cleaning
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Headlamps, Front Turn Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Cargo
Signal, and Parking Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cautions, Danger, and
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-34 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . 9-60
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-3
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid

Compartments Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . . . 9-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Text Telephone (TTY) Diesel Particulate Filter
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Compressor Kit, Tire Customer Information Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Service Publications Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Connections Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Door
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Customer Satisfaction Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Control Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Traction and Electronic Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 D Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Danger, Warnings, and Driver Information
Coolant Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Driving
Engine Temperature Daytime Running Characteristics and
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Devices Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Courtesy Transportation Diagnostics Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine (cont'd) F

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Filter
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cooling System Messages . . .5-28
Diesel Particulate . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Filter,
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-17
E Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Electrical Equipment, Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Electrical System Overheated Protection
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Engine Compartment Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Fluid
Fuses and Circuit Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-16
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Instrument Panel Fuse Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21
Diesel Exhaust . . . . . . . . . 1-22, 9-27
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-33
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Fog Lamps
Emergency Engines
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Engine Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Front Fog Lamp
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Check and Service Engine Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Front Seats
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Fuses Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Engine Compartment GM Mobility Reimbursement
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . .9-60 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Fuses and Circuit
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 H
Filling a Portable Fuel Instrument Panel Fuse Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 G Headlamps
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-53 Gasoline Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20 Gauges Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Engine Coolant Daytime Running
Requirements, California . . . . .9-53 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Running out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Water in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
What to Use in Canada Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22
and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Fuel for Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . 9-54 Warning Lights and Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Heater
General Information Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heating and Air
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-6 INDEX
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 J Lamps (cont'd)

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
How to Wear Safety Belts K Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-30 LATCH System
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Keyless Entry Replacing Parts after a
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
I LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-14, 9-16 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Ignition Transmission Lock L Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-45 Lighting
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lamps Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infants and Young Children, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lights
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Antilock Brake System
Instrument Panel Headlamps, Front Turn (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Signal, and Parking Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-19 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) M Messages (cont'd)

High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Object Detection System . . . . .5-31
Maintenance
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11 Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Recommended Fluids
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Traction Control System Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Mirrors
Messages
Wait to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Automatic Dimming
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-18 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Battery Voltage and
Locks Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . .5-30
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-19
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-28
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Monitor System, Tire
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Lower Anchors and Tethers Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
for Children (LATCH Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-8 INDEX
N OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking Assist

OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
Navigation
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Airbag Status
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Operation, Infotainment Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Passenger Compartment Air
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
O Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-23
Object Detection System Outlets Perchlorate Materials
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Overheated Engine Personalization
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Protection Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Off-Road Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Phone
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-18, 7-20, 7-23
Oil Overview, Infotainment Power
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
P Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Park Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30 Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
OnStar® Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
OnStar® Additional Power Steering Warning
Brake and P (Park)
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-9
Privacy Records Retained Accessory

Radio Frequency Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 Recreational Vehicle Ride Control Systems
Program Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Reduced Engine Power Roads
Proposition 65 Warning, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Reimbursement Program, Roadside Assistance
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
R Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof
Radio Frequency System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Radios Replacement Parts Running out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Running the Vehicle While
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Replacing LATCH System S
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-49 Replacing Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-15 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Recommended General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recommended Fluids and Restraints Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-15
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-14
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-10 INDEX
Safety Defects Reporting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Spare Tire

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Accessories and Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 StabiliTrak
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Maintenance, General OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Seats Publications Ordering Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Starting the Vehicle
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-18
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Shift Lock Control Function Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Check, Automatic Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Securing Child Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-47 Shifting Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Security Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Storage Areas
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Side Blind Zone Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Sidemarker Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Storing the Tire
Signals, Turn and Sealant and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Compressor Kit . . . . . .10-72, 10-73
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
INDEX i-11
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Tires (cont'd) Towing (cont'd)

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-85
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-52 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
System Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Traction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15 Sealant and Control System (TCS)/
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
T Sealant and Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Compressor Kit, Traction Control/Electronic
Taillamps Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72, 10-73 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Trailer
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Terminology and Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-17 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Transmission
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Uniform Tire Quality Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63 Transportation Program,
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 When It Is Time for New Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Towing Turn and Lane-Change
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-63 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-53 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68 Turn Signal
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
2014 - 2nd Edition - 7/15/13
i-12 INDEX
U Vehicle Care Water in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Storing the Tire What Fuel to Use in Canada
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-45
Sealant and and Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Uniform Tire Quality
Compressor Kit . . . . 10-72, 10-73 Wheels
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Alignment and Tire
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
V W When It Is Time for New
Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Wait to Start Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Warning
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning Light
Identification Windshield
Diesel Exhaust
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Fluid (DEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Winter
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Canada-6007168) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2014 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1

specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Vehicle Features

Initial Drive Press the key release button to

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Keyless Access

If equipped, press o { to activate

If a rear door handle is pulled the Seat Adjustment

{ Warning Press the switch down to open the

Seat Height Adjuster Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright

If available, move the lever up or To recline the seatback:

Press the control once for the

Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

Refer to the following sections for

2. Move the control to adjust the Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

Interior Lighting Reading Lamps This feature controls the brightness

1. Temperature Control 1. Temperature Control

8. Recirculation Up‐Shift Light Vehicle Features

The Bluetooth® system allows users _ SRC ^ : Press to select a source

Cruise Control SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down Driver Information

Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets Performance and

As the DEF tank becomes low on OnStar®

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

With an active OnStar subscription, Remote Keyless Entry

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

If the lock/unlock button is pressed

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or The battery is not rechargeable. To

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

A maximum of two remote starts,

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To cancel the safety lock: Doors Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

To open the trunk from outside the

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Vehicle Security Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Interior Mirrors

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Automatic Dimming Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

windows only have express-down. fully pulled up position will activate

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

This feature prevents the rear

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-23

Roof To express open or close the